 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| REJ09B0216-0300 The revision list can be viewed directly by clicking the title page. The revision list summarizes the locations of revisions and additions. Details should always be checked by referring to the relevant text. 16 H8/36079Group, H8/36077Group Hardware Manual Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer H8 Family/H8/300H Tiny Series H8/36079 H8/36079GF, H8/36079LF, H8/36078GF, H8/36078LF, H8/36077GF, H8/36077LF, H8/36074GF, H8/36074LF, HD64F36079G HD64F36079L HD64F36078G HD64F36078L HD64F36077G HD64F36077L HD64F36074G HD64F36074L H8/36077 Rev.3.00 Revision Date: Sep. 10, 2007 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page ii of xxxii Notes regarding these materials 1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in this document. 2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising out of the use of any information in this document, including, but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples. 3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export control laws and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations. 4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples, is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this document, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed through our website. (http://www.renesas.com ) 5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information included in this document. 6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application. Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the information in this document or Renesas products. 7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or undersea communication transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas sales office beforehand. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above. 8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below: (1) artificial life support devices or systems (2) surgical implantations (3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.) (4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all damages arising out of such applications. 9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges. 10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you. 11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your products. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment. 12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written approval from Renesas. 13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have any other inquiries. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page iii of xxxii General Precautions on Handling of Product 1. Treatment of NC Pins Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins. The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the operation of the LSI is not guaranteed. 2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level. Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a passthrough current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur. 3. Processing before Initialization Note: When power is first supplied, the product's state is undefined. The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately after the power supply has been turned on. 4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited. The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system's operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page iv of xxxii Configuration of This Manual This manual comprises the following items: 1. General Precautions on Handling of Product 2. Configuration of This Manual 3. Preface 4. Contents 5. Overview 6. Description of Functional Modules * * CPU and System-Control Modules On-Chip Peripheral Modules The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the module. However, the generic style includes the following items: i) Feature ii) Input/Output Pin iii) Register Description iv) Operation v) Usage Note When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the final part of each section. 7. List of Registers 8. Electrical Characteristics 9. Appendix 10. Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition (only for revised versions) The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions. This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this manual. 11. Index Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page v of xxxii Preface The H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group are single-chip microcomputers made up of the highspeed H8/300H CPU employing Renesas Technology original architecture as their cores, and the peripheral functions required to configure a system. The H8/300H CPU has an instruction set that is compatible with the H8/300 CPU. Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group in the design of application systems. Target users are expected to understand the fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and microcomputers. Objective: This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical characteristics of the H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group to the target users. Refer to the H8/300H Series Software Manual for a detailed description of the instruction set. Notes on reading this manual: * In order to understand the overall functions of the chip Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics. * In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions Read the H8/300H Series Software Manual. * In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the register. The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in section 21, List of Registers. Example: Register name: The following notation is used for cases when the same or a similar function, e.g. serial communication interface, is implemented on more than one channel: XXX_N (XXX is the register name and N is the channel number) The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right. Bit order: Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page vi of xxxii Notes: When using an on-chip emulator (E7, E8) for H8/36079 and H8/36077 program development and debugging, the following restrictions must be noted. 1. The NMI pin is reserved for the E7 or E8, and cannot be used. 2. Pins P85, P86, and P87 cannot be used. In order to use these pins, additional hardware must be provided on the user board. 3. The following areas are used by the E7 or E8, and are not available to the user. H8/36079 Group: H'01F000 to H'01FFFF H8/36077 Group: H'D000 to H'DFFF 4. The following areas must on no account be accessed. H8/36079 Group: H'FFF780 to H'FFFB7F H8/36077 Group: H'F780 to H'FB7F 5. In usage with the E7or E8, address breaks can be set as either available to the user or for use by the E7 or E8. If address breaks are set as being used by the E7, the address break control registers must not be accessed. 6. In usage with the E7 or E8, NMI is an input/output pin (open-drain in output mode), P85 and P87 are input pins, and P86 is an output pin. 7. Use channel 1 of the SCI3 (P21/RXD, P22/TXD) in on-board programming mode by boot mode. 8. In usage with the E7or E8, the power supply voltage for H8/36079 Group products must be greater than the reset detection voltage of the low voltage detection circuit. Related Manuals: The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site. Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require. http://www.renesas.com/ Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page vii of xxxii H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group manuals: Document Title H8/36079 Group, H8/36077 Group Hardware Manual H8/300H Series Software Manual Document No. This manual REJ09B0213 User's manuals for development tools: Document Title H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage Editor User's Manual H8S, H8/300 Series Simulator/Debugger User's Manual H8S, H8/300 Series High-Performance Embedded Workshop 3, Tutorial H8S, H8/300 Series High-Performance Embedded Workshop 3, User's Manual Document No. REJ10B0058 REJ10B0211 REJ10B0024 REJ10B0026 Application notes: Document Title H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler Package Application Note Single Power Supply F-ZTAT TM Document No. REJ05B0464 REJ05B0520 On-Board Programming All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page viii of xxxii Contents Section 1 Overview..................................................................................................1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Features................................................................................................................................. 1 Block Diagram...................................................................................................................... 4 Pin Arrangement ................................................................................................................... 5 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................................ 6 Section 2 CPU..........................................................................................................9 2.1 2.2 Address Space and Memory Map ....................................................................................... 11 Register Configuration........................................................................................................ 12 2.2.1 General Registers ................................................................................................ 13 2.2.2 Program Counter (PC) ........................................................................................ 14 2.2.3 Condition-Code Register (CCR) ......................................................................... 14 Data Formats....................................................................................................................... 16 2.3.1 General Register Data Formats ........................................................................... 16 2.3.2 Memory Data Formats ........................................................................................ 18 Instruction Set ..................................................................................................................... 19 2.4.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function ...................................................... 19 2.4.2 Basic Instruction Formats ................................................................................... 29 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation....................................................... 30 2.5.1 Addressing Modes .............................................................................................. 30 2.5.2 Effective Address Calculation ............................................................................ 33 Basic Bus Cycle .................................................................................................................. 36 2.6.1 Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM)........................................................ 36 2.6.2 On-Chip Peripheral Modules .............................................................................. 37 CPU States .......................................................................................................................... 38 Usage Notes ........................................................................................................................ 39 2.8.1 Notes on Data Access to Empty Areas ............................................................... 39 2.8.2 EEPMOV Instruction.......................................................................................... 39 2.8.3 Bit-Manipulation Instruction............................................................................... 40 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 Section 3 Exception Handling ...............................................................................45 3.1 3.2 Exception Sources and Vector Address .............................................................................. 46 Register Descriptions .......................................................................................................... 48 3.2.1 Interrupt Edge Select Register 1 (IEGR1) .......................................................... 48 3.2.2 Interrupt Edge Select Register 2 (IEGR2) .......................................................... 49 3.2.3 Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IENR1) .................................................................. 50 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page ix of xxxii 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.2.4 Interrupt Enable Register 2 (IENR2) .................................................................. 51 3.2.5 Interrupt Flag Register 1 (IRR1)......................................................................... 51 3.2.6 Interrupt Flag Register 2 (IRR2)......................................................................... 53 3.2.7 Wakeup Interrupt Flag Register (IWPR) ............................................................ 53 Reset Exception Handling .................................................................................................. 55 Interrupt Exception Handling ............................................................................................. 56 3.4.1 External Interrupts .............................................................................................. 56 3.4.2 Internal Interrupts ............................................................................................... 58 3.4.3 Interrupt Handling Sequence .............................................................................. 58 3.4.4 Interrupt Response Time..................................................................................... 60 Usage Notes ........................................................................................................................ 62 3.5.1 Interrupts after Reset........................................................................................... 62 3.5.2 Notes on Stack Area Use .................................................................................... 62 3.5.3 Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers ........................................................... 62 Section 4 Address Break .......................................................................................63 4.1 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 64 4.1.1 Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR) ..................................................... 64 4.1.2 Address Break Status Register (ABRKSR) ........................................................ 67 4.1.3 Break Address Registers (BARE, BARH, BARL) ............................................. 67 4.1.4 Break Data Registers (BDRH, BDRL) ............................................................... 67 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 68 4.2 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator ...........................................................................71 5.1 5.2 Features............................................................................................................................... 72 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 72 5.2.1 RC Control Register (RCCR) ............................................................................. 73 5.2.2 RC Trimming Data Protect Register (RCTRMDPR).......................................... 74 5.2.3 RC Trimming Data Register (RCTRMDR) ........................................................ 75 5.2.4 Clock Control/Status Register (CKCSR) ............................................................ 76 System Clock Select Operation .......................................................................................... 79 5.3.1 Clock Control Operation..................................................................................... 79 5.3.2 Clock Switching Timing ..................................................................................... 83 Trimming of On-Chip Oscillator Frequency ...................................................................... 86 External Oscillators............................................................................................................. 88 5.5.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator ............................................................................ 88 5.5.2 Connecting Ceramic Resonator .......................................................................... 89 5.5.3 Inputting External Clock..................................................................................... 89 Subclock Oscillator............................................................................................................. 90 5.6.1 Connecting 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator......................................................... 90 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page x of xxxii 5.7 5.8 5.6.2 Pin Connection when Not Using Subclock ......................................................... 91 Prescaler.............................................................................................................................. 91 5.7.1 Prescaler S........................................................................................................... 91 5.7.2 Prescaler W ......................................................................................................... 91 Usage Notes ........................................................................................................................ 92 5.8.1 Note on Resonators ............................................................................................. 92 5.8.2 Notes on Board Design ....................................................................................... 92 Section 6 Power-Down Modes ..............................................................................93 6.1 Register Descriptions .......................................................................................................... 94 6.1.1 System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1) ................................................................ 94 6.1.2 System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2) ................................................................ 97 6.1.3 Module Standby Control Register 1 (MSTCR1)................................................. 98 6.1.4 Module Standby Control Register 2 (MSTCR2)................................................. 99 Mode Transitions and States of LSI.................................................................................. 100 6.2.1 Sleep Mode ....................................................................................................... 103 6.2.2 Standby Mode ................................................................................................... 103 6.2.3 Subsleep Mode.................................................................................................. 104 6.2.4 Subactive Mode ................................................................................................ 104 Operating Frequency in Active Mode............................................................................... 105 Direct Transition ............................................................................................................... 105 6.4.1 Direct Transition from Active Mode to Subactive Mode.................................. 105 6.4.2 Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active Mode.................................. 106 Module Standby Function................................................................................................. 106 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 Section 7 ROM ....................................................................................................107 7.1 7.2 Block Configuration ......................................................................................................... 107 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 112 7.2.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1).................................................. 112 7.2.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2).................................................. 113 7.2.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ........................................................................ 114 7.2.4 Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR) ......................................... 116 7.2.5 Flash Memory Enable Register (FENR) ........................................................... 116 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................ 117 7.3.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................................ 117 7.3.2 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode.................................................. 120 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing ............................................................................... 121 7.4.1 Program/Program-Verify .................................................................................. 121 7.4.2 Erase/Erase-Verify............................................................................................ 124 7.4.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory....................... 124 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xi of xxxii 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 Program/Erase Protection ................................................................................................. 126 7.5.1 Hardware Protection ......................................................................................... 126 7.5.2 Software Protection........................................................................................... 126 7.5.3 Error Protection................................................................................................. 126 Programmer Mode ............................................................................................................ 127 Power-Down States for Flash Memory............................................................................. 127 Section 8 RAM ....................................................................................................129 Section 9 I/O Ports...............................................................................................131 9.1 Port 1................................................................................................................................. 131 9.1.1 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) .......................................................................... 132 9.1.2 Port Control Register 1 (PCR1) ........................................................................ 133 9.1.3 Port Data Register 1 (PDR1)............................................................................. 133 9.1.4 Port Pull-Up Control Register 1 (PUCR1)........................................................ 134 9.1.5 Pin Functions .................................................................................................... 134 Port 2................................................................................................................................. 137 9.2.1 Port Control Register 2 (PCR2) ........................................................................ 137 9.2.2 Port Data Register 2 (PDR2)............................................................................. 138 9.2.3 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3) .......................................................................... 138 9.2.4 Pin Functions .................................................................................................... 139 Port 3................................................................................................................................. 141 9.3.1 Port Control Register 3 (PCR3) ........................................................................ 141 9.3.2 Port Data Register 3 (PDR3)............................................................................. 142 9.3.3 Pin Functions .................................................................................................... 142 Port 5................................................................................................................................. 145 9.4.1 Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5) .......................................................................... 146 9.4.2 Port Control Register 5 (PCR5) ........................................................................ 147 9.4.3 Port Data Register 5 (PDR5)............................................................................. 147 9.4.4 Port Pull-Up Control Register 5 (PUCR5)........................................................ 148 9.4.5 Pin Functions .................................................................................................... 148 Port 6................................................................................................................................. 151 9.5.1 Port Control Register 6 (PCR6) ........................................................................ 151 9.5.2 Port Data Register 6 (PDR6)............................................................................. 152 9.5.3 Pin Functions .................................................................................................... 152 Port 7................................................................................................................................. 156 9.6.1 Port Control Register 7 (PCR7) ........................................................................ 156 9.6.2 Port Data Register 7 (PDR7)............................................................................. 157 9.6.3 Pin Functions .................................................................................................... 157 Port 8................................................................................................................................. 159 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xii of xxxii 9.8 9.9 9.7.1 Port Control Register 8 (PCR8) ........................................................................ 159 9.7.2 Port Data Register 8 (PDR8)............................................................................. 159 9.7.3 Pin Functions .................................................................................................... 160 Port B ................................................................................................................................ 161 9.8.1 Port Data Register B (PDRB) ........................................................................... 161 9.8.2 Pin Functions .................................................................................................... 162 Port C ................................................................................................................................ 165 9.9.1 Port Control Register C (PCRC) ....................................................................... 165 9.9.2 Port Data Register C (PDRC) ........................................................................... 166 9.9.3 Pin Functions .................................................................................................... 166 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) .......................................................................167 10.1 10.2 10.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 167 Input/Output Pin ............................................................................................................... 168 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 169 10.3.1 Second Data Register/Free Running Counter Data Register (RSECDR).......... 169 10.3.2 Minute Data Register (RMINDR)..................................................................... 170 10.3.3 Hour Data Register (RHRDR) .......................................................................... 171 10.3.4 Day-of-Week Data Register (RWKDR) ........................................................... 172 10.3.5 RTC Control Register 1 (RTCCR1).................................................................. 173 10.3.6 RTC Control Register 2 (RTCCR2).................................................................. 174 10.3.7 Clock Source Select Register (RTCCSR) ......................................................... 175 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 176 10.4.1 Initial Settings of Registers after Power-On ..................................................... 176 10.4.2 Initial Setting Procedure ................................................................................... 176 10.4.3 Data Reading Procedure ................................................................................... 177 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 178 10.4 10.5 Section 11 Timer B1 ............................................................................................179 11.1 11.2 11.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 179 Input/Output Pin ............................................................................................................... 180 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 181 11.3.1 Timer Mode Register B1 (TMB1) .................................................................... 181 11.3.2 Timer Counter B1 (TCB1)................................................................................ 182 11.3.3 Timer Load Register B1 (TLB1)....................................................................... 182 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 182 11.4.1 Interval Timer Operation .................................................................................. 182 11.4.2 Auto-Reload Timer Operation .......................................................................... 183 11.4.3 Event Counter Operation .................................................................................. 183 Timer B1 Operating Modes .............................................................................................. 183 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xiii of xxxii 11.4 11.5 Section 12 Timer V .............................................................................................185 12.1 12.2 12.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 185 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 187 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 187 12.3.1 Timer Counter V (TCNTV) .............................................................................. 187 12.3.2 Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA, TCORB) .................................... 188 12.3.3 Timer Control Register V0 (TCRV0) ............................................................... 188 12.3.4 Timer Control/Status Register V (TCSRV) ...................................................... 189 12.3.5 Timer Control Register V1 (TCRV1) ............................................................... 191 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 192 12.4.1 Timer V Operation............................................................................................ 192 Timer V Application Examples ........................................................................................ 195 12.5.1 Pulse Output with Arbitrary Duty Cycle........................................................... 195 12.5.2 Pulse Output with Arbitrary Pulse Width and Delay from TRGV Input .......... 196 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 197 12.4 12.5 12.6 Section 13 Timer Z..............................................................................................199 13.1 13.2 13.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 199 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 204 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 205 13.3.1 Timer Start Register (TSTR) ............................................................................ 206 13.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) ......................................................................... 206 13.3.3 Timer PWM Mode Register (TPMR) ............................................................... 207 13.3.4 Timer Function Control Register (TFCR) ........................................................ 208 13.3.5 Timer Output Master Enable Register (TOER) ................................................ 210 13.3.6 Timer Output Control Register (TOCR) ........................................................... 212 13.3.7 Timer Counter (TCNT)..................................................................................... 213 13.3.8 General Registers A, B, C, and D (GRA, GRB, GRC, and GRD).................... 213 13.3.9 Timer Control Register (TCR).......................................................................... 214 13.3.10 Timer I/O Control Register (TIORA and TIORC)............................................ 215 13.3.11 Timer Status Register (TSR)............................................................................. 218 13.3.12 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) ........................................................... 220 13.3.13 PWM Mode Output Level Control Register (POCR) ....................................... 221 13.3.14 Interface with CPU ........................................................................................... 222 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 223 13.4.1 Counter Operation............................................................................................. 223 13.4.2 Waveform Output by Compare Match.............................................................. 227 13.4.3 Input Capture Function ..................................................................................... 229 13.4.4 Synchronous Operation..................................................................................... 233 13.4.5 PWM Mode ...................................................................................................... 234 13.4 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xiv of xxxii 13.5 13.6 13.4.6 Reset Synchronous PWM Mode ....................................................................... 240 13.4.7 Complementary PWM Mode ............................................................................ 244 13.4.8 Buffer Operation ............................................................................................... 254 13.4.9 Timer Z Output Timing .................................................................................... 262 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 265 13.5.1 Status Flag Set Timing...................................................................................... 265 13.5.2 Status Flag Clearing Timing ............................................................................. 267 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 268 Section 14 Watchdog Timer ................................................................................275 14.1 14.2 Features............................................................................................................................. 275 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 276 14.2.1 Timer Control/Status Register WD (TCSRWD)............................................... 276 14.2.2 Timer Counter WD (TCWD) ............................................................................ 278 14.2.3 Timer Mode Register WD (TMWD) ................................................................ 278 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 279 14.3 Section 15 14-Bit PWM.......................................................................................281 15.1 15.2 15.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 281 Input/Output Pin ............................................................................................................... 282 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 283 15.3.1 PWM Control Register (PWCR)....................................................................... 283 15.3.2 PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL)......................................... 283 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 284 15.4 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) .........................................285 16.1 16.2 16.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 285 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 288 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 289 16.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ........................................................................... 289 16.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) ........................................................................... 289 16.3.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) .......................................................................... 289 16.3.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR).......................................................................... 290 16.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)............................................................................. 290 16.3.6 Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3)...................................................................... 292 16.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ............................................................................. 294 16.3.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ................................................................................... 296 Operation in Asynchronous Mode .................................................................................... 303 16.4.1 Clock................................................................................................................. 303 16.4.2 SCI3 Initialization............................................................................................. 304 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xv of xxxii 16.4 16.5 16.6 16.7 16.8 16.4.3 Data Transmission ............................................................................................ 305 16.4.4 Serial Data Reception ....................................................................................... 307 Operation in Clock Synchronous Mode............................................................................ 311 16.5.1 Clock................................................................................................................. 311 16.5.2 SCI3 Initialization............................................................................................. 311 16.5.3 Serial Data Transmission .................................................................................. 312 16.5.4 Serial Data Reception (Clock Synchronous Mode) .......................................... 314 16.5.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception.................................... 316 Multiprocessor Communication Function ........................................................................ 318 16.6.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission ......................................................... 319 16.6.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception .............................................................. 321 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 325 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 326 16.8.1 Break Detection and Processing ....................................................................... 326 16.8.2 Mark State and Break Sending ......................................................................... 326 16.8.3 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clock Synchronous Mode Only) ..................................................................... 326 16.8.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode......................................................................................... 327 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)..................................................................329 17.1 17.2 17.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 329 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 331 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 332 2 17.3.1 I C Bus Control Register 1 (ICCR1) ................................................................. 332 2 17.3.2 I C Bus Control Register 2 (ICCR2) ................................................................. 335 2 17.3.3 I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)........................................................................ 336 2 17.3.4 I C Bus Interrupt Enable Register (ICIER) ....................................................... 338 2 17.3.5 I C Bus Status Register (ICSR)......................................................................... 340 17.3.6 Slave Address Register (SAR).......................................................................... 343 2 17.3.7 I C Bus Transmit Data Register (ICDRT)......................................................... 344 2 17.3.8 I C Bus Receive Data Register (ICDRR).......................................................... 344 2 17.3.9 I C Bus Shift Register (ICDRS)........................................................................ 344 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 345 2 17.4.1 I C Bus Format.................................................................................................. 345 17.4.2 Master Transmit Operation ............................................................................... 346 17.4.3 Master Receive Operation................................................................................. 348 17.4.4 Slave Transmit Operation ................................................................................. 350 17.4.5 Slave Receive Operation................................................................................... 352 17.4.6 Clock Synchronous Serial Format .................................................................... 354 17.4 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xvi of xxxii 17.5 17.6 17.7 17.4.7 Noise Filter ....................................................................................................... 357 17.4.8 Example of Use................................................................................................. 357 Interrupt Request............................................................................................................... 362 Bit Synchronous Circuit.................................................................................................... 363 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 364 17.7.1 Issue (Retransmission) of Start/Stop Conditions .............................................. 364 2 17.7.2 WAIT Setting in I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) ............................................ 364 17.7.3 Restriction in Use of Multi-Master ................................................................... 365 17.7.4 Continuous Data Reception in Master Receive Mode ...................................... 365 Section 18 A/D Converter....................................................................................367 18.1 18.2 18.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 367 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 369 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 370 18.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) .......................................... 370 18.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ............................................................ 371 18.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ......................................................................... 372 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 373 18.4.1 Single Mode...................................................................................................... 373 18.4.2 Scan Mode ........................................................................................................ 373 18.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time....................................................... 374 18.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing.......................................................................... 375 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions ............................................................................. 376 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 378 18.6.1 Permissible Signal Source Impedance .............................................................. 378 18.6.2 Influences on Absolute Accuracy ..................................................................... 378 18.4 18.5 18.6 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits........................................................379 19.1 19.2 Features............................................................................................................................. 380 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 382 19.2.1 Low-Voltage-Detection Control Register (LVDCR) ........................................ 382 19.2.2 Low-Voltage-Detection Status Register (LVDSR)........................................... 384 19.2.3 Reset Source Decision Register (LVDRF)........................................................ 385 Operations......................................................................................................................... 386 19.3.1 Power-On Reset Circuit .................................................................................... 386 19.3.2 Low-Voltage Detection Circuit......................................................................... 387 19.3.3 Deciding Reset Source...................................................................................... 392 19.3 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xvii of xxxii Section 20 Power Supply Circuit ........................................................................393 20.1 20.2 Power Supply Connection of 5.0-V-Specification Microcontrollers ................................ 393 Power Supply Connection of 3.3-V-Specification Microcontrollers ................................ 394 Section 21 List of Registers................................................................................. 395 21.1 21.2 21.3 Register Addresses (Address Order)................................................................................. 396 Register Bits...................................................................................................................... 403 Registers States in Each Operating Mode......................................................................... 409 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics ...................................................................415 22.1 22.2 Absolute Maximum Ratings ............................................................................................. 415 Electrical Characteristics (F-ZTATTM 5.0-V Version) ..................................................... 416 22.2.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges .................................................. 416 22.2.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................ 419 22.2.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................ 425 22.2.4 A/D Converter Characteristics .......................................................................... 430 22.2.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics....................................................................... 431 22.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics .......................................................................... 432 22.2.7 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics................................. 434 22.2.8 LVDI External Input Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics ...................... 434 22.2.9 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics ........................................................... 435 Electrical Characteristics (F-ZTATTM 3.3-V Version) ..................................................... 436 22.3.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges .................................................. 436 22.3.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................ 438 22.3.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................ 444 22.3.4 A/D Converter Characteristics .......................................................................... 449 22.3.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics....................................................................... 450 22.3.6 Flash Memory Characteristics .......................................................................... 451 22.3.7 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics................................. 453 22.3.8 LVDI External Input Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics ...................... 453 22.3.9 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics ........................................................... 454 Operation Timing.............................................................................................................. 455 Output Load Condition ..................................................................................................... 458 22.3 22.4 22.5 Appendix A Instruction Set ...............................................................................459 A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 Instruction List.................................................................................................................. 459 Operation Code Map......................................................................................................... 474 Number of Execution States ............................................................................................. 477 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes ...................................................... 488 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xviii of xxxii Appendix B I/O Port Block Diagrams ...............................................................489 B.1 B.2 I/O Port Block Diagrams .................................................................................................. 489 Port States in Each Operating State .................................................................................. 513 Appendix C Product Code Lineup.....................................................................514 Appendix D Package Dimensions .....................................................................516 Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition .....................................................519 Index ....................................................................................................................525 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xix of xxxii Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xx of xxxii Figures Section 1 Overview Figure 1.1 Block Diagram of H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group ........................................... 4 Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement of H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group (FP-64K, FP-64A) ............................................................................ 5 Section 2 CPU Figure 2.1 Memory Map............................................................................................................... 11 Figure 2.2 CPU Registers ............................................................................................................. 12 Figure 2.3 Usage of General Registers ......................................................................................... 13 Figure 2.4 Relationship between Stack Pointer and Stack Area ................................................... 14 Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (1) .............................................................................. 16 Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (2) .............................................................................. 17 Figure 2.6 Memory Data Formats................................................................................................. 18 Figure 2.7 Instruction Formats...................................................................................................... 29 Figure 2.8 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode ........................................... 33 Figure 2.9 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle.................................................................................. 36 Figure 2.10 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (3-State Access)..................................... 37 Figure 2.11 CPU Operation States................................................................................................ 38 Figure 2.12 State Transitions ........................................................................................................ 39 Figure 2.13 Example of Timer Configuration with Two Registers Allocated to Same Address ....................................................................................... 40 Section 3 Figure 3.1 Figure 3.2 Figure 3.3 Figure 3.4 Section 4 Figure 4.1 Figure 4.2 Figure 4.2 Section 5 Figure 5.1 Figure 5.2 Figure 5.3 Figure 5.4 Exception Handling Reset Sequence............................................................................................................ 57 Stack Status after Exception Handling ........................................................................ 59 Interrupt Sequence....................................................................................................... 61 Port Mode Register Setting and Interrupt Request Flag Clearing Procedure .............. 62 Address Break Block Diagram of Address Break................................................................................ 63 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (1)......................................................... 68 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (2)......................................................... 69 Clock Pulse Generator Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator ................................................................... 71 State Transition of System Clock ................................................................................ 79 Flowchart of Clock Switching with Backup Function Enabled................................... 80 Flowchart of Clock Switching with Backup Function Disabled (1) (From On-Chip Oscillator Clock to External Clock) ................................................. 81 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxi of xxxii Figure 5.5 Flowchart of Clock Switching with Backup Function Disabled (2) (From External Clock to On-Chip Oscillator Clock).................................................. 82 Figure 5.6 Timing Chart of Switching from On-Chip Oscillator Clock to External Clock............................................................................................................ 83 Figure 5.7 Timing Chart to Switch from External Clock to On-Chip Oscillator Clock .......................................................................................................... 84 Figure 5.8 External Oscillation Backup Timing ........................................................................... 85 Figure 5.9 Example of Trimming Flow for On-Chip Oscillator Clock ........................................ 86 Figure 5.10 Timing Chart of Trimming of On-Chip Oscillator Frequency .................................. 87 Figure 5.11 Block Diagram of External Clock Oscillator ............................................................ 88 Figure 5.12 Example of Connection to Crystal Resonator ........................................................... 88 Figure 5.13 Equivalent Circuit of Crystal Resonator.................................................................... 89 Figure 5.14 Example of Connection to Ceramic Resonator ......................................................... 89 Figure 5.15 Example of External Clock Input .............................................................................. 89 Figure 5.16 Block Diagram of Subclock Oscillator...................................................................... 90 Figure 5.17 Typical Connection to 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator.............................................. 90 Figure 5.18 Equivalent Circuit of 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator................................................ 90 Figure 5.19 Pin Connection when not Using Subclock ................................................................ 91 Figure 5.20 Example of Incorrect Board Design .......................................................................... 92 Section 6 Power-Down Modes Figure 6.1 Mode Transition Diagram ......................................................................................... 100 Section 7 Figure 7.1 Figure 7.1 Figure 7.1 Figure 7.1 Figure 7.2 Figure 7.3 Figure 7.4 Section 9 Figure 9.1 Figure 9.2 Figure 9.3 Figure 9.4 Figure 9.5 Figure 9.6 Figure 9.7 Figure 9.8 Figure 9.9 ROM Flash Memory Block Configuration (1) (H8/36079GF and H8/36079LF) ............... 108 Flash Memory Block Configuration (2) (H8/36078GF and H8/36078LF) ............... 109 Flash Memory Block Configuration (3) (H8/36077GF and H8/36077LF) ............... 110 Flash Memory Block Configuration (4) (H8/36074GF and H8/36074LF) ............... 111 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode .......................... 120 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart ......................................................................... 122 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart ................................................................................... 125 I/O Ports Port 1 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 131 Port 2 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 137 Port 3 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 141 Port 5 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 145 Port 6 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 151 Port 7 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 156 Port 8 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 159 Port B Pin Configuration........................................................................................... 161 Port C Pin Configuration........................................................................................... 165 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxii of xxxii Section 10 Figure 10.1 Figure 10.2 Figure 10.3 Figure 10.4 Realtime Clock (RTC) Block Diagram of RTC ........................................................................................... 167 Definition of Time Expression ................................................................................ 173 Initial Setting Procedure .......................................................................................... 176 Example: Reading of Inaccurate Time Data............................................................ 177 Section 11 Timer B1 Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of Timer B1.................................................................................... 179 Section 12 Timer V Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of Timer V...................................................................................... 186 Figure 12.2 Increment Timing with Internal Clock .................................................................... 193 Figure 12.3 Increment Timing with External Clock ................................................................... 193 Figure 12.4 OVF Set Timing ...................................................................................................... 193 Figure 12.5 CMFA and CMFB Set Timing ................................................................................ 194 Figure 12.6 TMOV Output Timing ............................................................................................ 194 Figure 12.7 Clear Timing by Compare Match ............................................................................ 194 Figure 12.8 Clear Timing by TMRIV Input ............................................................................... 195 Figure 12.9 Pulse Output Example ............................................................................................. 195 Figure 12.10 Example of Pulse Output Synchronized to TRGV Input....................................... 196 Figure 12.11 Contention between TCNTV Write and Clear ...................................................... 197 Figure 12.12 Contention between TCORA Write and Compare Match ..................................... 198 Figure 12.13 Internal Clock Switching and TCNTV Operation ................................................. 198 Timer Z Timer Z Block Diagram .......................................................................................... 201 Timer Z (Channel 0) Block Diagram ...................................................................... 202 Timer Z (Channel 1) Block Diagram ...................................................................... 203 Example of Outputs in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode and Complementary PWM Mode.................................................................................. 210 Figure 13.5 Accessing Operation of 16-Bit Register (between CPU and TCNT (16 bits)) ....................................................................... 222 Figure 13.6 Accessing Operation of 8-Bit Register (between CPU and TSTR (8 bits)) .......................................................................... 222 Figure 13.7 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure .................................................. 223 Figure 13.8 Free-Running Counter Operation ............................................................................ 224 Figure 13.9 Periodic Counter Operation..................................................................................... 225 Figure 13.10 Count Timing at Internal Clock Operation ............................................................ 225 Figure 13.11 Count Timing at External Clock Operation (Both Edges Detected)...................... 226 Figure 13.12 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match................................................................................................ 227 Figure 13.13 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation ............................................................. 228 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxiii of xxxii Section 13 Figure 13.1 Figure 13.2 Figure 13.3 Figure 13.4 Figure 13.14 Figure 13.15 Figure 13.16 Figure 13.17 Figure 13.18 Figure 13.19 Figure 13.20 Figure 13.21 Figure 13.22 Figure 13.23 Figure 13.24 Figure 13.25 Figure 13.26 Figure 13.27 Example of Toggle Output Operation ................................................................... 228 Output Compare Timing ....................................................................................... 229 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure ....................................... 230 Example of Input Capture Operation .................................................................... 231 Input Capture Signal Timing ................................................................................. 232 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure ........................................ 233 Example of Synchronous Operation...................................................................... 234 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure .......................................................... 235 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) ................................................................. 236 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) ................................................................. 237 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) ................................................................. 238 Example of PWM Mode Operation (4) ................................................................. 239 Example of Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Setting Procedure........................... 241 Example of Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Operation (OLS0 = OLS1 = 1) .............................................................................................. 242 Figure 13.28 Example of Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Operation (OLS0 = OLS1 = 0) .............................................................................................. 243 Figure 13.29 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Setting Procedure................................ 245 Figure 13.30 Canceling Procedure of Complementary PWM Mode.......................................... 246 Figure 13.31 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Operation (1)....................................... 247 Figure 13.32 (1) Example of Complementary PWM Mode Operation (TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0) (2)............................................................... 249 Figure 13.32 (2) Example of Complementary PWM Mode Operation (TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 0) (3) ............................................................... 250 Figure 13.33 Timing of Overshooting ........................................................................................ 251 Figure 13.34 Timing of Undershooting ...................................................................................... 251 Figure 13.35 Compare Match Buffer Operation......................................................................... 254 Figure 13.36 Input Capture Buffer Operation............................................................................. 255 Figure 13.37 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure................................................... 255 Figure 13.38 Example of Buffer Operation (1) (Buffer Operation for Output Compare Register) ................................................. 256 Figure 13.39 Example of Compare Match Timing for Buffer Operation ................................... 257 Figure 13.40 Example of Buffer Operation (2) (Buffer Operation for Input Capture Register) ..................................................... 258 Figure 13.41 Input Capture Timing of Buffer Operation............................................................ 259 Figure 13.42 Buffer Operation (3) (Buffer Operation in Complementary PWM Mode CMD1 = CMD0 = 1) ........... 260 Figure 13.43 Buffer Operation (4) (Buffer Operation in Complementary PWM Mode CMD1 = CMD0 = 1) ........... 261 Figure 13.44 Example of Output Disable Timing of Timer Z by Writing to TOER .................. 262 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxiv of xxxii Figure 13.45 Figure 13.46 Figure 13.47 Figure 13.48 Figure 13.49 Figure 13.50 Figure 13.51 Figure 13.52 Figure 13.53 Figure 13.54 Figure 13.55 Figure 13.56 Figure 13.57 Example of Output Disable Timing of Timer Z by External Trigger .................... 263 Example of Output Inverse Timing of Timer Z by Writing to TFCR ................... 264 Example of Output Inverse Timing of Timer Z by Writing to POCR ................... 264 IMF Flag Set Timing when Compare Match Occurs ............................................ 265 IMF Flag Set Timing at Input Capture .................................................................. 266 OVF Flag Set Timing ............................................................................................ 266 Status Flag Clearing Timing.................................................................................. 267 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations....................................... 268 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations ............................... 269 Contention between GR Write and Compare Match ............................................. 269 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow................................................... 270 Contention between GR Read and Input Capture.................................................. 271 Contention between Count Clearing and Increment Operations by Input Capture................................................................................................... 272 Figure 13.58 Contention between GR Write and Input Capture................................................. 273 Figure 13.59 When Compare Match and Bit Manipulation Instruction to TOCR Occur at the Same Timing .................................................................................... 274 Section 14 Watchdog Timer Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer ........................................................................ 275 Figure 14.2 Watchdog Timer Operation Example...................................................................... 279 Section 15 14-BIt PWM Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of 14-Bit PWM .............................................................................. 281 Figure 15.2 Waveform Output by 14-Bit PWM ......................................................................... 284 Section 16 Figure 16.1 Figure 16.2 Figure 16.3 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Block Diagram of SCI3 ........................................................................................... 287 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication ...................................................... 303 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)............. 303 Figure 16.4 Sample SCI3 Initialization Flowchart ..................................................................... 304 Figure 16.5 Example of SCI3 Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)........................................................................... 305 Figure 16.6 Sample Serial Transmission Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) ...................... 306 Figure 16.7 Example of SCI3 Reception in Asynchronous Mode (8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)........................................................................... 307 Figure 16.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (1)...................... 309 Figure 16.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (2)...................... 310 Figure 16.9 Data Format in Clock Synchronous Communication .............................................. 311 Figure 16.10 Example of SCI3 Transmission in Clock Synchronous Mode .............................. 312 Figure 16.11 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Clock Synchronous Mode) .................... 313 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxv of xxxii Figure 16.12 Example of SCI3 Reception in Clock Synchronous Mode.................................... 314 Figure 16.13 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (Clock Synchronous Mode) ......................... 315 Figure 16.14 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations (Clock Synchronous Mode) .................................................. 317 Figure 16.15 Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)............................. 319 Figure 16.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart ........................................ 320 Figure 16.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)........................................ 322 Figure 16.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)........................................ 323 Figure 16.18 Example of SCI3 Reception Using Multiprocessor Format (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) ............................. 324 Figure 16.19 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode ...................................... 327 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface 2..................................................................... 330 Figure 17.2 External Circuit Connections of I/O Pins ................................................................ 331 Figure 17.3 I2C Bus Formats ...................................................................................................... 345 Figure 17.4 I2C Bus Timing........................................................................................................ 345 Figure 17.5 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (1) ......................................................... 347 Figure 17.6 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (2) ......................................................... 347 Figure 17.7 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) .......................................................... 349 Figure 17.8 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) .......................................................... 350 Figure 17.9 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (1) ........................................................... 351 Figure 17.10 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (2) ......................................................... 352 Figure 17.11 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1)........................................................... 353 Figure 17.12 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2)........................................................... 353 Figure 17.13 Clock Synchronous Serial Transfer Format .......................................................... 354 Figure 17.14 Transmit Mode Operation Timing......................................................................... 355 Figure 17.15 Receive Mode Operation Timing .......................................................................... 356 Figure 17.16 Block Diagram of Noise Filter .............................................................................. 357 Figure 17.17 Sample Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode....................................................... 358 Figure 17.18 Sample Flowchart for Master Receive Mode ........................................................ 359 Figure 17.19 Sample Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode......................................................... 360 Figure 17.20 Sample Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode .......................................................... 361 Figure 17.21 The Timing of the Bit Synchronous Circuit .......................................................... 363 Section 18 Figure 18.1 Figure 18.2 Figure 18.3 Figure 18.4 A/D Converter Block Diagram of A/D Converter ........................................................................... 368 A/D Conversion Timing .......................................................................................... 374 External Trigger Input Timing ................................................................................ 375 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (1) .............................................................. 377 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxvi of xxxii Figure 18.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (2) .............................................................. 377 Figure 18.6 Analog Input Circuit Example................................................................................. 378 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits Figure 19.1 Block Diagram around BGR ................................................................................... 380 Figure 19.2 Block Diagram of Power-On Reset Circuit and Low-Voltage Detection Circuit..................................................................................................... 381 Figure 19.3 Operational Timing of Power-On Reset Circuit ...................................................... 387 Figure 19.4 Operating Timing of LVDR Circuit ........................................................................ 388 Figure 19.5 Operational Timing of LVDI Circuit....................................................................... 389 Figure 19.6 Operational Timing of LVDI Circuit (When Compared Voltage is Input through ExtU and ExtD Pins) ......................... 391 Figure 19.7 Timing of Setting Bits in Reset Source Decision Register ...................................... 392 Section 20 Power Supply Circuit Figure 20.1 Power Supply Connection of 5.0-V-Specification Microcontrollers....................... 393 Figure 20.2 Power Supply Connection of 3.3-V-Specification Microcontrollers....................... 394 Section 22 Figure 22.1 Figure 22.2 Figure 22.3 Figure 22.4 Figure 22.5 Figure 22.6 Figure 22.7 Electrical Characteristics System Clock Input Timing..................................................................................... 455 RES Low Width Timing.......................................................................................... 455 Input Timing............................................................................................................ 455 I2C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing ................................................................... 456 SCK3 Input Clock Timing....................................................................................... 456 SCI Input/Output Timing in Clock Synchronous Mode.......................................... 457 Output Load Circuit................................................................................................. 458 Appendix Figure B.1 Port 1 Block Diagram (P17) ..................................................................................... 489 Figure B.2 Port 1 Block Diagram (P14, P16) ............................................................................. 490 Figure B.3 Port 1 Block Diagram (P15) ..................................................................................... 491 Figure B.4 Port 1 Block Diagram (P12) ..................................................................................... 492 Figure B.5 Port 2 Block Diagram (P11) ..................................................................................... 493 Figure B.6 Port 1 Block Diagram (P10) ..................................................................................... 494 Figure B.7 Port 2 Block Diagram (P24, P23) ............................................................................. 495 Figure B.8 Port 2 Block Diagram (P22) ..................................................................................... 496 Figure B.9 Port 2 Block Diagram (P21) ..................................................................................... 497 Figure B.10 Port 2 Block Diagram (P20) ................................................................................... 498 Figure B.11 Port 3 Block Diagram (P37 to P30) ........................................................................ 499 Figure B.12 Port 5 Block Diagram (P57, P56) ........................................................................... 500 Figure B.13 Port 5 Block Diagram (P55) ................................................................................... 501 Figure B.14 Port 5 Block Diagram (P54 to P50) ........................................................................ 502 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxvii of xxxii Figure B.15 Figure B.16 Figure B.17 Figure B.18 Figure B.19 Figure B.20 Figure B.21 Figure B.22 Figure B.23 Figure B.24 Figure B.25 Figure B.26 Figure D.1 Figure D.2 Port 6 Block Diagram (P67 to P60) ........................................................................ 503 Port 7 Block Diagram (P76) ................................................................................... 504 Port 7 Block Diagram (P75) ................................................................................... 505 Port 7 Block Diagram (P74) ................................................................................... 506 Port 7 Block Diagram (P72) ................................................................................... 507 Port 7 Block Diagram (P71) ................................................................................... 508 Port 7 Block Diagram (P70) ................................................................................... 508 Port 8 Block Diagram (P87 to P85) ........................................................................ 509 Port B Block Diagram (PB7 and PB6) ................................................................... 510 Port B Block Diagram (PB5 to PB0) ...................................................................... 510 Port B Block Diagram (PC1) .................................................................................. 511 Port B Block Diagram (PC0) .................................................................................. 512 FP-64K Package Dimensions ................................................................................... 516 FP-64A Package Dimensions ................................................................................... 517 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxviii of xxxii Tables Section 1 Overview Table 1.1 Pin Functions ............................................................................................................ 6 Section 2 CPU Operation Notation ................................................................................................. 19 Table 2.1 Table 2.2 Data Transfer Instructions....................................................................................... 20 Table 2.3 Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1) ................................................................... 21 Table 2.3 Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2) ................................................................... 22 Table 2.4 Logic Operations Instructions................................................................................. 23 Table 2.5 Shift Instructions..................................................................................................... 23 Table 2.6 Bit Manipulation Instructions (1)............................................................................ 24 Table 2.6 Bit Manipulation Instructions (2)............................................................................ 25 Table 2.7 Branch Instructions ................................................................................................. 26 Table 2.8 System Control Instructions.................................................................................... 27 Table 2.9 Block Data Transfer Instructions ............................................................................ 28 Table 2.10 Addressing Modes .................................................................................................. 30 Table 2.11 Absolute Address Access Ranges ........................................................................... 32 Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation (1)........................................................................... 34 Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation (2)........................................................................... 35 Section 3 Exception Handling Table 3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address .................................................................. 46 Table 3.2 Interrupt Wait States ............................................................................................... 60 Section 4 Address Break Table 4.1 Access and Data Bus Used ..................................................................................... 66 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator Crystal Resonator Parameters ................................................................................. 89 Table 5.1 Section 6 Power-Down Modes Operating Frequency and Waiting Time................................................................. 96 Table 6.1 Table 6.2 Transition Mode after SLEEP Instruction Execution and Transition Mode due to Interrupt...................................................................................................... 101 Table 6.3 Internal State in Each Operating Mode................................................................. 102 Section 7 ROM Table 7.1 Setting Programming Modes ................................................................................ 117 Table 7.2 Boot Mode Operation ........................................................................................... 119 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxix of xxxii Table 7.3 Table 7.4 Table 7.5 Table 7.6 Table 7.7 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is Possible ..................................................................................................... 120 Reprogram Data Computation Table .................................................................... 123 Additional-Program Data Computation Table ...................................................... 123 Programming Time ............................................................................................... 123 Flash Memory Operating States............................................................................ 128 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 168 Table 10.1 Table 10.2 Interrupt Sources................................................................................................... 178 Section 11 Timer B1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 180 Table 11.1 Table 11.2 Timer B1 Operating Modes .................................................................................. 183 Section 12 Timer V Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 187 Table 12.1 Table 12.2 Clock Signals to Input to TCNTV and Counting Conditions ............................... 189 Section 13 Timer Z Timer Z Functions ................................................................................................ 200 Table 13.1 Table 13.2 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 204 Table 13.3 Initial Output Level of FTIOB0 Pin...................................................................... 235 Table 13.4 Output Pins in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode ................................................... 240 Table 13.5 Register Settings in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode........................................... 240 Table 13.6 Output Pins in Complementary PWM Mode........................................................ 244 Table 13.7 Register Settings in Complementary PWM Mode................................................ 244 Table 13.8 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation ......................................................... 254 Section 15 14-Bit PWM Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 282 Table 15.1 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Channel Configuration.......................................................................................... 286 Table 16.1 Table 16.2 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 288 Table 16.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1) ...... 297 Table 16.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2) ...... 298 Table 16.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (3) ...... 299 Table 16.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) .......................... 300 Table 16.5 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clock Synchronous Mode) (1) ............................................................................ 301 Table 16.5 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clock Synchronous Mode) (2) ............................................................................ 302 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxx of xxxii Table 16.6 Table 16.7 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling ...................................................... 308 SCI3 Interrupt Requests........................................................................................ 325 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) I2C Bus Interface Pins ........................................................................................... 331 Table 17.1 Table 17.2 Transfer Rate......................................................................................................... 334 Table 17.3 Interrupt Requests ................................................................................................. 362 Table 17.4 Time for Monitoring SCL ..................................................................................... 363 Section 18 A/D Converter Table 18.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 369 Table 18.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers .............................. 370 Table 18.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)................................................................... 375 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits LVDCR Settings and Select Functions ................................................................. 383 Table 19.1 Table 19.2 Deciding Reset Source.......................................................................................... 392 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................. 415 Table 22.1 Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (1)........................................................................................... 419 Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (2)........................................................................................... 424 Table 22.3 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 425 Table 22.4 I2C Bus Interface Timing ...................................................................................... 428 Table 22.5 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Timing..................................................... 429 Table 22.6 A/D Converter Characteristics .............................................................................. 430 Table 22.7 Watchdog Timer Characteristics........................................................................... 431 Table 22.8 Flash Memory Characteristics .............................................................................. 432 Table 22.9 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics..................................... 434 Table 22.10 LVDI External Input Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics ...................... 434 Table 22.11 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics............................................................ 435 Table 22.12 DC Characteristics (1)....................................................................................... 438 Table 22.12 DC Characteristics (2)....................................................................................... 443 Table 22.13 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................ 444 Table 22.14 I2C Bus Interface Timing .................................................................................. 447 Table 22.15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Timing ................................................. 448 Table 22.16 A/D Converter Characteristics .......................................................................... 449 Table 22.17 Watchdog Timer Characteristics....................................................................... 450 Table 22.18 Flash Memory Characteristics .......................................................................... 451 Table 22.19 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics................................. 453 Table 22.20 LVDI External Input Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics ...................... 453 Table 22.21 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics............................................................ 454 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxxi of xxxii Appendix Table A.1 Table A.2 Table A.2 Table A.2 Table A.3 Table A.4 Table A.5 Instruction Set ....................................................................................................... 461 Operation Code Map (1) ....................................................................................... 474 Operation Code Map (2) ....................................................................................... 475 Operation Code Map (3) ....................................................................................... 476 Number of Cycles in Each Instruction.................................................................. 478 Number of Cycles in Each Instruction.................................................................. 479 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes .......................................... 488 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page xxxii of xxxii Section 1 Overview Section 1 Overview 1.1 Features * High-speed H8/300H CPU with an internal 16-bit architecture Upwardly compatible with H8/300 CPU at the object level Sixteen 16-bit general registers 62 basic instructions * Various peripheral functions RTC (can be used as a free running counter) Timer B1 (8-bit timer) Timer V (8-bit timer) Timer Z (16-bit timer) 14-bit PWM Watchdog timer SCI (asynchronous or clock synchronous serial communication interface) x 2 channels I C bus interface (conforms to the I C bus interface format that is advocated by Philips Electronics) 2 2 10-bit A/D converter POR/LVD (power-on reset & low-voltage detection circuit) On-chip oscillator Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 1 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 1 Overview * On-chip memory Product Classification Flash memory version H8/36079 (F-ZTAT TM Product Model 5.0-V model 3.3-V model 5.0-V model 3.3-V model H8/36077 Group 5.0-V model 3.3-V model 5.0-V model 3.3-V model H8/36079GF H8/36079LF H8/36078GF H8/36078LF H8/36077GF H8/36077LF H8/36074GF H8/36074LF HD64F36079G HD64F36079L HD64F36078G HD64F36078L HD64F36077G HD64F36077L HD64F36074G HD64F36074L ROM Size RAM Size Remarks 128 Kbytes 6 Kbytes version) Group 96 Kbytes 56 Kbytes 4 Kbytes 32 Kbytes * Operating voltage and maximum operating frequency Operating Voltage Product Classification Flash memory version H8/36079 (F-ZTAT TM Maximum Operating Frequency Remarks 20.0 MHz 16.0 MHz 20.0 MHz 16.0 MHz 20.0 MHz 16.0 MHz 20.0 MHz 16.0 MHz Product Model 5.0-V model 3.3-V model 5.0-V model 3.3-V model H8/36077 Group 5.0-V model 3.3-V model 5.0-V model 3.3-V model H8/36079GF H8/36079LF H8/36078GF H8/36078LF H8/36077GF H8/36077LF H8/36074GF H8/36074LF HD64F36079G HD64F36079L HD64F36078G HD64F36078L HD64F36077G HD64F36077L HD64F36074G HD64F36074L Range 4.5 V to 5.5 V 3.0 V to 3.6 V 4.5 V to 5.5 V 3.0 V to 3.6 V 4.5 V to 5.5 V 3.0 V to 3.6 V 4.5 V to 5.5 V 3.0 V to 3.6 V version) Group Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 2 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 1 Overview * CPU Operating mode and address space CPU Address Product Classification Flash memory version H8/36079 (F-ZTAT TM Operating Mode Advanced mode Remarks Product Model Space 5.0-V model 3.3-V model 5.0-V model 3.3-V model H8/36077 Group 5.0-V model 3.3-V model 5.0-V model 3.3-V model H8/36079GF H8/36079LF H8/36078GF H8/36078LF H8/36077GF H8/36077LF H8/36074GF H8/36074LF HD64F36079G HD64F36079L HD64F36078G HD64F36078L HD64F36077G HD64F36077L HD64F36074G HD64F36074L 64 Kbytes 16 Mbytes version) Group Normal mode * General I/O ports I/O pins: 47 I/O pins, including 8 for large currents (IOL = 20 mA, @VOL = 1.5 V) Input-only pins: 8 (also used for analog input) * I C bus interface (conforms to the I C bus interface format put forward by Philips Electronics) 2 2 * Supports various power-down modes Note: F-ZTAT TM is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. * Compact package Package LQFP-64 QFP-64 Code FP-64K FP-64A Body Size 10.0 x 10.0 mm 14.0 x 14.0 mm Pin Pitch 0.5 mm 0.8 mm Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 3 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 1 Overview 1.2 Block Diagram (OSC1) (OSC2) TEST RES Subclock oscillator External clock oscillator On-chip oscillator VCL CPU H8/300H P10/TMOW P11/PWM P12 P14/IRQ0 P15/IRQ1/TMIB1 P16/IRQ2 P17/IRQ3/TRGV P20/SCK3 P21/RXD P22/TXD P23 P24 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 P57/SCL P56/SDA P55/WKP5/ADTRG P54/WKP4 P53/WKP3 P52/WKP2 P51/WKP1 P50/WKP0 Data bus (lower) P67/FTIOD1 P66/FTIOC1 P65/FTIOB1 P64/FTIOA1 P63/FTIOD0 P62/FTIOC0 P61/FTIOB0 P60/FTIOA0 P76/TMOV P75/TMCIV P74/TMRIV P72/TXD_2 P71/RXD_2 P70/SCK3_2 Port 1 NMI VCC VSS X1 X2 RAM ROM IIC2 Port 2 RTC SCI3 14-bit PWM SCI3_2 Port 3 Timer Z Watchdog timer P87 P86 P85 Timer V Timer B1 Port 5 A/D converter POR&LVD Data bus (upper) Address bus Port C Port B AVCC PC0/OSC1 PC1/OSC2/CLKOUT Figure 1.1 Block Diagram of H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 4 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 PB0/AN0 PB1/AN1 PB2/AN2 PB3/AN3 PB4/AN4 PB5/AN5 PB6/AN6/ExtD PB7/AN7/ExtU Port 8 Port 7 Port 6 Section 1 Overview 1.3 Pin Arrangement P70/SCK3_2 P67/FTIOD1 P66/FTIOC1 P62/FTIOC0 P65/FTIOB1 P64/FTIOA1 P60/FTIOA0 P61/FTIOB0 P20/SCK3 P21/RXD P22/TXD 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 P71/RXD_2 P72/TXD_2 P14/IRQ0 P15/IRQ1/TMIB1 P16/IRQ2 P17/IRQ3/TRGV P33 P32 P31 P30 PB3/AN3 PB2/AN2 PB1/AN1 PB0/AN0 PB4/AN4 PB5/AN5 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 H8/36079 Group H8/36077 Group Top View 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 P63/FTIOD0 P24 P76/TMOV P75/TMCIV P74/TMRIV P57/SCL P56/SDA P12 P11/PWM P10/TMOW P55/WKP5/ADTRG P54/WKP4 P53/WKP3 P52/WKP2 P37 P36 Vss RES TEST PC1/OSC2/CLKOUT PC0/OSC1 Vcc P50/WKP0 P51/WKP1 NMI P23 P87 P86 P85 P34 PB6/AN6/ExtD PB7/AN7/ExtU AVcc Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement of H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group (FP-64K, FP-64A) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 5 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 P35 X2 X1 VCL Section 1 Overview 1.4 Table 1.1 Pin Functions Pin Functions Pin No. Type Symbol FP-64K FP-64A 12 9 3 I/O Input Input Input Functions Power supply pin. Connect this pin to the system power supply. Ground pin. Connect this pin to the system power supply (0V). Analog power supply pin for the A/D converter. When the A/D converter is not used, connect this pin to the system power supply. See section 20, Power Supply Circuit, for a typical connection. These pins connect with crystal or ceramic resonator for the system clock, or can be used to input an external clock. When the on-chip oscillator is used, the system clock can be output on OSC2 pin. See section 5, Clock Pulse Generator, for a typical connection. Power VCC source pins VSS AVCC VCL Clock pins OSC1 OSC2/ CLKOUT 6 11 10 Input Input Output X1 X2 System control RES TEST Interrupt pins NMI IRQ0 to IRQ3 WKP0 to WKP5 RTC Timer B1 TMOW TMIB1 5 4 7 8 35 51 to 54 13, 14, 19 to 22 23 52 Input Output Input Input Input Input Input Output Input These pins connect with a 32.768 kHz crystal resonator for the subclock. See section 5, Clock Pulse Generator, for a typical connection. Reset pin. The pull-up resistor (typ. 150 k) is incorporated. When driven low, this LSI is reset. Test pin. Connect this pin to Vss. Non-maskable interrupt request input pin. Be sure to pull up by a resistor. External interrupt request input pins. Can select the rising or falling edge. External interrupt request input pins. Can select the rising or falling edge. This is an output pin for a divided clock. External event input pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 6 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type Timer V Symbol TMOV TMCIV TMRIV TRGV Timer Z FTIOA0 FTIOB0 FTIOC0 FP-64K FP-64A 30 29 28 54 36 34 33 I/O Output Input Input Input I/O I/O I/O Functions This is an output pin for a waveform generated by the output compare function. External event input pin Counter reset input pin Counter start trigger input pin Output compare output/input capture input/external clock input pin Output compare output/input capture input/PWM output pin Output compare output/input capture input/PWM sync output pin (at a reset, complementary PWM mode) Output compare output/input capture input/PWM output pin Output compare output/input capture input/PWM output pin (at a reset, complementary PWM mode) Output compare output/input capture input/PWM output pin 14-bit PWM square wave output pin I C data I/O pin. Can directly drive a bus by NMOS open-drain output. When using this pin, external pull-up resistor is required. I C clock I/O pin. Can directly drive a bus by NMOS open-drain output. When using this pin, external pull-up resistor is required. Transmit data output pin Receive data input pin Clock I/O pin 2 2 FTIOD0 FTIOA1 32 37 I/O I/O FTIOB1 to FTIOD1 14-bit PWM PWM I C bus interface 2 (IIC2) 2 38 to 40 24 26 I/O Output I/O SDA SCL 27 I/O Serial communication interface 3 (SCI3) TXD, TXD_2 RXD, RXD_2 SCK3, SCK3_2 46, 50 45, 49 44, 48 Output Input I/O Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 7 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type A/D converter Symbol FP-64K FP-64A I/O Input Functions Analog input pin AN7 to AN0 2, 1 64, 63 59 to 62 ADTRG 22 Input Input A/D conversion start trigger input pin 8-bit input port I/O ports PB7 to PB0 2, 1 64, 63 59 to 62 PC1, PC0 10, 11 I/O I/O 2-bit I/O port 7-bit I/O port 5-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port P17 to P14, 54 to 51, P12 to P10 25 to 23 P24 to P20 P37 to P30 P57 to P50 31, 47 to 44 I/O 18 to 15, 55 to 58 27, 26 22 to 19 14, 13 I/O I/O P67 to P60 40 to 37 I/O 32 to 34, 36 I/O I/O Input 8-bit I/O port 6-bit I/O port 3-bit I/O port This pin is used to externally input the detection voltage for the low-voltage detection circuit. P76 to P74, 30 to 28, P72 to P70 50 to 48 P87 to P85 Low-voltage ExtU, ExtD detection circuit 43 to 41 2, 1 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 8 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Section 2 CPU Microcontrollers of the H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group have an H8/300H CPU with an internal 32-bit architecture that provides upward compatibility with the H8/300CPU. Products of the H8/36079 Group support an advanced mode with a 16-Mbyte address space while those of the H8/36077 Group support a normal mode with a 64-Kbyte address space. * Upward compatibility with H8/300 CPUs Can execute object programs for H8/300 CPUs Additional eight 16-bit extended registers 32-bit transfer and arithmetic and logic instructions are added Signed multiply and divide instructions are added. * General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers and eight 16-bit registers, or eight 32-bit registers * Sixty-two basic instructions 8/16/32-bit data transfer and arithmetic and logic instructions Multiply and divide instructions Powerful bit-manipulation instructions * Eight addressing modes Register direct [Rn] Register indirect [@ERn] Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:24,ERn)] Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @-ERn] Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24] Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)] Memory indirect [@@aa:8] * Address space H8/36079 Group: 16 Mbytes H8/36077 Group: 64 Kbytes CPU30H2C_000120030300 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 9 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU * High-speed operation All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 2 state 8 x 8-bit register-register multiply: 16 / 8-bit register-register divide: 16 x 16-bit register-register multiply: 32 / 16-bit register-register divide: * CPU operating mode H8/36079 Group: Advanced mode H8/36077 Group: Normal mode * Power-down state Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction 14 states 14 states 22 states 22 states Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 10 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.1 Address Space and Memory Map Figure 2.1 shows the memory map of the address space of H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group. HD64F36079G HD64F36079L (Flash memory version) H'000000 H'00008B H'00008C Interrupt vector H'000000 H'00008B H'00008C HD64F36077G HD64F36077L (Flash memory version) H'0000 H'0045 H'0046 Interrupt vector H'0000 H'0045 H'0046 HD64F36078G HD64F36078L (Flash memory version) Interrupt vector HD64F36074G HD64F36074L (Flash memory version) Interrupt vector On-chip ROM (32 kbytes) On-chip ROM (128 kbytes) On-chip ROM (96 kbytes) On-chip ROM (56 kbytes) H'7FFF H'01EFFF H'01F000 H'01FFFF On-chip emulator firmware area (4 kbytes) H'CFFF H'D000 H'017FFF Not used H'FFE000 H'E800 On-chip RAM (4 kbytes) H'FFEFFF H'EFFF Not used H'FFF700 Internal I/O register H'FFF77F H'FFF780 (1-kbyte working area for flash memory programming) H'FFFB7F On-chip RAM (2 kbytes) H'FFFB80 (1-kbyte user area) H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O register H'FFFFFF H'FFFF H'DFFF On-chip emulator firmware area (4 kbytes) Not used Not used H'FFE000 On-chip RAM (4 kbytes) H'FFEFFF Not used H'FFF700 Internal I/O register H'FFF77F H'FFF780 (1-kbyte working area for flash memory programming) H'FFFB7F On-chip RAM (2 kbytes) H'FFFB80 (1-kbyte user area) H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 Internal I/O register H'FFFFFF Not used H'E800 On-chip RAM (2 kbytes) H'EFFF Not used H'F700 Internal I/O register H'F77F H'F780 (1-kbyte working area for flash memory programming) H'FB7F On-chip RAM (2 kbytes) H'FB80 (1-kbyte user area) H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O register H'FFFF Internal I/O register Not used H'F700 Internal I/O register H'F77F H'F780 (1-kbyte working area for flash memory programming) H'FB7F On-chip RAM (2 kbytes) H'FB80 (1-kbyte user area) On-chip RAM (2 kbytes) Figure 2.1 Memory Map Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 11 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.2 Register Configuration The H8/300H CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.2. There are two types of registers; general registers and control registers. The control registers are a 24-bit program counter (PC), and an 8-bit condition-code register (CCR). General Registers (ERn) 15 ER0 ER1 ER2 ER3 ER4 ER5 ER6 ER7 E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 (SP) 07 R0H R1H R2H R3H R4H R5H R6H R7H 07 R0L R1L R2L R3L R4L R5L R6L R7L 0 Control Registers (CR) 23 PC 0 76543210 CCR I UI H U N Z V C [Legend] SP: PC: CCR: I: UI: Stack pointer Program counter Condition-code register Interrupt mask bit User bit H: U: N: Z: V: C: Half-carry flag User bit Negative flag Zero flag Overflow flag Carry flag Figure 2.2 CPU Registers Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 12 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.2.1 General Registers The H8/300H CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally identical and can be used as both address registers and data registers. The general registers are available for use as 32-, 16-, and 8-bit data registers. Figure 2.3 illustrates the usage of the general registers. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7). The ER registers are divided into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 16bit registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers. The R registers are divided into 8-bit registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 8-bit registers. The usage of each register can be selected independently. * Address registers * 32-bit registers * 16-bit registers * 8-bit registers E registers (extended registers) (E0 to E7) ER registers (ER0 to ER7) R registers (R0 to R7) RL registers (R0L to R7L) RH registers (R0H to R7H) Figure 2.3 Usage of General Registers General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.4 shows the relationship between the stack pointer and the stack area. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 13 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Empty area SP (ER7) Stack area Figure 2.4 Relationship between Stack Pointer and Stack Area 2.2.2 Program Counter (PC) This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0). The PC is initialized when the start address is loaded by the vector address generated during reset exception-handling sequence. 2.2.3 Condition-Code Register (CCR) This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. The I bit is initialized to 1 by reset exception-handling sequence, but other bits are not initialized. Some instructions leave flag bits unchanged. Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch (Bcc) instructions. For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see appendix A.1, Instruction List. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 14 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Bit 7 Bit Name I Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Interrupt Mask Bit Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting. The I bit is set to 1 at the start of an exception-handling sequence. 6 UI Undefined R/W User Bit Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. 5 H Undefined R/W Half-Carry Flag When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. 4 U Undefined R/W User Bit Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. 3 N Undefined R/W Negative Flag Stores the value of the most significant bit of data as a sign bit. 2 Z Undefined R/W Zero Flag Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. 1 V Undefined R/W Overflow Flag Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other times. 0 C Undefined R/W Carry Flag Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by: * * * Add instructions, to indicate a carry Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow Shift and rotate instructions, to indicate a carry The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 15 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.3 Data Formats The H8/300H CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit BCD data. 2.3.1 General Register Data Formats Figure 2.5 shows the data formats in general registers. Data Type 1-bit data General Register RnH Data Format 7 0 Don't care 7 0 76 54 32 10 1-bit data RnL Don't care 76 54 32 10 7 4-bit BCD data RnH Upper 43 Lower 0 Don't care 7 4-bit BCD data RnL Don't care Upper 43 Lower 0 7 Byte data RnH MSB 0 Don't care LSB 7 0 LSB Byte data RnL Don't care MSB Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 16 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Data Type Word data General Register Rn Data Format 15 0 Word data En 15 0 MSB LSB MSB LSB 16 15 0 Longword data ERn 31 MSB LSB [Legend] ERn: General register ER En: Rn: General register E General register R RnH: General register RH RnL: General register RL MSB: Most significant bit LSB: Least significant bit Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (2) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 17 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.3.2 Memory Data Formats Figure 2.6 shows the data formats in memory. The H8/300H CPU can access word data and longword data in memory, however word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, an address error does not occur, however the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so access begins the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches. When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack area, the operand size should be word or longword. Data Type Address 7 1-bit data Address L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Data Format 0 0 Byte data Address L MSB LSB Word data Address 2M Address 2M+1 MSB LSB Longword data Address 2N Address 2N+1 Address 2N+2 Address 2N+3 MSB LSB Figure 2.6 Memory Data Formats Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 18 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.4 2.4.1 Instruction Set Table of Instructions Classified by Function The H8/300H CPU has 62 instructions. Tables 2.2 to 2.9 summarize the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in tables 2.2 to 2.9 is defined below. Table 2.1 Symbol Rd Rs Rn ERn (EAd) (EAs) CCR N Z V C PC SP #IMM disp + - x / :3/:8/:16/:24 Operation Notation Description General register (destination)* General register (source)* General register* General register (32-bit register or address register) Destination operand Source operand Condition-code register N (negative) flag in CCR Z (zero) flag in CCR V (overflow) flag in CCR C (carry) flag in CCR Program counter Stack pointer Immediate data Displacement Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Logical AND Logical OR Logical XOR Move NOT (logical complement) 3-, 8-, 16-, or 24-bit length Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 19 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Note: * General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers/address register (ER0 to ER7). Table 2.2 Instruction MOV Data Transfer Instructions Size* B/W/L Function (EAs) Rd, Rs (EAd) Moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. (EAs) Rd Cannot be used in this LSI. Rs (EAs) Cannot be used in this LSI. @SP+ Rn Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn. Rn @-SP Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @-SP. MOVFPE MOVTPE POP B B W/L PUSH W/L Note: * B: W: L: Refers to the operand size. Byte Word Longword Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 20 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Table 2.3 Instruction ADD SUB Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1) Size* B/W/L Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register (immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction.) Rd Rs C Rd, Rd #IMM C Rd Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.) Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd, Rd 4 Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. Rd (decimal adjust) Rd Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data. Rd x Rs Rd Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. Rd x Rs Rd Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. Rd / Rs Rd Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. ADDX SUBX INC DEC ADDS SUBS DAA DAS MULXU B B/W/L L B B/W MULXS B/W DIVXU B/W Note: * B: W: L: Refers to the operand size. Byte Word Longword Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 21 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Table 2.3 Instruction DIVXS Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2) Size* B/W Function Rd / Rs Rd Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. Rd - Rs, Rd - #IMM Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the result. 0 - Rd Rd Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. Rd (zero extension) Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the left. Rd (sign extension) Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit. CMP B/W/L NEG B/W/L EXTU W/L EXTS W/L Note: * B: W: L: Refers to the operand size. Byte Word Longword Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 22 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Table 2.4 Instruction AND Logic Operations Instructions Size* B/W/L Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. (Rd) (Rd) Takes the one's complement (logical complement) of general register contents. OR B/W/L XOR B/W/L NOT B/W/L Note: * B: W: L: Refers to the operand size. Byte Word Longword Table 2.5 Instruction SHAL SHAR SHLL SHLR ROTL ROTR ROTXL ROTXR Note: * B: W: L: Shift Instructions Size* B/W/L B/W/L B/W/L B/W/L Function Rd (shift) Rd Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents. Rd (shift) Rd Performs a logical shift on general register contents. Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates general register contents. Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates general register contents through the carry flag. Refers to the operand size. Byte Word Longword Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 23 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Table 2.6 Instruction BSET Bit Manipulation Instructions (1) Size* B Function 1 ( BCLR B BNOT B BTST B BAND B BIAND B BOR B BIOR B Note: * Refers to the operand size. B: Byte Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 24 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Table 2.6 Instruction BXOR Bit Manipulation Instructions (2) Size* B Function C ( BIXOR B BLD B BILD B BST B BIST B Note: * Refers to the operand size. B: Byte Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 25 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Table 2.7 Instruction Bcc* Branch Instructions Size Function Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The branching conditions are listed below. Mnemonic BRA(BT) BRN(BF) BHI BLS BCC(BHS) BCS(BLO) BNE BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BLT BGT BLE Description Always (true) Never (false) High Low or same Carry clear (high or same) Carry set (low) Not equal Equal Overflow clear Overflow set Plus Minus Greater or equal Less than Greater than Less or equal Condition Always Never CZ=0 CZ=1 C=0 C=1 Z=0 Z=1 V=0 V=1 N=0 N=1 NV=0 NV=1 Z(N V) = 0 Z(N V) = 1 JMP BSR JSR RTS Note: * Branches unconditionally to a specified address. Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. Returns from a subroutine Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 26 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Table 2.8 Instruction TRAPA RTE SLEEP LDC System Control Instructions Size* B/W Function Starts trap-instruction exception handling. Returns from an exception-handling routine. Causes a transition to a power-down state. (EAs) CCR Moves the source operand contents to the CCR. The CCR size is one byte, but in transfer from memory, data is read by word access. CCR (EAd) Transfers the CCR contents to a destination location. The condition code register size is one byte, but in transfer to memory, data is written by word access. CCR #IMM CCR Logically ANDs the CCR with immediate data. CCR #IMM CCR Logically ORs the CCR with immediate data. CCR #IMM CCR Logically XORs the CCR with immediate data. PC + 2 PC Only increments the program counter. STC B/W ANDC ORC XORC NOP Note: B B B * Refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 27 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Table 2.9 Instruction EEPMOV.B Block Data Transfer Instructions Size Function if R4L 0 then Repeat @ER5+ @ER6+, R4L-1 R4L Until R4L = 0 else next; if R4 0 then Repeat @ER5+ @ER6+, R4-1 R4 Until R4 = 0 else next; Transfers a data block. Starting from the address set in ER5, transfers data for the number of bytes set in R4L or R4 to the address location set in ER6. Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is completed. EEPMOV.W Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 28 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.4.2 Basic Instruction Formats H8/300H CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation field (op), a register field (r), an effective address extension (EA), and a condition field (cc). Figure 2.7 shows examples of instruction formats. * Operation Field Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields. * Register Field Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, and data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field. * Effective Address Extension 8, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. A24-bit address or displacement is treated as a 32-bit data in which the first 8 bits are 0 (H'00). * Condition Field Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions. (1) Operation field only op NOP, RTS, etc. (2) Operation field and register fields op rn rm ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc. (3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension op EA(disp) rn rm MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm (4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc EA(disp) BRA d:8 Figure 2.7 Instruction Formats Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 29 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.5 2.5.1 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation Addressing Modes The H8/300H CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.10. Each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. Addressing modes that can be used differ depending on the instruction. For details, refer to appendix A.4, Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative and memory indirect. Bit-manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or the absolute addressing mode (@aa:8) to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. Table 2.10 Addressing Modes No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Addressing Mode Register direct Register indirect Register indirect with displacement Register indirect with post-increment Register indirect with pre-decrement Absolute address Immediate Program-counter relative Memory indirect Symbol Rn @ERn @(d:16,ERn)/@(d:24,ERn) @ERn+ @-ERn @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24 #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC) @@aa:8 (1) Register DirectRn The register field of the instruction specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 30 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU (2) Register Indirect@ERn The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn), the lower 24 bits of which contain the address of the operand on memory. (3) Register Indirect with Displacement@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:24, ERn) A 16-bit or 24-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the lower 24 bits of the sum the address of a memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. (4) (a) Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement@ERn+ or @-ERn Register indirect with post-increment@ERn+ The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) the lower 24 bits of which contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents (32 bits) and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For the word or longword access, the register value should be even. (b) Register indirect with pre-decrement@-ERn The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the lower 24 bits of the result is the address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For the word or longword access, the register value should be even. (5) Absolute Address@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24 The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24) For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 8 bits are a sign extension. A 24-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. Table 2.11 shows the access ranges of absolute addresses according to the modes of operation of each product group. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 31 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Table 2.11 Absolute Address Access Ranges Absolute Address 8 bits (@aa:8) 16 bits (@aa:16) 24 bits (@aa:24) Normal Mode H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'0000 to H'FFFF H'0000 to H'FFFF Advanced Mode H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'007FFF H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'FFFFFF (6) Immediate#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32 The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand. The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a vector address. (7) Program-Counter Relative@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC) This mode is used in the BSR instruction. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address. The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is -126 to +128 bytes (-63 to +64 words) or -32766 to +32768 bytes (-16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an even number. (8) Memory Indirect@@aa:8 This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address. The memory operand is accessed by longword access. The first byte of the memory operand is ignored, generating a 24-bit branch address. Figure 2.8 shows how to specify branch address for in memory indirect mode. The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF). Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 32 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Specified by @aa:8 Dummy Branch address Figure 2.8 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode 2.5.2 Effective Address Calculation Table 2.12 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. For operation in normal mode, the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit effective address. For operation in advanced mode, the 24-bit result of effective address calculation is generated as the address. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 33 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation (1) No 1 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Register direct(Rn) Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) Operand is general register contents. op 2 rm rn 31 General register contents Register indirect(@ERn) 0 23 0 op 3 r Register indirect with displacement @(d:16,ERn) or @(d:24,ERn) 31 General register contents 0 23 0 op r disp 31 Sign extension 0 disp 4 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement *Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+ 31 General register contents 0 23 0 op r 31 1, 2, or 4 *Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn 0 General register contents 23 0 op r 1, 2, or 4 The value to be added or subtracted is 1 when the operand is byte size, 2 for word size, and 4 for longword size. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 34 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation (2) No 5 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Absolute address Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) @aa:8 op abs 23 H'FFFF 87 0 @aa:16 op abs 23 16 15 0 Sign extension @aa:24 op abs 23 0 6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 op IMM Operand is immediate data. 7 Program-counter relative @(d:8,PC) @(d:16,PC) 23 PC contents 0 op disp 23 Sign extension 0 disp 23 0 8 Memory indirect @@aa:8 23 op abs H'0000 15 87 abs 0 0 Memory contents 23 16 15 H'00 0 [Legend] r, rm,rn : op : disp : IMM : abs : Register field Operation field Displacement Immediate data Absolute address Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 35 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.6 Basic Bus Cycle CPU operation is synchronized by a system clock () or a subclock (SUB). The period from a rising edge of or SUB to the next rising edge is called one state. A bus cycle consists of two states or three states. The cycle differs depending on whether access is to on-chip memory or to on-chip peripheral modules. 2.6.1 Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM) Access to on-chip memory takes place in two states. The data bus width is 16 bits, allowing access in byte or word size. Figure 2.9 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Bus cycle T1 state o or o SUB T2 state Internal address bus Address Internal read signal Internal data bus (read access) Read data Internal write signal Internal data bus (write access) Write data Figure 2.9 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 36 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.6.2 On-Chip Peripheral Modules On-chip peripheral modules are accessed in two states or three states. The data bus width is 8 bits or 16 bits depending on the register. For description on the data bus width and number of accessing states of each register, refer to section 21.1, Register Addresses (Address Order). Registers with 16-bit data bus width can be accessed by word size only. Registers with 8-bit data bus width can be accessed by byte or word size. When a register with 8-bit data bus width is accessed by word size, a bus cycle occurs twice. In two-state access, the operation timing is the same as that for on-chip memory. Figure 2.10 shows the operation timing in the case of three-state access to an on-chip peripheral module. Bus cycle T1 state or SUB T2 state T3 state Internal address bus Internal read signal Internal data bus (read access) Internal write signal Internal data bus (write access) Address Read data Write data Figure 2.10 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (3-State Access) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 37 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.7 CPU States There are four CPU states: the reset state, program execution state, program halt state, and exception-handling state. The program execution state includes active mode and subactive mode. For the program halt state, there are a sleep mode, standby mode, and sub-sleep mode. These states are shown in figure 2.11. Figure 2.12 shows the state transitions. For details on program execution state and program halt state, refer to section 6, Power-Down Modes. For details on exception processing, refer to section 3, Exception Handling. CPU state Reset state The CPU is initialized Program execution state Active (high speed) mode The CPU executes successive program instructions at high speed, synchronized by the system clock Subactive mode The CPU executes successive program instructions at reduced speed, synchronized by the subclock Power-down modes Program halt state A state in which some or all of the chip functions are stopped to conserve power Sleep mode Standby mode Subsleep mode Exceptionhandling state A transient state in which the CPU changes the processing flow due to a reset or an interrupt Figure 2.11 CPU Operation States Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 38 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Reset cleared Reset state Reset occurs Exception-handling state Reset occurs Reset occurs Interrupt source Interrupt source Exceptionhandling complete Program halt state SLEEP instruction executed Program execution state Figure 2.12 State Transitions 2.8 2.8.1 Usage Notes Notes on Data Access to Empty Areas The address space of this LSI includes empty areas in addition to the ROM, RAM, and on-chip I/O registers areas available to the user. When data is transferred from CPU to empty areas, the transferred data will be lost. This action may also cause the CPU to malfunction. When data is transferred from an empty area to CPU, the contents of the data cannot be guaranteed. 2.8.2 EEPMOV Instruction EEPMOV is a block-transfer instruction and transfers the number of bytes indicated by R4L and starting at the address indicated by R5 to the address indicated by R6. In products for normalmode operation, set R4L and R6 so that the final address at the destination for transfer (value of R6 + R4L) does not exceed H'FFFF (the value of R6 must not change from H'FFFF to H'0000 during execution). In products for advanced-mode operation, set R4L and R6 so that the final address at the destination for transfer (value of R6 + R4L) does not exceed H'FFFFFF (the value of R6 must not change from H'FFFFFF to H'000000 during execution). Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 39 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU 2.8.3 Bit-Manipulation Instruction The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read data from the specified address in byte units, manipulate the data of the target bit, and write data to the same address again in byte units. Special care is required when using these instructions in cases where two registers are assigned to the same address, or when a bit is directly manipulated for a port or a register containing a write-only bit, because this may rewrite data of a bit other than the bit to be manipulated. (1) Bit Manipulation for Two Registers Assigned to the Same Address Example 1: Bit manipulation for the timer load register and timer counter (Applicable for timer B1 in the H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group.) Figure 2.13 shows an example of a timer in which two timer registers are assigned to the same address. When a bit-manipulation instruction accesses the timer load register and timer counter of a reloadable timer, since these two registers share the same address, the following operations takes place. 1. Data is read in byte units. 2. The CPU sets or resets the bit to be manipulated with the bit-manipulation instruction. 3. The written data is written again in byte units to the timer load register. The timer is counting, so the value read is not necessarily the same as the value in the timer load register. As a result, bits other than the intended bit in the timer counter may be modified and the modified value may be written to the timer load register. Read Count clock Timer counter Reload Write Timer load register Internal data bus Figure 2.13 Example of Timer Configuration with Two Registers Allocated to Same Address Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 40 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU Example 2: The BSET instruction is executed for port 5. P57 and P56 are input pins, with a low-level signal input at P57 and a high-level signal input at P56. P55 to P50 are output pins and output low-level signals. An example to output a high-level signal at P50 with a BSET instruction is shown below. * Prior to executing BSET instruction P57 Input/output Pin state PCR5 PDR5 Input Low level 0 1 P56 Input High level 0 0 P55 Output Low level 1 0 P54 Output Low level 1 0 P53 Output Low level 1 0 P52 Output Low level 1 0 P51 Output Low level 1 0 P50 Output Low level 1 0 * BSET instruction executed instruction BSET #0, @PDR5 The BSET instruction is executed for port 5. * After executing BSET instruction P57 Input/output Pin state PCR5 PDR5 Input Low level 0 0 P56 Input High level 0 1 P55 Output Low level 1 0 P54 Output Low level 1 0 P53 Output Low level 1 0 P52 Output Low level 1 0 P51 Output Low level 1 0 P50 Output High level 1 1 * Description on operation 1. When the BSET instruction is executed, first the CPU reads port 5. Since P57 and P56 are input pins, the CPU reads the pin states (low-level and high-level input). P55 to P50 are output pins, so the CPU reads the value in PDR5. In this example PDR5 has a value of H'80, but the value read by the CPU is H'40. 2. Next, the CPU sets bit 0 of the read data to 1, changing the PDR5 data to H'41. 3. Finally, the CPU writes H'41 to PDR5, completing execution of BSET instruction. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 41 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU As a result of the BSET instruction, bit 0 in PDR5 becomes 1, and P50 outputs a high-level signal. However, bits 7 and 6 of PDR5 end up with different values. To prevent this problem, store a copy of the PDR5 data in a work area in memory. Perform the bit manipulation on the data in the work area, then write this data to PDR5. * Prior to executing BSET instruction MOV.B MOV.B MOV.B #80, R0L, R0L, P57 Input/output Pin state PCR5 PDR5 RAM0 Input Low level 0 1 1 R0L @RAM0 @PDR5 P56 Input High level 0 0 0 The PDR5 value (H'80) is written to a work area in memory (RAM0) as well as to PDR5. P55 Output Low level 1 0 0 P54 Output Low level 1 0 0 P53 Output Low level 1 0 0 P52 Output Low level 1 0 0 P51 Output Low level 1 0 0 P50 Output Low level 1 0 0 * BSET instruction executed BSET #0, @RAM0 The BSET instruction is executed designating the PDR5 work area (RAM0). * After executing BSET instruction MOV.B MOV.B @RAM0, R0L R0L, @PDR5 P57 Input/output Pin state PCR5 PDR5 RAM0 Input Low level 0 1 1 P56 Input High level 0 0 0 The work area (RAM0) value is written to PDR5. P55 Output Low level 1 0 0 P54 Output Low level 1 0 0 P53 Output Low level 1 0 0 P52 Output Low level 1 0 0 P51 Output Low level 1 0 0 P50 Output High level 1 1 1 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 42 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU (2) Bit manipulation in a register containing a write-only bit Example 3: BCLR instruction executed designating port 5 control register PCR5 P57 and P56 are input pins, with a low-level signal input at P57 and a high-level signal input at P56. P55 to P50 are output pins that output low-level signals. An example of setting the P50 pin as an input pin by the BCLR instruction is shown below. It is assumed that a high-level signal will be input to this input pin. * Prior to executing BCLR instruction P57 Input/output Pin state PCR5 PDR5 Input Low level 0 1 P56 Input High level 0 0 P55 Output Low level 1 0 P54 Output Low level 1 0 P53 Output Low level 1 0 P52 Output Low level 1 0 P51 Output Low level 1 0 P50 Output Low level 1 0 * BCLR instruction executed BCLR #0, @PCR5 The BCLR instruction is executed for PCR5. * After executing BCLR instruction P57 Input/output Pin state PCR5 PDR5 Output Low level 1 1 P56 Output High level 1 0 P55 Output Low level 1 0 P54 Output Low level 1 0 P53 Output Low level 1 0 P52 Output Low level 1 0 P51 Output Low level 1 0 P50 Input High level 0 0 * Description on operation 1. When the BCLR instruction is executed, first the CPU reads PCR5. Since PCR5 is a write-only register, the CPU reads a value of H'FF, even though the PCR5 value is actually H'3F. 2. Next, the CPU clears bit 0 in the read data to 0, changing the data to H'FE. 3. Finally, H'FE is written to PCR5 and BCLR instruction execution ends. As a result of this operation, bit 0 in PCR5 becomes 0, making P50 an input port. However, bits 7 and 6 in PCR5 change to 1, so that P57 and P56 change from input pins to output pins. To prevent this problem, store a copy of the PDR5 data in a work area in memory and manipulate data of the bit in the work area, then write this data to PDR5. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 43 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 2 CPU * Prior to executing BCLR instruction MOV.B MOV.B MOV.B #3F, R0L, R0L, P57 Input/output Pin state PCR5 PDR5 RAM0 Input Low level 0 1 0 R0L @RAM0 @PCR5 P56 Input High level 0 0 0 The PCR5 value (H'3F) is written to a work area in memory (RAM0) as well as to PCR5. P55 Output Low level 1 0 1 P54 Output Low level 1 0 1 P53 Output Low level 1 0 1 P52 Output Low level 1 0 1 P51 Output Low level 1 0 1 P50 Output Low level 1 0 1 * BCLR instruction executed BCLR #0, @RAM0 The BCLR instructions executed for the PCR5 work area (RAM0). * After executing BCLR instruction MOV.B MOV.B @RAM0, R0L R0L, @PCR5 P57 Input/output Pin state PCR5 PDR5 RAM0 Input Low level 0 1 0 P56 Input High level 0 0 0 The work area (RAM0) value is written to PCR5. P55 Output Low level 1 0 1 P54 Output Low level 1 0 1 P53 Output Low level 1 0 1 P52 Output Low level 1 0 1 P51 Output Low level 1 0 1 P50 Output High level 0 0 0 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 44 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling Section 3 Exception Handling Exception handling may be caused by a reset, a trap instruction (TRAPA), or interrupts. * Reset A reset has the highest exception priority. Exception handling starts as soon as the reset is cleared by the RES pin. The chip is also reset when the watchdog timer overflows, and exception handling starts. Exception handling is the same as exception handling by the RES pin. * Trap Instruction Exception handling starts when a trap instruction (TRAPA) is executed. The TRAPA instruction generates a vector address corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code. Exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state, regardless of the setting of the I bit in CCR. * Interrupts External interrupts other than NMI and internal interrupts other than address break are masked by the I bit in CCR, and kept masked while the I bit is set to 1. Exception handling starts when the current instruction or exception handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 45 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling 3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address Table 3.1 shows the vector addresses and priority of each exception handling. When more than one interrupt is requested, handling is performed from the interrupt with the highest priority. Table 3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address Exception Sources Reset Vector Number 0 Normal Mode H'0000 to H'0001 Advanced Mode H'000000 to H'000003 Priority High Relative Module RES pin Watchdog timer External interrupt pin CPU Reserved for system use 1 to 6 NMI Trap instruction #0 Trap instruction #1 Trap instruction #2 Trap instruction #3 7 8 9 10 11 H'0002 to H'000D H'000004 to H'00001B H'000E to H'000F H'00001C to H'00001F H'0010 to H'0011 H'0012 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0015 H'0016 to H'0017 H'0018 to H'0019 H'000020 to H'000023 H'000024 to H'000027 H'000028 to H'00002B H'00002C to H'00002F H'000030 to H'000033 Address break CPU Break conditions satisfied 12 Direct transition by executing the SLEEP instruction IRQ0 Low-voltage detection interrupt IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 WKP 13 H'001A to H'001B H'000034 to H'000037 External interrupt pin 14 H'001C to H'001D H'000038 to H'00003B 15 16 17 18 19 H'001E to H'001F H'00003C to H'00003F H'0020 to H'0021 H'0022 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0025 H'0026 to H'0027 H'000040 to H'000043 H'000044 to H'000047 H'000048 to H'00004B H'00004C to H'0004F Low RTC Overflow Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 46 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling Vector Number Relative Module Timer V Exception Sources Normal Mode H'0028 to H'0029 Advanced Mode H'000050 to H'000057 Priority High Reserved for system use 20 Timer V compare match A Timer V compare match B Timer V overflow 22 H'002C to H'002D H'000058 to H'00005B SCI3 23 SCI3 receive data full SCI3 transmit data empty SCI3 transmit end SCI3 receive error 24 Transmit data empty Transmit end Receive data full Arbitration lost/Overrun error NACK detection Stop conditions detected A/D conversion end Compare match/input capture A0 to D0 Timer Z overflow Compare match/input capture A1 to D1 Timer Z overflow Timer Z underflow 25 26 H'002E to H'002F H'00005C to H'00005F IIC2 H'0030 to H'0031 H'000060 to H'000063 A/D converter Timer Z H'0032 to H'0033 H'0034 to H'0035 H'000064 to H'000067 H'000068 to H'00006B 27 H'0036 to H'0037 H'00006C to H'00006F Timer B1 SCI3_2 Reserved for system use 28 Timer B1 overflow 29 H'0038 to H'0039 H'000070 to H'000073 H'003A to H'003B H'000074 to H'000077 H'003C to H'003F H'000078 to H'00007F H'0040 to H'0041 H'000080 to H'000083 Reserved for system use 30, 31 Receive data full Transmit data empty Transmit end Receive error 32 Clock source switching Reserved for system use 33 Clock source switching (from external clock to on-chip oscillator) 34 H'0042 to H'0043 H'0044 to H'0045 H'000084 to H'000087 H'000088 to H'00008B Low Note: * A low-voltage detection interrupt is enabled only in the product with an on-chip poweron reset and low-voltage detection circuit. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 47 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling 3.2 Register Descriptions Interrupts are controlled by the following registers. * Interrupt edge select register 1 (IEGR1) * Interrupt edge select register 2 (IEGR2) * Interrupt enable register 1 (IENR1) * Interrupt enable register 2 (IENR2) * Interrupt flag register 1 (IRR1) * Interrupt flag register 2 (IRR2) * Wakeup interrupt flag register (IWPR) 3.2.1 Interrupt Edge Select Register 1 (IEGR1) IEGR1 selects the direction of an edge that generates interrupt requests of pins NMI and IRQ3 to IRQ0. Bit 7 Bit Name NMIEG Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description NMI Edge Select 0: Falling edge of NMI pin input is detected 1: Rising edge of NMI pin input is detected 6 to 4 3 IEG3 All 1 0 R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 1. IRQ3 Edge Select 0: Falling edge of IRQ3 pin input is detected 1: Rising edge of IRQ3 pin input is detected 2 IEG2 0 R/W IRQ2 Edge Select 0: Falling edge of IRQ2 pin input is detected 1: Rising edge of IRQ2 pin input is detected 1 IEG1 0 R/W IRQ1 Edge Select 0: Falling edge of IRQ1 pin input is detected 1: Rising edge of IRQ1 pin input is detected 0 IEG0 0 R/W IRQ0 Edge Select 0: Falling edge of IRQ0 pin input is detected 1: Rising edge of IRQ0 pin input is detected Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 48 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling 3.2.2 Interrupt Edge Select Register 2 (IEGR2) IEGR2 selects the direction of an edge that generates interrupt requests of the pins ADTRG and WKP5 to WKP0. Bit 7, 6 5 Bit Name WPEG5 Initial Value All 1 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. WKP5 Edge Select 0: Falling edge of WKP5(ADTRG) pin input is detected 1: Rising edge of WKP5(ADTRG) pin input is detected 4 WPEG4 0 R/W WKP4 Edge Select 0: Falling edge of WKP4 pin input is detected 1: Rising edge of WKP4 pin input is detected 3 WPEG3 0 R/W WKP3 Edge Select 0: Falling edge of WKP3 pin input is detected 1: Rising edge of WKP3 pin input is detected 2 WPEG2 0 R/W WKP2 Edge Select 0: Falling edge of WKP2 pin input is detected 1: Rising edge of WKP2 pin input is detected 1 WPEG1 0 R/W WKP1Edge Select 0: Falling edge of WKP1 pin input is detected 1: Rising edge of WKP1 pin input is detected 0 WPEG0 0 R/W WKP0 Edge Select 0: Falling edge of WKP0 pin input is detected 1: Rising edge of WKP0 pin input is detected Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 49 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling 3.2.3 Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IENR1) IENR1 enables direct transition interrupts, RTC interrupts, and external pin interrupts. Bit 7 Bit Name IENDT Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Direct Transfer Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, direct transition interrupt requests are enabled. 6 IENTA 0 R/W RTC Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, RTC interrupt requests are enabled. 5 IENWP 0 R/W Wakeup Interrupt Enable This bit is an enable bit, which is common to the pins WKP5 to WKP0. When the bit is set to 1, interrupt requests are enabled. 4 3 IEN3 1 0 R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 1. IRQ3 Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests of the IRQ3 pin are enabled. 2 IEN2 0 R/W IRQ2 Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests of the IRQ2 pin are enabled. 1 IEN1 0 R/W IRQ1 Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests of the IRQ1 pin are enabled. 0 IEN0 0 R/W IRQ0 Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests of the IRQ0 pin are enabled. When disabling interrupts by clearing bits in an interrupt enable register, or when clearing bits in an interrupt flag register, always do so while interrupts are masked (I = 1). If the above clear operations are performed while I = 0, and as a result a conflict arises between the clear instruction and an interrupt request, exception handling for the interrupt will be executed after the clear instruction has been executed. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 50 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling 3.2.4 Interrupt Enable Register 2 (IENR2) IENR2 enables, timer B1 overflow interrupts. Bit 7, 6 5 Bit Name IENTB1 Initial Value All 0 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Timer B1 Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, timer B1 overflow interrupt requests are enabled. Reserved These bits are always read as 1. 4 to 0 All 1 When disabling interrupts by clearing bits in an interrupt enable register, or when clearing bits in an interrupt flag register, always do so while interrupts are masked (I = 1). If the above clear operations are performed while I = 0, and as a result a conflict arises between the clear instruction and an interrupt request, exception handling for the interrupt will be executed after the clear instruction has been executed. 3.2.5 Interrupt Flag Register 1 (IRR1) IRR1 is a status flag register for direct transition interrupts, RTC interrupts, and IRQ3 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. Bit 7 Bit Name IRRDT Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Direct Transfer Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When a direct transfer is made by executing a SLEEP instruction while DTON in SYSCR2 is set to 1. [Clearing condition] When IRRDT is cleared by writing 0 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 51 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling Bit 6 Bit Name IRRTA Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description RTC Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When the RTC counter value overflows [Clearing condition] When IRRTA is cleared by writing 0 5, 4 3 IRRI3 All 1 0 R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 1. IRQ3 Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When IRQ3 pin is designated for interrupt input and the designated signal edge is detected. [Clearing condition] When IRRI3 is cleared by writing 0 2 IRRI2 0 R/W IRQ2 Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When IRQ2 pin is designated for interrupt input and the designated signal edge is detected. [Clearing condition] When IRRI2 is cleared by writing 0 1 IRRI1 0 R/W IRQ1 Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When IRQ1 pin is designated for interrupt input and the designated signal edge is detected. [Clearing condition] When IRRI1 is cleared by writing 0 0 IRRl0 0 R/W IRQ0 Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When IRQ0 pin is designated for interrupt input and the designated signal edge is detected. [Clearing condition] When IRRI0 is cleared by writing 0 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 52 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling 3.2.6 Interrupt Flag Register 2 (IRR2) IRR2 is a status flag register for timer B1 overflow interrupts. Bit 7, 6 5 Bit Name IRRTB1 Initial Value All 0 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Timer B1 Interrupt Request flag [Setting condition] When the timer B1 counter value overflows [Clearing condition] When IRRTB1 is cleared by writing 0 4 to 0 All 1 Reserved These bits are always read as 1. 3.2.7 Wakeup Interrupt Flag Register (IWPR) IWPR is a status flag register for WKP5 to WKP0 interrupt requests. Bit 7, 6 5 Bit Name IWPF5 Initial Value All 1 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. WKP5 Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When WKP5 pin is designated for interrupt input and the designated signal edge is detected. [Clearing condition] When IWPF5 is cleared by writing 0. 4 IWPF4 0 R/W WKP4 Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When WKP4 pin is designated for interrupt input and the designated signal edge is detected. [Clearing condition] When IWPF4 is cleared by writing 0. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 53 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling Bit 3 Bit Name IWPF3 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description WKP3 Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When WKP3 pin is designated for interrupt input and the designated signal edge is detected. [Clearing condition] When IWPF3 is cleared by writing 0. 2 IWPF2 0 R/W WKP2 Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When WKP2 pin is designated for interrupt input and the designated signal edge is detected. [Clearing condition] When IWPF2 is cleared by writing 0. 1 IWPF1 0 R/W WKP1 Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When WKP1 pin is designated for interrupt input and the designated signal edge is detected. [Clearing condition] When IWPF1 is cleared by writing 0. 0 IWPF0 0 R/W WKP0 Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] When WKP0 pin is designated for interrupt input and the designated signal edge is detected. [Clearing condition] When IWPF0 is cleared by writing 0. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 54 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling 3.3 Reset Exception Handling When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and this LSI enters the reset. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are initialized by the reset. To ensure that this LSI is reset at power-up, hold the RES pin low until the clock pulse generator output stabilizes. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 10 system clock cycles. When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts reset exception handling. The reset exception handling sequence is shown in figure 3.1. However, for the reset exception handling sequence of the product with on-chip power-on reset circuit, refer to section 19, Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits. The reset exception handling sequence is as follows: 1. Set the I bit in the condition code register (CCR) to 1. 2. The CPU generates a reset exception handling vector address, the data in that address is sent to the program counter (PC) as the start address, and program execution starts from that address. The reset exception handling vector address is H'0000 to H'0001 for normal mode operation and H'000000 to H'000003 in advanced mode operation. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 55 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling 3.4 3.4.1 Interrupt Exception Handling External Interrupts As the external interrupts, there are NMI, IRQ3 to IRQ0, and WKP5 to WKP0 interrupts. (1) NMI Interrupt NMI interrupt is requested by input signal edge to pin NMI. This interrupt is detected by either rising edge sensing or falling edge sensing, depending on the setting of bit NMIEG in IEGR1. NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and can always be accepted without depending on the I bit value in CCR. (2) IRQ3 to IRQ0 Interrupts IRQ3 to IRQ0 interrupts are requested by input signals to pins IRQ3 to IRQ0. These four interrupts are given different vector addresses, and are detected individually by either rising edge sensing or falling edge sensing, depending on the settings of bits IEG3 to IEG0 in IEGR1. When pins IRQ3 to IRQ0 are designated for interrupt input in PMR1 and the designated signal edge is input, the corresponding bit in IRR1 is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an interrupt. These interrupts can be masked by setting bits IEN3 to IEN0 in IENR1. (3) WKP5 to WKP0 Interrupts WKP5 to WKP0 interrupts are requested by input signals to pins WKP5 to WKP0. These six interrupts have the same vector addresses, and are detected individually by either rising edge sensing or falling edge sensing, depending on the settings of bits WPEG5 to WPEG0 in IEGR2. When pins WKP5 to WKP0 are designated for interrupt input in PMR5 and the designated signal edge is input, the corresponding bit in IWPR is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an interrupt. These interrupts can be masked by setting bit IENWP in IENR1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 56 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling Normal mode operation Reset cleared Vector fetch RES Internal address bus Internal read signal Internal write signal (1) (2) Internal processing Initial program instruction prefetch Internal data bus (16 bits) (1) (2) (3) (2) (3) Reset exception handling vector address (H'0000) Program start address Initial program instruction Advanced mode operation Reset cleared Vector fetch Internal processing Initial program instruction prefetch RES Internal address bus (1) (3) (5) Internal read signal Internal write signal Internal data bus (16 bits) (2) (4) (6) (1), (3) Reset exception handling vector address ((1) = H'000000 (3) = H'000002) (2), (4) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) (5) (6) Start address Initial program instruction Figure 3.1 Reset Sequence Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 57 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling 3.4.2 Internal Interrupts Each on-chip peripheral module has a flag to show the interrupt request status and the enable bit to enable or disable the interrupt. For RTC interrupt requests and direct transfer interrupt requests generated by execution of a SLEEP instruction, this function is included in IRR1, IRR2, IENR1, and IENR2. When an on-chip peripheral module requests an interrupt, the corresponding interrupt request status flag is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an interrupt. These interrupts can be masked by writing 0 to clear the corresponding enable bit. 3.4.3 Interrupt Handling Sequence Interrupts are controlled by an interrupt controller. Interrupt operation is described as follows. 1. If an interrupt occurs while the NMI or interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request signal is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. When multiple interrupt requests are generated, the interrupt controller requests to the CPU for the interrupt handling with the highest priority at that time according to table 3.1. Other interrupt requests are held pending. 3. The CPU accepts the NMI and address break without depending on the I bit value. Other interrupt requests are accepted, if the I bit is cleared to 0 in CCR; if the I bit is set to 1, the interrupt request is held pending. 4. If the CPU accepts the interrupt after processing of the current instruction is completed, interrupt exception handling will begin. First, both PC and CCR are pushed onto the stack. The state of the stack at this time is shown in figure 3.2. The PC value pushed onto the stack is the address of the first instruction to be executed upon return from interrupt handling. 5. Then, the I bit of CCR is set to 1, masking further interrupts excluding the NMI and address break. Upon return from interrupt handling, the values of I bit and other bits in CCR will be restored and returned to the values prior to the start of interrupt exception handling. 6. Next, the CPU generates the vector address corresponding to the accepted interrupt, and transfers the address to PC as a start address of the interrupt handling-routine. Then a program starts executing from the address indicated in PC. Figure 3.3 shows a typical interrupt sequence where the program area is in the on-chip ROM and the stack area is in the on-chip RAM. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 58 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling Normal mode operation SP - 4 SP - 3 SP - 2 SP - 1 SP (R7) Stack area SP (R7) SP + 1 SP + 2 SP + 3 SP + 4 CCR CCR* PCH PCL Even address Prior to start of interrupt exception handling Advanced mode operation PC and CCR saved to stack After completion of interrupt exception handling SP - 4 SP - 3 SP - 2 SP - 1 SP (R7) Stack area SP (R7) SP + 1 SP + 2 SP + 3 SP + 4 CCR PCE PCH PCL Even address Prior to start of interrupt exception handling [Legend] PCE: Bits 23 to 16 of program counter (PC) PCH: Bits 15 to 8 of program counter (PC) PCL: Bits 7 to 0 of program counter (PC) CCR: Condition code register SP: Stack pointer Notes: 1. PC shows the address of the first instruction to be executed upon return from the interrupt handling routine. 2. Register contents must always be saved and restored in word units, starting from an even-numbered address. * Ignored when returning from the interrupt handling routine. PC and CCR saved to stack After completion of interrupt exception handling Figure 3.2 Stack Status after Exception Handling Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 59 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling 3.4.4 Interrupt Response Time Table 3.2 shows the number of wait states after an interrupt request flag is set until the first instruction of the interrupt handling-routine is executed. Table 3.2 Item Waiting time for completion of executing instruction* Saving of PC and CCR to stack Vector fetch Instruction fetch Internal processing 1 Interrupt Wait States States 1 to 23 4 2 (4)* 4 4 2 Total 15 to 37 (17 to 39)* 2 Notes: 1. Not including EEPMOV instruction. 2. The value in parentheses is the number of states in advance mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 60 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling Normal mode operation Interrupt is accepted Interrupt level Instruction decision and wait for end of instruction prefetch Interrupt request signal Internal address bus Internal read signal Internal write signal Internal data bus (16 bits) (1) (2) (4) (1) (7) (9) (10) (1) (3) (5) (6) (8) (9) Internal processing Stack access Prefetch instruction of Internal Vector fetch processing interrupt handling routine Instruction prefetch address (Instruction is not executed. Address is saved as PC contents, becoming return address.) (2), (4) Instruction code (Instruction is not executed.) (3) Instruction prefetch address (Instruction is not executed.) (5) SP - 2 (6) SP - 4 (7) (8) (9) (10) CCR Vector address Start address of interrupt handling routine (contents of vector) First instruction of interrupt handling routine. Advanced mode operation Interrupt is accepted Interrupt level Instruction decision and wait prefetch for end of instruction Interrupt request signal Internal address bus Internal read signal Internal write signal Internal data bus (1) (2), (4) (3) (5) (7) (2) High level Internal processing Stack access Vector fetch Internal Prefetch instruction of processing interrupt handling routine (1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) Instruction prefetch address (Instruction is not executed. Address is saved as PC contents, becoming return address.) Instruction code (Instruction is not executed.) Instruction prefetch address (Instruction is not executed.) SP - 2 SP - 4 (6), (8) (9), (11) (10), (12) (13) (14) Saved PC and CCR Vector address Start address of interrupt handling routine (contents of vector) Start address of interrupt handling routine ((13), (10), (12)) First instruction of interrupt handling routine. Figure 3.3 Interrupt Sequence Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 61 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 3 Exception Handling 3.5 3.5.1 Usage Notes Interrupts after Reset If an interrupt is accepted after a reset and before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes the stack pointer (example: MOV.W #xx: 16, SP). 3.5.2 Notes on Stack Area Use When word data is accessed, the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0. Access to the stack always takes place in word size, so the stack pointer (SP: R7) should never indicate an odd address. Use PUSH Rn (MOV.W Rn, @-SP) or POP Rn (MOV.W @SP+, Rn) to save or restore register values. 3.5.3 Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers When a port mode register is rewritten to switch the functions of external interrupt pins, IRQ3 to IRQ0, and WKP5 to WKP0, the interrupt request flag may be set to 1. When switching a pin function, mask the interrupt before setting the bit in the port mode register. After accessing the port mode register, execute at least one instruction (e.g., NOP), then clear the interrupt request flag from 1 to 0. Figure 3.4 shows a port mode register setting and interrupt request flag clearing procedure. Interrupts masked. (Another possibility is to disable the relevant interrupt in interrupt enable register 1.) CCR I bit 1 Set port mode register bit Execute NOP instruction Clear interrupt request flag to 0 After setting the port mode register bit, first execute at least one instruction (e.g., NOP), then clear the interrupt request flag to 0. CCR I bit 0 Interrupt mask cleared Figure 3.4 Port Mode Register Setting and Interrupt Request Flag Clearing Procedure Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 62 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 4 Address Break Section 4 Address Break The address break simplifies on-board program debugging. It requests an address break interrupt when the set break condition is satisfied. The interrupt request is not affected by the I bit of CCR. Break conditions that can be set include instruction execution at a specific address and a combination of access and data at a specific address. With the address break function, the execution start point of a program containing a bug is detected and execution is branched to the correcting program. Figure 4.1 shows a block diagram of the address break. Internal address bus Comparator BARE* Interrupt generation control circuit BARH BARL ABRKCR ABRKSR Internal data bus BDRH BDRL Comparator Interrupt [Legend] BARE*, BARH, BARL: BDRH, BDRL: ABRKCR: ABRKSR: Break address registers Break data registers Address break control register Address break status register Note: * Only provided for microcontrollers that support advanced mode. Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of Address Break ABK0001A_000020020200 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 63 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 4 Address Break 4.1 Register Descriptions Address break has the following registers. * Address break control register (ABRKCR) * Address break status register (ABRKSR) * Break address register (BARH, BARL) * Break data register (BDRH, BDRL) 4.1.1 Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR) ABRKCR sets address break conditions. Bit 7 Bit Name RTINTE Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description RTE Interrupt Enable When this bit is 0, the interrupt immediately after executing RTE is masked and then one instruction must be executed. When this bit is 1, the interrupt is not masked. 6 5 CSEL1 CSEL0 0 0 R/W R/W Condition Select 1 and 0 These bits set address break conditions. 00: Instruction execution cycle 01: CPU data read cycle 10: CPU data write cycle 11: CPU data read/write cycle Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 64 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 4 Address Break Bit 4 3 2 Bit Name ACMP2 ACMP1 ACMP0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Address Compare Condition Select 2 to 0 These bits set the comparison condition between the address set in BAR and the internal address bus. Normal mode 000: Compares 16-bit addresses 001: Compares the higher-order 12 bits of the addresses 010: Compares the higher-order 8 bits of the addresses 011: Compares the higher-order 4 bits of the addresses 1XX: Reserved (setting prohibited) Advanced mode 000: Compares 24-bit addresses 001: Compares the higher-order 20 bits of the addresses 010: Compares the higher-order 16 bits of the addresses 011: Compares the higher-order 12 bits of the addresses 1XX: Reserved (setting prohibited) 1 0 DCMP1 DCMP0 0 0 R/W R/W Data Compare Condition Select 1 and 0 These bits set the comparison condition between the data set in BDR and the internal data bus. 00: No data comparison 01: Compares lower 8-bit data between BDRL and data bus 10: Compares upper 8-bit data between BDRH and data bus 11: Compares 16-bit data between BDR and data bus [Legend] X: Don't care. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 65 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 4 Address Break When an address break is set in the data read cycle or data write cycle, the data bus used will depend on the combination of the byte/word access and address. Table 4.1 shows the access and data bus used. When an I/O register space with an 8-bit data bus width is accessed in word size, a byte access is generated twice. For details on data widths of each register, see section 21.1, Register Addresses (Address Order). Table 4.1 Access and Data Bus Used Word Access Even Address Odd Address ROM space RAM space I/O register with 8-bit data bus width I/O register with 16-bit data bus width Upper 8 bits Upper 8 bits Upper 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Byte Access Even Address Odd Address Upper 8 bits Upper 8 bits Upper 8 bits Upper 8 bits Upper 8 bits Upper 8 bits Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 66 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 4 Address Break 4.1.2 Address Break Status Register (ABRKSR) ABRKSR consists of the address break interrupt flag and the address break interrupt enable bit. Bit 7 Bit Name ABIF Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Address Break Interrupt Flag [Setting condition] When the condition set in ABRKCR is satisfied [Clearing condition] When 0 is written after ABIF=1 is read 6 ABIE 0 R/W Address Break Interrupt Enable When this bit is 1, an address break interrupt request is enabled. 5 to 0 All 1 Reserved These bits are always read as 1. 4.1.3 Break Address Registers (BARE, BARH, BARL) Settings of the address where an address-break interrupt is to be generated are made in the break address registers (BAR: BARE*, BARH and BARL). For microcontrollers that support normalmode operation, BAR is a 16-bit readable/writable register with initial value H'FFFF. For microcontrollers that support advanced-mode operation, BAR is a 24-bit readable/writable register with the initial value H'FFFFFF. When setting an instruction execution cycle as the address break condition, set BAR to the address of the first byte of the instruction. Note: * BARE is only provided for microcontrollers that support advanced-mode operation. 4.1.4 Break Data Registers (BDRH, BDRL) BDRH and BDRL are 16-bit read/write registers that set the data for generating an address break interrupt. BDRH is compared with the upper 8-bit data bus. BDRL is compared with the lower 8bit data bus. When memory or registers are accessed by byte, the upper 8-bit data bus is used for even and odd addresses in the data transmission. Therefore, comparison data must be set in BDRH for byte access. For word access, the data bus used depends on the address. See section 4.1.1, Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR), for details. The initial value of this register is undefined. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 67 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 4 Address Break 4.2 Operation When the ABIF and ABIE bits in ABRKSR are set to 1, the address break function generates an interrupt request to the CPU. The ABIF bit in ABRKSR is set to 1 by the combination of the address set in BAR, the data set in BDR, and the conditions set in ABRKCR. When the interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after the instruction being executed ends. The address break interrupt is not masked by the I bit in CCR of the CPU. Figures 4.2 show the operation examples of the address break interrupt setting. When the address break is specified in instruction execution cycle Register setting * ABRKCR = H'80 * BAR = H'025A Program 0258 * 025A 025C 0260 0262 : NOP NOP MOV.W @H'025A,R0 NOP NOP : Underline indicates the address to be stacked. MOV MOV NOP NOP instruc- instruc- instruc- instruction 2 Internal tion tion 1 tion prefetch prefetch prefetch prefetch processing Stack save Address bus Interrupt request Interrupt acceptance 0258 025A 025C 025E SP-2 SP-4 Figure 4.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 68 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 4 Address Break When the address break is specified in the data read cycle Register setting * ABRKCR = H'A0 * BAR = H'025A Program 0258 025A * 025C 0260 0262 : NOP NOP MOV.W @H'025A,R0 NOP Underline indicates the address NOP to be stacked. : NOP MOV NOP Next MOV MOV instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc- instrution 2 tion tion tion ction Internal Stack tion 1 prefetch prefetch prefetch execution prefetch prefetch processing save Address bus Interrupt request Interrupt acceptance 025C 025E 0260 025A 0262 0264 SP-2 Figure 4.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (2) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 69 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 4 Address Break Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 70 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator The clock pulse generator (CPG) consists of a system clock generating circuitry, a subclock generating circuitry, and two prescalers. The system clock generating circuitry includes an external clock oscillator, a duty correction circuit, an on-chip oscillator, an RC clock divider, a clock select circuit, and a system clock divider. The subclock generating circuitry includes a subclock oscillator, and a subclock divider. The CPG can function as a clock generating circuitry itself or in combination with an external oscillator. Figure 5.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator. OSC1 OSC2 External clock oscillator OSC Duty correction circuit ROSC OSC /8 Clock select circuit On-chip ROSC oscillator RC clock ROSC/2 divider ROSC/4 RC System clock divider /16 /32 /64 /2 to /8192 Prescaler S (13 bits) System clock generating circuitry W/2 X1 X2 Subclock oscillator W (fW) Subclock divider W/4 W/8 SUB Prescaler W (5 bits) Subclock generating circuitry W/8 to W/128 Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator The system clock () and subclock (SUB) are basic clocks on which the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules operate. The system clock is divided into from /2 to /8192 by prescaler S. The subclock is divided into from W/8 to W/128 by prescaler W. These divided clocks are supplied to respective peripheral modules. CPG0200A_000020020200 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 71 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 5.1 Features * Choice of two clock sources On-chip oscillator clock Clock by an external oscillator output * Choice of two types of RC oscillation frequency by the user software 16 MHz 20 MHz * Frequency trimming Since the initial frequency of the on-chip oscillator in the flash memory version is within the range of two frequencies shown above, it is normally unnecessary to trim the frequency. It is, however, still possible to adjust it by rewriting the trimming registers. * Backup of the external oscillation halt This system detects the external oscillator halt. If detected, the system clock source is automatically switched to the on-chip oscillator clock. * Interrupt can be requested to the CPU when the system clock is switched from the external clock to the on-chip oscillator clock. 5.2 Register Descriptions The CPG has the following registers. * RC control register (RCCR) * RC trimming data protect register (RCTRMDPR) * RC trimming data register (RCTRMDR) * Clock control/status register (CKCSR) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 72 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 5.2.1 RC Control Register (RCCR) RCCR controls the on-chip oscillator. Bit 7 Bit Name RCSTP Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description On-Chip Oscillator Standby The on-chip oscillator standby state is entered by setting this bit to 1. 6 FSEL 1 R/W Frequency Select for On-chip Oscillator 0: 16 MHz 1: 20 MHz 5 VCLSEL 0 R/W Power Supply Select for On-chip Oscillator 0: Selects VBGR 1: Selects VCL When the VCL power is selected, the accuracy of the onchip oscillator frequency cannot be guaranteed. 4 to 2 1 0 RCPSC1 RCPSC0 All 0 1 0 R/W R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Division Ratio Select for On-chip Oscillator The division ratio of ROSC changes right after rewriting this bit. These bits can be written to only when the CKSTA bit in CKCSR is 0. 0x: ROSC (not divided) 10: ROSC/2 11: ROSC/4 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 73 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 5.2.2 RC Trimming Data Protect Register (RCTRMDPR) RCTRMDPR controls RCTRMDPR itself and writing to RCTRMDR. Use the MOV instruction to rewrite this register. Bit manipulation instruction cannot change the settings. Bit 7 Bit Name WRI Initial Value 1 R/W W Description Write Inhibit Only when writing 0 to this bit, this register can be written to. This bit is always read as 1. 6 PRWE 0 R/W Protect Information Write Enable Bits 5 and 4 can be written to when this bit is set to 1. [Setting condition] * When writing 0 to the WRI bit and writing 1 to the PRWE bit Reset When writing 0 to the WRI bit and writing 0 to the PRWE bit [Clearing conditions] * * 5 LOCKDW 0 R/W Trimming Data Register Lock Down The RC trimming data register (RCTRMDR) cannot be written to when this bit is set to 1. Once this bit is set to 1, this register cannot be written to until a reset is input even if 0 is written to this bit. [Setting condition] * When writing 0 to the WRI bit and writing 1 to the LOCKDW bit while the PRWE bit is 1 Reset [Clearing condition] * Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 74 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator Bit 4 Bit Name Initial Value R/W R/W Description Trimming Data Register Write Enable This register can be written to when the LOCKDW bit is 0 and this bit is 1. [Setting condition] * When writing 0 to the WRI bit while writing 1 to the TRMDRWE bit while the PRWE bit is 1 Reset When writing 0 to the WRI bit and writing 0 to the TRMDRWE bit while the PRWE bit is 1 TRMDRWE 0 [Clearing conditions] * * 3 to 0 All 1 Reserved These bits are always read as 1. 5.2.3 RC Trimming Data Register (RCTRMDR) RCTRMDR stores the trimming data of the on-chip oscillator frequency (FSEL = 1, 20 MHz). Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name TRMD7 TRMD6 TRMD5 TRMD4 TRMD3 TRMD2 TRMD1 TRMD0 Initial Value (0)* (0)* (0)* (0)* (0)* (0)* (0)* (0)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Trimming Data (FSEL = 1, 20 MHz) The trimming data is loaded from the flash memory to this register right after a reset. The on-chip oscillator clock (FSEL = 1, 20 MHz) can be trimmed by changing these bits. The frequency of the on-chip oscillator clock changes right after writing these bits. These bits are initialized to H'00. Changes in frequency are shown below (bit TRMD7 is a sign bit). (Min.) H'80 ... H'FF ... H'00 ... H'01 ... H'7F (Max.) Note: * These values are initialized to the trimming data loaded from the flash memory. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 75 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 5.2.4 Clock Control/Status Register (CKCSR) CKCSR selects the port C function, controls switching the system clocks, and indicates the system clock state. Bit 7 6 Bit Name PMRC1 PMRC0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Port C Function Select 1 and 2 PMRC1 0 1 0 1 PMRC0 0 0 1 1 PC1 I/O PC0 I/O CLKOUT I/O (Open) OSC2 OSC1 (external clock input) OSC1 5 OSCBAKE 0 R/W External Clock Backup Enable 0: External clock backup disabled 1: External clock backup enabled The external oscillation detecting circuit is enabled when this bit is 1. When the external oscillator halt is detected while this LSI operates on the external input signal, the system clock source is automatically switched to the onchip oscillator regardless of the value of bit 4 in this register. Note: The external oscillation detecting circuit operates on the on-chip oscillator clock. When this bit is set to 1, do not set the on-chip oscillator to the standby mode by the RCSTP bit in RCCR. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 76 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator Bit 4 Bit Name OSCSEL Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description LSI Operating Clock Select * When OSCBAKE = 0 This bit is used to forcibly select the system clock of this LSI. 0: The on-chip oscillator clock selected as the system clock source 1: The external input selected as the system clock source * When OSCBAKE = 1 This bit is used to switch the on-chip oscillator clock to the external clock. While this LSI is operating on the on-chip oscillator clock, setting this bit to 1 switches the system clocks to the external clock. [Setting condition] * * * When 1 is written to this bit while CKSWIF = 0 When 0 is written to this bit When the external oscillator halt is detected while OSCBAKE = 1 [Clearing conditions] 3 CKSWIE 0 R/W Clock Switching Interrupt Enable Setting this bit to 1 enables the clock switching interrupt request. 2 CKSWIF 0 R/W Clock Switching Interrupt Request Flag [Setting condition] * When the external clock is switched to the on-chip oscillator clock as the system clock source When writing 0 after reading as 1 [Clearing condition] * Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 77 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator Bit 1 Bit Name OSCHLT Initial Value 1 R/W R Description External Oscillator Halt Detecting Flag * When OSCBAKE = 1 This bit indicates the checking result of the external oscillator state. 0: External oscillator is running 1: External oscillator is halted. * When OSCBAKE = 0 This bit is non-deterministic; always read as 1. 0 CKSTA 0 R LSI Operating Clock Status 0: This LSI operates on the on-chip oscillator clock. 1: This LSI operates on the external clock. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 78 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 5.3 System Clock Select Operation Figure 5.2 shows the state transition of the system clock. LSI operates on on-chip oscillator clock Reset release Reset state On-chip oscillator: Operated External oscillator: Halted * Switching to external clock Oscillator halted On-chip oscillator: Halted External oscillator: Operated Oscillator operated LSI operates on external oscillator Note: * Conditions for the state transition are as follows: * When the external oscillator halt is detected while the backup function is enabled * When the external clock is switched to the on-chip oscillator clock by user software while the backup function is disabled On-chip oscillator: Operated External oscillator: Operated Figure 5.2 State Transition of System Clock 5.3.1 Clock Control Operation The LSI system clock is generated by the on-chip oscillator clock after a reset. The system clock sources are switched from the on-chip oscillator to the external clock by the user software. Figure 5.3 shows the flowchart to switch clocks with the external clock backup function enabled. Figures 5.4 and 5.5 show the flowcharts to switch clocks with the external clock backup function disabled. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 79 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator LSI operates on on-chip oscillator clock Start (reset) Write 1 to PMRC0 in CKCSR Write 1 to PMRC1 in CKCSR [1] Write 1 to OSCBAKE in CKCSR [2] Clear CKSWIF in CKCSR to 0 Write 1 to CKSWIE in CKCSR [3] Write 1 to OSCSEL in CKCSR [4] [5] Switched to external clock? (CKSTA in CKCSR is 1) No [1] External oscillation starts to be enabled when pins PC1 and PC0 are specified as external clock pins. Write 0 to bit PMRC1 to input the external clock. [2] The external oscillator halt detecting circuit is enabled when the external oscillation backup function is enabled. Since this detecting circuit operates on the on-chip oscillator clock, do not set the on-chip oscillator to standby mode by using the RCSTP bit in RCCR. [3] An interrupt to switch from the on-chip oscillator clock to the external oscillator is enabled. [4] After writing 1 to the OSCSEL bit, this LSI waits until the oscillation of the external oscillator settles. The correspondence between Nwait, which is the number of wait cycles for oscillation settling, and Nstby, which is the number of wait cycles for oscillation settling when returning from standby mode, is as follows: Nstby Nwait 2 x Nstby Nstby is set by bits STS[2:0] in SYSCR1. For details, see section 6.1.1, System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1). [5] While waiting for external oscillation settling, this LSI is not halted but continues to operate on the onchip oscillator clock. Read the CKSTA bit in CKCSR to ensure whether or not clocks are switched. When the oscillation settles, this LSI switches the system clocks to the external clock. If the external oscillator is halted, then set the clock switching interrupt request flag. [6] If this LSI detects the external oscillator halt, it switches the system clocks to the on-chip oscillator clock, and sets the clock switching interrupt request flag. External oscillator halt is detected* LSI operates on on-chip oscillator clock Exception handling for clock switching Yes [6] LSI operates on external clock External oscillator halt is detected* Note: * To prevent the LSI from malfunctioning at the external oscillation halt, switching the clock source along with the watchdog timer is highly recommended. Figure 5.3 Flowchart of Clock Switching with Backup Function Enabled Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 80 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator LSI operates on on-chip oscillator clock Start (reset) [1] External oscillation starts to be enabled when pins PC1 and PC0 are specified as external clock pins. Write 0 to bit PMRC1 to input the external clock. [2] After writing 1 to the OSCSEL bit, this LSI waits until the oscillation of the external oscillator settles. The correspondence between Nwait, which is the number of wait cycles for oscillation settling, and Nstby, which is the number of wait cycles for oscillation settling when returning from standby mode, is as follows: Nstby Nwait 2 x Nstby Nstby is set by bits STS[2:0] in SYSCR1. For details, see section 6.1.1, System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1). [3] While the system is waiting for the external oscillation settling, this LSI is not halted but continues to operate on the on-chip oscillator clock. Read the value of the CKSTA bit in CKCSR to ensure that the system clocks are switched. Write 1 to PMRC0 in CKCSR Write 1 to PMRC1 in CKCSR [1] Write 0 to CKSWIF in CKCSR Write 1 to OSCSEL in CKCSR [2] Switched to external clock? (CKSTA in CKCSR is 1) [3] No Yes LSI operates on external oscillator Figure 5.4 Flowchart of Clock Switching with Backup Function Disabled (1) (From On-Chip Oscillator Clock to External Clock) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 81 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator LSI operates on external clock Start (LSI operates on external clock) [1] When 0 is written to the OSCSEL bit, this LSI switches from the external clock to the on-chip oscillator clock after a stop duration. The halt duration here is the duration while the RC clock rises seven times after the OSCSEL bit becomes 0. [2] Writing 0 to PMRC0 disables the external oscillation input. Write 1 to CKSWIE in CKCSR if necessary Write 0 to OSCBAKE in CKCSR Write 0 to OSCSEL in CKCSR [1] LSI operates on on-chip oscillator clock When CKSWIE = 1 Exception handling for clock switching Write 0 to PMRC0 in CKCSR if necessary [2] LSI operates on on-chip oscillator clock Figure 5.5 Flowchart of Clock Switching with Backup Function Disabled (2) (From External Clock to On-Chip Oscillator Clock) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 82 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 5.3.2 Clock Switching Timing The timing for switching clocks are shown in figures 5.6 to 5.8. OSC RC OSCSEL PHISTOP (Internal signal) CKSTA On-chip oscillator clock operation Wait for external oscillation settling Nwait halt* External clock operation [Legend] OSC: External clock RC: On-chip oscillator clock : System clock OSCSEL: Bit 4 in CKCSR PHISTOP: System clock stop control signal CKSTA: Bit 0 in CKCSR Note: * The halt duration is the duration from the timing when the clock stops to the first rising edge of the OSC clock after seven clock cycles of the RC clock have elapsed. Figure 5.6 Timing Chart of Switching from On-Chip Oscillator Clock to External Clock Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 83 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator OSC RC OSCSEL PHISTOP (Internal signal) CKSTA CKSWIF External RC clock operation halt* On-chip oscillator clock operation [Legend] OSC: External clock RC: On-chip oscillator clock : System clock OSCSEL: Bit 4 in CKCSR PHISTOP: System clock stop control signal CKSTA: Bit 0 in CKCSR CKSWIF: Bit 2 in CKCSR Note: * The halt duration is the duration from the timing when the clock stops to the seventh rising edge of the RC clock. Figure 5.7 Timing Chart to Switch from External Clock to On-Chip Oscillator Clock Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 84 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator External clock halt OSC RC OSCHLT PHISTOP (Internal signal) CKSTA CKSWIF External clock operation OSC halt detected*1 Tchk halt*2 On-chip oscillator clock operation [Legend] OSC: External clock RC: On-chip oscillator clock : System clock OSCHLT: Bit 1 in CKCSR PHISTOP: System clock stop control signal CKSTA: Bit 0 in CKCSR CKSWIF: Bit 2 in CKCSR Notes: 1. 44 x RC Tchk 48 x RC 2. The halt duration is the duration from the timing when the clock stops to the seventh rising edge of the RC clock. Figure 5.8 External Oscillation Backup Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 85 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 5.4 Trimming of On-Chip Oscillator Frequency Users can trim the on-chip oscillator clock, supplying the external reference pulses with the input capture function in internal timer Z. An example of trimming flow and a timing chart are shown in figures 5.9 and 5.10, respectively. Because RCTRMDR is initialized by a reset, when users have trimmed the frequencies, some operations after a reset are necessary, such as trimming it again or saving the trimming value in an external device for later reloading. Start Setting timer Z GRA: Input capture GRC: Buffer of GRA Set RCTRMDR to H'00 Input reference pulses to pin P60/FTIOA0 Capture 1 Capture 2 Modify RCTRMDR* Frequency calculation Within desired frequency range? Yes No End Note: * Comparing the difference between the measured frequency and the desired frequency, individual bits of RCTRMDR are decided from the MSB bit by bit. Figure 5.9 Example of Trimming Flow for On-Chip Oscillator Clock Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 86 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator RC FTIOA0 input capture input tA (s) Timer Z TCNT M-1 M M+1 M+ GRA_0 N M M+ GRC_0 N M Capture 1 Capture 2 Figure 5.10 Timing Chart of Trimming of On-Chip Oscillator Frequency The on-chip oscillator frequency is gained by the expression below. Since the input-capture input is sampled by the RC clock, the calculated result may include a sampling error of 1 cycle of the RC clock. RC = (M + ) - M tA (MHz) RC: Frequency of on-chip oscillator (MHz) Period of reference clock (s) tA: M: Timer Z counter value Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 87 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 5.5 External Oscillators There are two methods to supply external clock pulses into this LSI: connecting a crystal or ceramic resonator, and an external clock. Oscillation pins OSC1 and OSC2 are common with general ports PC0 and PC1, respectively. To set pins PC0 and PC1 as crystal resonator or external clock input ports, refer to section 5.2.4, Clock Control/Status Register (CKCSR). Figure 5.11 shows a block diagram of an external clock oscillator. OSC2 600 k*2 LPM*1 OSC1 Notes: 1. 2. LPM: Power-down mode (standby mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode) Values here are reference values. Figure 5.11 Block Diagram of External Clock Oscillator 5.5.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator Figure 5.12 shows an example of connecting a crystal resonator. An AT-cut parallel-resonance crystal resonator should be used. Figure 5.13 shows the equivalent circuit of a crystal resonator. A resonator having the characteristics given in table 5.1 should be used. C1 PC0/OSC1 C2 PC1/OSC2/CLKOUT C1 = C 2 = 10 to 22 pF Figure 5.12 Example of Connection to Crystal Resonator Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 88 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator LS CS RS PC0/OSC1 CO PC1/OSC2/CLKOUT Figure 5.13 Equivalent Circuit of Crystal Resonator Table 5.1 Crystal Resonator Parameters 4 120 8 80 10 60 70 pF 16 50 20 40 Frequency (MHz) RS (Max.) CO (Max.) 5.5.2 Connecting Ceramic Resonator Figure 5.14 shows an example of connecting a ceramic resonator. C1 PC0/OSC1 C2 PC1/OSC2/CLKOUT C1 = C 2 = 5 to 30 pF Figure 5.14 Example of Connection to Ceramic Resonator 5.5.3 Inputting External Clock To use the external clock, input the external clock on pin OSC1. Figure 5.15 shows an example of connection. The duty cycle of the external clock signal must range from 45 to 55%. PC0/OSC1 External clock input PC1/OSC2/CLKOUT Open Figure 5.15 Example of External Clock Input Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 89 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 5.6 Subclock Oscillator Figure 5.16 shows a block diagram of the subclock oscillator. X2 8 M X1 Note : Resistance here is a reference value. Figure 5.16 Block Diagram of Subclock Oscillator 5.6.1 Connecting 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator Clock pulses can be supplied to the subclock divider by connecting a 32.768-kHz crystal resonator, as shown in figure 5.17. Figure 5.18 shows the equivalent circuit of the 32.768-kHz crystal resonator. C1 X1 C2 X2 C1 = C 2 = 15 pF (typ.) Figure 5.17 Typical Connection to 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator LS CS RS X1 CO X2 CO = 1.5 pF (typ.) RS = 14 k (typ.) fW = 32.768 kHz Note: Values here are reference values. Figure 5.18 Equivalent Circuit of 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 90 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 5.6.2 Pin Connection when Not Using Subclock When the subclock is not used, connect pin X1 to VCL or VSS and leave pin X2 open, as shown in figure 5.19. VCL or VSS X1 X2 Open Figure 5.19 Pin Connection when not Using Subclock 5.7 5.7.1 Prescaler Prescaler S Prescaler S is a 13-bit counter using the system clock () as its input clock. The outputs, which are divided clocks, are used as internal clocks by the on-chip peripheral modules. Prescaler S is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and starts counting on exit from the reset state. In standby mode and subsleep mode, the external clock oscillator stops. Prescaler S also stops and is initialized to H'0000. It cannot be read from or written to by the CPU. The outputs from prescaler S are shared by the on-chip peripheral modules. The division ratio can be set separately for each on-chip peripheral module. In active mode and sleep mode, the clock input to prescaler S is a system clock with the division ratio specified by bits MA2 to MA0 in SYSCR2. 5.7.2 Prescaler W Prescaler W is a 5-bit counter using a 32.768-kHz signal divided by 4 as its input clock. The divided output is used for clock time base operation of the RTC. Prescaler W is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and starts counting on exit from the reset state. Even in standby mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode, prescaler W continues functioning. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 91 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 5.8 5.8.1 Usage Notes Note on Resonators Resonator characteristics are closely related to board design and should be carefully evaluated by the user, referring to the examples shown in this section. Resonator circuit parameters will differ depending on the resonator element, stray capacitance of the PCB, and other factors. Suitable values should be determined in consultation with the resonator element manufacturer. Design the circuit so that the resonator element never receives voltages exceeding its maximum rating. 5.8.2 Notes on Board Design When using a crystal resonator (ceramic resonator), place the resonator and its load capacitors as close as possible to pins OSC1 and OSC2. Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation (see figure 5.20). Prohibited Signal A Signal B C1 PC0/OSC1 C2 PC1/OSC2/CLKOUT Figure 5.20 Example of Incorrect Board Design Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 92 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes Section 6 Power-Down Modes This LSI has six modes of operation after a reset. These include a normal active mode and four power-down modes, in which power consumption is significantly reduced. Module standby mode reduces power consumption by selectively halting on-chip module functions. * Active mode The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock. The system clock frequency can be selected from osc, osc/8, osc/16, osc/32, and osc/64. * Subactive mode The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules are operable on the subclock. The subclock frequency can be selected from w/2, w/4, and w/8. * Sleep mode The CPU halts. On-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock. * Subsleep mode The CPU halts. On-chip peripheral modules are operable on the subclock. * Standby mode The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules halt. When the clock time-base function is selected, the RTC is operable. * Module standby mode Independent of the above modes, power consumption can be reduced by halting on-chip peripheral modules that are not used in module units. LPW3002A_000120030300 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 93 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes 6.1 Register Descriptions The registers related to power-down modes are listed below. * System control register 1 (SYSCR1) * System control register 2 (SYSCR2) * Module standby control register 1 (MSTCR1) * Module standby control register 2 (MSTCR2) 6.1.1 System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1) SYSCR1 controls the power-down modes, as well as SYSCR2. Bit 7 Bit Name SSBY Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Software Standby This bit selects the mode to transit after the execution of the SLEEP instruction. 0: Enters sleep mode or subsleep mode. 1: Enters standby mode. For details, see table 6.2. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 94 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes Bit 6 5 4 Bit Name STS2 STS1 STS0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 These bits set the wait time from when the external clock oscillator starts functioning until the clock is supplied, in shifting from standby mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode, to active mode or sleep mode. During the wait time, this LSI automatically selects the on-chip oscillator clock as its system clock and counts the number of wait states. Select a wait time of 6.5 ms (oscillation stabilization time) or longer, depending on the operating frequency. Table 6.1 shows the relationship between the STS2 to STS0 values and the wait time. When using an external clock, set the wait time to be 100 s or longer. These bits also set the wait states for external oscillation stabilization when system clock is switched from the onchip oscillator clock to the external clock by user software. The relationship between Nwait (number of wait states for oscillation stabilization) and Nstby (number of wait states for recovering to the standby mode) is as follows. Nstby Nwait 2 x Nstby 3 NESEL 0 R/W Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select The subclock pulse generator generates the watch clock signal (W) and the external clock pulse generator generates the oscillator clock (OSC). This bit selects the sampling frequency of the oscillator clock when the watch clock signal (W) is sampled. When OSC= 4 to 20 MHz, clear NESEL to 0. 0: Sampling rate is OSC/16 1: Sampling rate is OSC/4 2 to 0 All 0 Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 95 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes Table 6.1 Operating Frequency and Waiting Time Operating Frequency 20 MHz 0.4 0.8 1.6 3.3 6.6 0.05 0.00 0.00 16 MHz 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.1 8.2 0.06 0.00 0.00 10 MHz 0.8 1.6 3.3 6.6 13.1 0.10 0.01 0.00 8 MHz 1.0 2.0 4.1 8.2 16.4 0.13 0.02 0.00 5 MHz 1.6 3.3 6.6 13.1 26.2 0.20 0.03 0.00 4 MHz 2.0 4.1 8.2 16.4 32.8 0.26 0.03 0.00 Bit Name STS2 STS1 STS0 Waiting Time 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 8,192 states 16,384 states 32,768 states 65,536 states 131,072 states 1,024 states 128 states 16 states Note: Time unit is ms. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 96 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes 6.1.2 System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2) SYSCR2 controls the power-down modes, as well as SYSCR1. Bit 7 6 5 Bit Name SMSEL LSON DTON Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Sleep Mode Selection Low Speed on Flag Direct Transfer on Flag These bits select the mode to enter after the execution of a SLEEP instruction, as well as bit SSBY of SYSCR1. For details, see table 6.2. 4 3 2 MA2 MA1 MA0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Active Mode Clock Select 2 to 0 These bits select the operating clock frequency in active and sleep modes. The operating clock frequency changes to the set frequency after the SLEEP instruction is executed. 0XX: OSC 100: OSC/8 101: OSC/16 110: OSC/32 111: OSC/64 1 0 SA1 SA0 0 0 R/W R/W Subactive Mode Clock Select 1 and 0 These bits select the operating clock frequency in subactive and subsleep modes. The operating clock frequency changes to the set frequency after the SLEEP instruction is executed. 00: W/8 01: W/4 1X: W/2 [Legend] X: Don't care. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 97 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes 6.1.3 Module Standby Control Register 1 (MSTCR1) MSTCR1 allows the on-chip peripheral modules to enter a standby state in module units. Bit 7 6 5 4 Bit Name MSTIIC MSTS3 MSTAD Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0. IIC2 Module Standby IIC2 enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1 SCI3 Module Standby SCI3 enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1 A/D Converter Module Standby A/D converter enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1 3 MSTWD 0 R/W Watchdog Timer Module Standby Watchdog timer enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1.When the internal oscillator is selected for the watchdog timer clock, the watchdog timer operates regardless of the setting of this bit 2 1 0 MSTTV MSTTA 0 0 0 R/W R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 0. Timer V Module Standby Timer V enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1 RTC Module Standby RTC enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 98 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes 6.1.4 Module Standby Control Register 2 (MSTCR2) MSTCR2 allows the on-chip peripheral modules to enter a standby state in module units. Bit 7 6, 5 4 3, 2 1 0 Bit Name MSTS3_2 MSTTB1 MSTTZ Initial Value 0 All 0 0 All 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description SCI3_2 Module Standby SCI3_2 enters standby mode when this bit is set to1 Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Timer B1 Module Standby Timer B1 enters standby mode when this bit is set to1 Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Timer Z Module Standby Timer Z enters standby mode when this bit is set to1 MSTPWM 0 PWM Module Standby PWM enters standby mode when this bit is set to1 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 99 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes 6.2 Mode Transitions and States of LSI Figure 6.1 shows the possible transitions among these operating modes. A transition is made from the program execution state to the program halt state by executing a SLEEP instruction. Interrupts allow for returning from the program halt state to the program execution state. A direct transition between active mode and subactive mode, which are both program execution states, can be made without halting the program. The operating frequency can also be changed in the same modes by making a transition directly from active mode to active mode, and from subactive mode to subactive mode. RES input enables transitions from a mode to the reset state. Table 6.2 shows the transition conditions of each mode after the SLEEP instruction is executed and a mode to return by an interrupt. Table 6.3 shows the internal states of the LSI in each mode. Reset state Program halt state SLEEP instruction Standby mode Interrupt Active mode Interrupt SLEEP instruction Direct transition interrupt SLEEP instruction SLEEP instruction Interrupt Direct transition interrupt Interrupt Program execution state Direct transition interrupt SLEEP instruction Sleep mode Program halt state SLEEP instruction Subactive mode Subsleep mode Interrupt Direct transition interrupt Notes: 1. To make a transition to another mode by an interrupt, make sure interrupt handling is after the interrupt is accepted. 2. Details on the mode transition conditions are given in table 6.2. Figure 6.1 Mode Transition Diagram Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 100 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes Table 6.2 Transition Mode after SLEEP Instruction Execution and Transition Mode due to Interrupt Transition Mode after SLEEP Instruction Execution Sleep mode Transition Mode due to Interrupt Active mode Subactive mode Subsleep mode Active mode Subactive mode Standby mode Active mode (direct transition) Subactive mode (direct transition) Active mode DTON 0 SSBY 0 SMSEL 0 LSON 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 X X X 0* X X 0 1 X: Don't care. Note: * When a state transition is performed while SMSEL is 1, timer V, SCI3, SCI3_2 and the A/D converter are reset, and all registers are set to their initial values. To use these functions after entering active mode, reset the registers. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 101 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes Table 6.3 Function Internal State in Each Operating Mode Active Mode Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Sleep Mode Functioning Functioning Halted Retained Retained Retained Subactive Mode Halted Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Subsleep Mode Halted Functioning Halted Retained Retained Retained Standby Mode Halted Functioning Halted Retained Retained Register contents are retained, but output is the high-impedance state. Functioning Functioning External clock oscillator Subclock oscillator CPU operations RAM IO ports Instructions Registers External interrupts IRQ3 to IRQ0 WKP5 to WKP0 RTC Timer V Watchdog timer SCI3, SCI3_2 IIC2 Timer B1 Timer Z Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Peripheral functions Functioning if the timekeeping time-base function is selected, and retained if not selected Reset Reset Reset Retained (functioning if the internal oscillator is selected as a count clock*) Reset Retained* Retained* Reset Retained Retained Reset Retained Retained Retained (the counter increments according to subclocks if the internal clock () is selected as a count clock*) Reset Functioning Reset Functioning Reset Functioning A/D converter LVD Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Note: * Registers can be read or written in subactive mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 102 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes 6.2.1 Sleep Mode In sleep mode, CPU operation is halted but the on-chip peripheral modules function at the clock frequency set by the MA2, MA1, and MA0 bits in SYSCR2. CPU register contents are retained. When an interrupt is requested, sleep mode is cleared and interrupt exception handling starts. Sleep mode is not cleared if the I bit of the condition code register (CCR) is set to 1 or the requested interrupt is disabled in the interrupt enable register. After sleep mode is cleared, a transition is made to active mode when the LSON bit in SYSCR2 is 0, and a transition is made to subactive mode when the bit is 1. When the RES pin goes low, the CPU goes into the reset state and sleep mode is cleared. 6.2.2 Standby Mode In standby mode, the external clock oscillator is halted, and operation of the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules is halted. However, as long as the rated voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers, on-chip RAM, and some on-chip peripheral module registers are retained. On-chip RAM contents will be retained as long as the voltage set by the RAM data retention voltage is provided. The I/O ports go to the high-impedance state. Standby mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, the on-chip oscillator starts functioning. The external oscillator also starts functioning when used. After the time set by the STS2 to STS0 bits in SYSCR1 has elapsed, standby mode is cleared and the CPU starts interrupt exception handling. Standby mode is not cleared if the I bit in the condition code register (CCR) is set to 1 or the requested interrupt is disabled by the interrupt enable bit. When the RES pin is driven low in standby mode, the on-chip oscillator starts functioning. Once the oscillator starts, the system clock is supplied to the entire chip. The RES pin must be kept low for the rated period set by the power-on reset circuit, until the oscillator stabilizes. If the RES pin is driven high after the oscillator has stabilized, the internal reset signal is cleared and the CPU starts reset exception handling. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 103 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes 6.2.3 Subsleep Mode In subsleep mode, operation of the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules other than RTC is halted. As long as a required voltage is applied, the contents of CPU registers, the on-chip RAM, and some registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are retained. I/O ports keep the same states as before the transition. Subsleep mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, subsleep mode is cleared and interrupt exception handling starts. Subsleep mode is not cleared if the I bit of CCR is set to 1 or the requested interrupt is disabled in the interrupt enable register. After subsleep mode is cleared, a transition is made to active mode when the LSON bit in SYSCR2 is 0, and a transition is made to subactive mode when the bit is 1. After the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 has elapsed, a transition is made to active mode. When the RES pin is driven low in standby mode, the on-chip oscillator starts functioning. Once the oscillator starts, the system clock is supplied to the entire chip. The RES pin must be kept low for the rated period set by the power-on reset circuit, until the oscillator stabilizes. If the RES pin is driven high after the oscillator has stabilized, the internal reset signal is cleared and the CPU starts reset exception handling. 6.2.4 Subactive Mode The operating frequency of subactive mode is selected from W/2, W/4, and W/8 by the SA1 and SA0 bits in SYSCR2. After the SLEEP instruction is executed, the operating frequency changes to the frequency which is set before the execution. When the SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition to sleep mode, subsleep mode, standby mode, active mode, or subactive mode is made, depending on the combination of SYSCR1 and SYSCR2. When the RES pin is driven low in standby mode, the on-chip oscillator starts functioning. Once the oscillator starts, the system clock is supplied to the entire chip. The RES pin must be kept low for the rated period set by the power-on reset circuit, until the oscillator stabilizes. If the RES pin is driven high after the oscillator has stabilized, the internal reset signal is cleared and the CPU starts reset exception handling. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 104 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes 6.3 Operating Frequency in Active Mode Operation in active mode is clocked at the frequency designated by the MA2, MA1, and MA0 bits in SYSCR2. The operating frequency changes to the set frequency after SLEEP instruction execution. 6.4 Direct Transition The CPU can execute programs in two modes: active and subactive modes. A direct transition is a transition between these two modes without stopping program execution. A direct transition can be made by executing a SLEEP instruction while the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1. The direct transition also enables operating frequency modification in active or subactive mode. After the mode transition, direct transition interrupt exception handling starts. If the direct transition interrupt is disabled in interrupt enable register 1, a transition is made instead to sleep or subsleep mode. Note that if a direct transition is attempted while the I bit in CCR is set to 1, sleep or subsleep mode will be entered, and the resulting mode cannot be cleared by means of an interrupt. 6.4.1 Direct Transition from Active Mode to Subactive Mode The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling (the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (1). Direct transition time = {(number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (number of internal processing states)}x (tcyc before transition) + (number of interrupt exception handling states) x (tsubcyc after transition) (1) Example Direct transition time = (2 + 1) x tosc + 14 x 8tw = 3tosc + 112tw (when the CPU operating clock of osc w/8 is selected) Legend tosc: OSC clock cycle time tw: Watch clock cycle time tcyc: System clock () cycle time tsubcyc: Subclock (SUB) cycle time Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 105 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 6 Power-Down Modes 6.4.2 Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active Mode The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling (the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (2). Direct transition time = {(number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (number of internal processing states)} x (tsubcyc before transition) + {(waiting time set in bits STS2 to STS0) + (number of interrupt exception handling states)} x (tcyc after transition) (2) Example Direct transition time = (2 + 1) x 8tw + (8192 + 14) x tosc = 24tw + 8206tosc (when the CPU operating clock of w/8 osc and a waiting time of 8192 states are selected) Legend tosc: OSC clock cycle time tw: Watch clock cycle time tcyc: System clock () cycle time tsubcyc: Subclock (SUB) cycle time 6.5 Module Standby Function The module-standby function can be set to any peripheral module. In module standby mode, the clock supply to modules stops to enter the power-down mode. Module standby mode enables each on-chip peripheral module to enter the standby state by setting a bit that corresponds to each module to 1 and cancels the mode by clearing the bit to 0. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 106 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM Section 7 ROM The features of the flash memory built into this LSI are summarized below. * Programming/erase methods The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is performed in single-block units. To erase the entire flash memory, each block must be erased in turn. * Reprogramming capability The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 1,000 times (Min.). * On-board programming On-board programming/erasing can be done in boot mode, in which the boot program built into the chip is started to erase or program of the entire flash memory. In normal user program mode, individual blocks can be erased or programmed. * Programmer mode Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode using a PROM programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode. * Automatic bit rate adjustment For data transfer in boot mode, this LSI's bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match the transfer bit rate of the host. * Programming/erasing protection Sets software protection against flash memory programming/erasing. * Power-down mode Operation of the power supply circuit can be partly halted in subactive mode. As a result, flash memory can be read with low power consumption. 7.1 Block Configuration Figure 7.1 shows the block configuration of flash memory of each product model. The thick lines indicate erasing units, the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses. Erasing is performed in erasing units shown in these figures. Programming is performed in 128byte units starting from an address with lower eight bits H'00 or H'80. ROM3560A_000120030300 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 107 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM H8/36079GF H8/36079LF H'000000 H'000001 H'000002 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000380 H'000381 H'000382 H'000400 H'000401 H'000402 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000780 H'000781 H'000782 H'000800 H'000801 H'000802 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000B80 H'000B81 H'000B82 H'000C00 H'000C01 H'000C02 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000F80 H'000F81 H'000F82 H'001000 H'001001 H'001002 Erase unit: 28 Kbytes H'007F80 H'007F81 H'007F82 H'008000 H'008001 H'008002 Erase unit: 32 Kbytes H'00FF80 H'00FF81 H'00FF82 H'010000 H'010001 H'010002 Erase unit: 32 Kbytes H'017F80 H'017F81 H'017F82 H'018000 H'018001 H'018002 Erase unit: 32 Kbytes H'01FF80 H'01FF81 H'01FF82 H'01FFFF Programming unit: 128 bytes H'017FFF H'01807F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00FFFF H'01007F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'007FFF H'00807F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'000FFF H'00107F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'000BFF H'000C7F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'0007FF H'00087F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'0003FF H'00047F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00007F Figure 7.1 Flash Memory Block Configuration (1) (H8/36079GF and H8/36079LF) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 108 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM H8/36078GF H8/36078LF H'000000 H'000001 H'000002 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000380 H'000381 H'000382 H'000400 H'000401 H'000402 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000780 H'000781 H'000782 H'000800 H'000801 H'000802 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000B80 H'000B81 H'000B82 H'000C00 H'000C01 H'000C02 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000F80 H'000F81 H'000F82 H'001000 H'001001 H'001002 Erase unit: 28 Kbytes H'007F80 H'007F81 H'007F82 H'008000 H'008001 H'008002 Erase unit: 32 Kbytes H'00FF80 H'00FF81 H'00FF82 H'010000 H'010001 H'010002 Erase unit: 32 Kbytes H'017F80 H'017F81 H'017F82 H'017FFF Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00FFFF H'01007F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'007FFF H'00807F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'000FFF H'00107F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'000BFF H'000C7F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'0007FF H'00087F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'0003FF H'00047F Programming unit: 128 bytes H'00007F Figure 7.1 Flash Memory Block Configuration (2) (H8/36078GF and H8/36078LF) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 109 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM H8/36077GF H8/36077LF H'0000 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'0380 H'0400 Erase unit: 1 Kbytes H'0780 H'0800 Erase unit: 1 Kbytes H'0B80 H'0C00 Erase unit: 1 Kbytes H'0F80 H'1000 Erase unit: 28 Kbytes H'7F80 H'8000 Erase unit: 16 Kbytes H'BF80 H'C000 Erase unit: 8 Kbytes H'DF80 H'DF81 H'DF82 H'DFFF H'BF81 H'C001 H'BF82 H'C002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'BFFF H'C07F H'7F81 H'8001 H'7F82 H'8002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'7FFF H'807F H'0F81 H'1001 H'0F82 H'1002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'0FFF H'107F H'0B81 H'0C01 H'0B82 H'0C02 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'0BFF H'0C7F H'0781 H'0801 H'0782 H'0802 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'07FF H'087F H'0381 H'0401 H'0382 H'0402 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'03FF H'047F H'0001 H'0002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'007F Figure 7.1 Flash Memory Block Configuration (3) (H8/36077GF and H8/36077LF) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 110 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM H8/36074GF H8/36074LF H'0000 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'0380 H'0400 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'0780 H'0800 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'0B80 H'0C00 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'0F80 H'1000 Erase unit: 28 Kbytes H'7F80 H'7F81 H'7F82 H'7FFF H'0F81 H'1001 H'0F82 H'1002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'0FFF H'107F H'0B81 H'0C01 H'0B82 H'0C02 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'0BFF H'0C7F H'0781 H'0801 H'0782 H'0802 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'07FF H'087F H'0381 H'0401 H'0382 H'0402 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'03FF H'047F H'0001 H'0002 Programming unit: 128 bytes H'007F Figure 7.1 Flash Memory Block Configuration (4) (H8/36074GF and H8/36074LF) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 111 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM 7.2 Register Descriptions The flash memory has the following registers. * Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) * Flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2) * Erase block register 1 (EBR1) * Flash memory power control register (FLPWCR) * Flash memory enable register (FENR) 7.2.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) FLMCR1 is a register that makes the flash memory change to program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, or erase-verify mode. For details on register setting, refer to section 7.4, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. Bit 7 6 Bit Name SWE Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0. Software Write Enable When this bit is set to 1, flash memory programming/erasing is enabled. When this bit is cleared to 0, other FLMCR1 register bits and all EBR1 bits cannot be set. 5 ESU 0 R/W Erase Setup When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to the erase setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the erase setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before setting the E bit to 1 in FLMCR1. 4 PSU 0 R/W Program Setup When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to the program setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the program setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before setting the P bit in FLMCR1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 112 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM Bit 3 Bit Name EV Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Erase-Verify When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to erase-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase-verify mode is cancelled. 2 PV 0 R/W Program-Verify When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to program-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, programverify mode is cancelled. 1 E 0 R/W Erase When this bit is set to 1 while SWE=1 and ESU=1, the flash memory changes to erase mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase mode is cancelled. 0 P 0 R/W Program When this bit is set to 1 while SWE=1 and PSU=1, the flash memory changes to program mode. When it is cleared to 0, program mode is cancelled. 7.2.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) FLMCR2 is a register that displays the state of flash memory programming/erasing. FLMCR2 is a read-only register, and should not be written to. Bit 7 Bit Name FLER Initial Value 0 R/W R Description Flash Memory Error Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the error-protection state. See section 7.5.3, Error Protection, for details. 6 to 0 All 0 Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 113 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM 7.2.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) EBR1 specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR1 is initialized to H'00 when the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is 0. Do not set more than one bit at a time, as this will cause all the bits in EBR1 to be automatically cleared to 0. (1) H8/36079GF and H8/36079LF Initial Bit Name Value EB7 EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When this bit is set to 1, 32 Kbytes of H'018000 to H'01FFFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 32 Kbytes of H'010000 to H'017FFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, H'008000 to H'00FFFF 32 Kbytes of H'010000 to H'017FFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 28 Kbytes of H'001000 to H'007FFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'000C00 to H'000FFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'000800 to H'000BFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'000400 to H'0007FF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'000000 to H'0003FF will be erased. (2) H8/36078GF and H8/36078LF Initial Bit Name Value EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved. Although this bit is readable/writable, do not set this bit to 1. When this bit is set to 1, 32 Kbytes of H'010000 to H'017FFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 32 Kbytes of H'008000 to H'00FFFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 28 Kbytes of H'001000 to H'007FFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'000C00 to H'000FFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'000800 to H'000BFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'000400 to H'0007FF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'000000 to H'0003FF will be erased. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 114 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM (3) H8/36077GF and H8/36077LF Initial Bit Name Value EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved. This bit is always read as 0. When this bit is set to 1, 8 Kbytes of H'C000 to H'DFFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 16 Kbytes of H'8000 to H'BFFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 28 Kbytes of H'1000 to H'7FFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'0C00 to H'0FFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'0800 to H'0BFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'0400 to H'07FF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'0000 to H'03FF will be erased. (4) H8/36074GF and H8/36074LF Initial Bit Name Value EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved. This bit is always read as 0. Reserved. Although this bit is readable/writable, do not set this bit to 1. Reserved. Although this bit is readable/writable, do not set this bit to 1. When this bit is set to 1, 28 Kbytes of H'1000 to H'7FFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'0C00 to H'0FFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'0800 to H'0BFF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'0400 to H'07FF will be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of H'0000 to H'03FF will be erased. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 115 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM 7.2.4 Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR) FLPWCR enables or disables a transition to the flash memory power-down mode when the LSI switches to subactive mode. There are two modes: mode in which operation of the power supply circuit of flash memory is partly halted in power-down mode and flash memory can be read, and mode in which even if a transition is made to subactive mode, operation of the power supply circuit of flash memory is retained and flash memory can be read. Bit 7 Bit Name PDWND Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Power-Down Disable When this bit is 0 and a transition is made to subactive mode, the flash memory enters the power-down mode. When this bit is 1, the flash memory remains in the normal mode even after a transition is made to subactive mode. 6 to 0 All 0 Reserved These bits are always read as 0. 7.2.5 Flash Memory Enable Register (FENR) Bit 7 (FLSHE) in FENR enables or disables the CPU access to the flash memory control registers, FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and FLPWCR. Bit 7 Bit Name FLSHE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Flash Memory Control Register Enable Flash memory control registers can be accessed when this bit is set to 1. Flash memory control registers cannot be accessed when this bit is set to 0. 6 to 0 All 0 Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 116 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM 7.3 On-Board Programming Modes There are two modes for programming/erasing of the flash memory; boot mode, which enables onboard programming/erasing, and programmer mode, in which programming/erasing is performed with a PROM programmer. On-board programming/erasing can also be performed in user program mode. At reset-start in reset mode, this LSI changes to a mode depending on the TEST pin settings, NMI pin settings, and input level of each port, as shown in table 7.1. The input level of each pin must be defined four states before the reset ends. When changing to boot mode, the boot program built into this LSI is initiated. The boot program transfers the programming control program from the externally connected host to on-chip RAM via SCI3. After erasing the entire flash memory, the programming control program is executed. This can be used for programming initial values in the on-board state or for a forcible return when programming/erasing can no longer be done in user program mode. In user program mode, individual blocks can be erased and programmed by branching to the user program/erase control program prepared by the user. Table 7.1 TEST 0 0 1 Setting Programming Modes NMI 1 0 x P85 x 1 x PB0 x x 0 PB1 x x 0 PB2 x x 0 LSI State after Reset End User Mode Boot Mode Programmer Mode [Legend] x: Don't care. 7.3.1 Boot Mode Table 7.2 shows the boot mode operations between reset end and branching to the programming control program. 1. When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the description in section 7.4, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. 2. SCI3 should be set to asynchronous mode, and the transfer format as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, and no parity. 3. When the boot program is initiated, the chip measures the low-level period of asynchronous SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The chip then calculates the bit rate of transmission from the host, and adjusts the SCI3 bit rate to match that of the host. The reset should end with the RxD pin high. The RxD and TxD pins should be Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 117 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM pulled up on the board if necessary. After the reset is complete, it takes approximately 100 states before the chip is ready to measure the low-level period. 4. After matching the bit rates, the chip transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the completion of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the chip. If reception could not be performed normally, initiate boot mode again by a reset. Depending on the host's transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the chip. To operate the SCI properly, set the host's transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI within the ranges listed in table 7.3. 5. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area is used by the boot program. The area H'FFF780 to H'FFFEEF for microcontrollers supporting advanced mode or H'F780 to H'FEEF for microcontrollers supporting normal mode, is the area to which the programming control program is transferred from the host. The boot program area cannot be used until the execution state in boot mode switches to the programming control program. 6. Before branching to the programming control program, the chip terminates transfer operations by SCI3 (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), however the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. Therefore, the programming control program can still use it for transfer of program data or verify data with the host. The TxD pin is high (PCR22 = 1, P22 = 1). The contents of the CPU general registers are undefined immediately after branching to the programming control program. These registers must be initialized at the beginning of the programming control program, as the stack pointer (SP), in particular, is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc. 7. Boot mode can be cleared by a reset. End the reset after driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 states, and then setting the NMI pin. Boot mode is also cleared when a WDT overflow occurs. 8. Do not change the TEST pin and NMI pin input levels in boot mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 118 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM Table 7.2 Item Boot Mode Operation Host Operation Processing Contents Communication Contents LSI Operation Processing Contents Branches to boot program at reset-start. Boot mode initiation Boot program initiation Bit rate adjustment Continuously transmits data H'00 at specified bit rate. H'00, H'00 . . . H'00 Transmits data H'55 when data H'00 is received error-free. H'00 * Measures low-level period of receive data H'00. * Calculates bit rate and sets BRR in SCI3. * Transmits data H'00 to host as adjustment end indication. H'55 reception. H'55 Flash memory erase Boot program erase error H'FF H'AA reception H'AA Checks flash memory data, erases all flash memory blocks in case of written data existing, and transmits data H'AA to host. (If erase could not be done, transmits data H'FF to host and aborts operation.) Transfer of number of bytes of programming control program Transmits number of bytes (N) of programming control program to be transferred as 2-byte data (low-order byte following high-order byte) Upper bytes, lower bytes Echoback Echobacks the 2-byte data received to host. Transmits 1-byte of programming control program (repeated for N times) H'XX Echoback Echobacks received data to host and also transfers it to RAM. (repeated for N times) H'AA reception H'AA Transmits data H'AA to host. Branches to programming control program transferred to on-chip RAM and starts execution. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 119 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM Table 7.3 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is Possible System Clock Frequency Range of LSI 10 MHz Host Bit Rate 9,600 bps 4,800 bps 7.3.2 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode On-board programming/erasing of an individual flash memory block can also be performed in user program mode by branching to a user program/erase control program. The user must set branching conditions and provide on-board means of supplying programming data. The flash memory must contain the user program/erase control program or a program that provides the user program/erase control program from external memory. As the flash memory itself cannot be read during programming/erasing, transfer the user program/erase control program to on-chip RAM, as in boot mode. Figure 7.2 shows a sample procedure for programming/erasing in user program mode. Prepare a user program/erase control program in accordance with the description in section 7.4, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. Reset-start No Program/erase? Yes Transfer user program/erase control program to RAM Branch to flash memory application program Branch to user program/erase control program in RAM Execute user program/erase control program (flash memory rewrite) Branch to flash memory application program Figure 7.2 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 120 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM 7.4 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing A software method using the CPU is employed to program and erase flash memory in the onboard programming modes. Depending on the FLMCR1 setting, the flash memory operates in one of the following four modes: Program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, and erase-verify mode. The programming control program in boot mode and the user program/erase control program in user program mode use these operating modes in combination to perform programming/erasing. Flash memory programming and erasing should be performed in accordance with the descriptions in section 7.4.1, Program/Program-Verify and section 7.4.2, Erase/Erase-Verify, respectively. 7.4.1 Program/Program-Verify When writing data or programs to the flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown in figure 7.3 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to the flash memory without subjecting the chip to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. 1. Programming must be done to an empty address. Do not reprogram an address to which programming has already been performed. 2. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. 3. Prepare the following data storage areas in RAM: A 128-byte programming data area, a 128byte reprogramming data area, and a 128-byte additional-programming data area. Perform reprogramming data computation according to table 7.4, and additional programming data computation according to table 7.5. 4. Consecutively transfer 128 bytes of data in byte units from the reprogramming data area or additional-programming data area to the flash memory. The program address and 128-byte data are latched in the flash memory. The lower 8 bits of the start address in the flash memory destination area must be H'00 or H'80. 5. The time during which the P bit is set to 1 is the programming time. Table 7.6 shows the allowable programming times. 6. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc. An overflow cycle of approximately 6.6 ms is allowed. 7. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 2 bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in words or in longwords from the address to which a dummy write was performed. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 121 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM 8. The maximum number of repetitions of the program/program-verify sequence of the same bit is 1,000. Write pulse application subroutine Apply Write Pulse WDT enable Set PSU bit in FLMCR1 Wait 50 s Set P bit in FLMCR1 Wait (Wait time=programming time) Clear P bit in FLMCR1 Wait 5 s Clear PSU bit in FLMCR1 Wait 5 s Disable WDT START Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait 1 s * Store 128-byte program data in program data area and reprogram data area n= 1 m= 0 Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram data area consecutively to flash memory Apply Write pulse Set PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait 4 s Set block start address as verify address nn+1 H'FF dummy write to verify address End Sub Wait 2 s Read verify data Increment address Verify data = write data? * No m=1 No Yes n6? Yes Additional-programming data computation Reprogram data computation No 128-byte data verification completed? Yes Clear PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait 2 s n 6? Yes Successively write 128-byte data from additionalprogramming data area in RAM to flash memory Sub-Routine-Call Apply Write Pulse No Yes No m= 0 ? Yes Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait 100 s End of programming n 1000 ? No Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait 100 s Programming failure Note: *The RTS instruction must not be used during the following 1. and 2. periods. 1. A period between 128-byte data programming to flash memory and the P bit clearing 2. A period between dummy writing of H'FF to a verify address and verify data reading Figure 7.3 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 122 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM Table 7.4 Reprogram Data Computation Table Verify Data 0 1 0 1 Reprogram Data 1 0 1 1 Comments Programming completed Reprogram bit Remains in erased state Program Data 0 0 1 1 Table 7.5 Additional-Program Data Computation Table Verify Data 0 1 0 1 Additional-Program Data 0 1 1 1 Comments Additional-program bit No additional programming No additional programming No additional programming Reprogram Data 0 0 1 1 Table 7.6 Programming Time In Additional Programming 10 Comments n Programming (Number of Writes) Time 1 to 6 7 to 1,000 30 200 Note: Time shown in s. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 123 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM 7.4.2 Erase/Erase-Verify When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 7.4 should be followed. 1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary. 2. Erasing is performed in block units. Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block register (EBR1). To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn. 3. The time during which the E bit is set to 1 is the flash memory erase time. 4. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing due to program runaway, etc. An overflow cycle of approximately 19.8 ms is allowed. 5. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower two bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write was performed. 6. If the read data is not erased successfully, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/eraseverify sequence as before. The maximum number of repetitions of the erase/erase-verify sequence is 100. 7.4.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory All interrupts, including the NMI interrupt, are disabled while flash memory is being programmed or erased, or while the boot program is executing, for the following three reasons: 1. Interrupt during programming/erasing may cause a violation of the programming or erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation cannot be assured. 2. If interrupt exception handling starts before the vector address is written or during programming/erasing, a correct vector cannot be fetched and the CPU malfunctions. 3. If an interrupt occurs during boot program execution, normal boot mode sequence cannot be carried out. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 124 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM Erase start SWE bit 1 Wait 1 s n1 Set EBR1 Enable WDT ESU bit 1 Wait 100 s E bit 1 Wait 10 ms E bit 0 Wait 10 s ESU bit 10 10 s Disable WDT EV bit 1 Wait 20 s Set block start address as verify address H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait 2 s Read verify data No Increment address Verify data + all 1s ? Yes * nn+1 No Last address of block ? Yes EV bit 0 Wait 4 s EV bit 0 Wait 4s No All erase block erased ? Yes Yes SWE bit 0 Wait 100 s End of erasing n 100 ? No Yes SWE bit 0 Wait 100 s Erase failure Note: *The RTS instruction must not be used during a period between dummy writing of H'FF to a verify address and verify data reading. Figure 7.4 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 125 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM 7.5 Program/Erase Protection There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection; hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 7.5.1 Hardware Protection Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted because of a transition to reset, subactive mode, subsleep mode, or standby mode. Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2), and erase block register 1 (EBR1) are initialized. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC Characteristics section. 7.5.2 Software Protection Software protection can be implemented against programming/erasing of all flash memory blocks by clearing the SWE bit in FLMCR1. When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit in FLMCR1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. By setting the erase block register 1 (EBR1), erase protection can be set for individual blocks. When EBR1 is set to H'00, erase protection is set for all blocks. 7.5.3 Error Protection In error protection, an error is detected when CPU runaway occurs during flash memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is forcibly aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. When the following errors are detected during programming/erasing of flash memory, the FLER bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1, and the error protection state is entered. * When the flash memory of the relevant address area is read during programming/erasing (including vector read and instruction fetch) * Immediately after exception handling excluding a reset during programming/erasing * When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 126 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, and EBR1 settings are retained, however program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be reentered by re-setting the P or E bit. However, PV and EV bit settings are retained, and a transition can be made to verify mode. Error protection can be cleared only by a reset. 7.6 Programmer Mode In programmer mode, a PROM programmer can be used to perform programming/erasing via a socket adapter, just as a discrete flash memory. Use a PROM programmer that supports the MCU device type with the on-chip 128-kbyte flash memory (FZTAT64V5). 7.7 Power-Down States for Flash Memory In user mode, the flash memory will operate in either of the following states: * Normal operating mode The flash memory can be read and written to at high speed. * Power-down operating mode The power supply circuit of flash memory can be partly halted. As a result, flash memory can be read with low power consumption. * Standby mode All flash memory circuits are halted. Table 7.7 shows the correspondence between the operating modes of this LSI and the flash memory. In subactive mode, the flash memory can be set to operate in power-down mode with the PDWND bit in FLPWCR. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state from power-down mode or standby mode, a period to stabilize operation of the power supply circuits that were stopped is needed. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state, bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 must be set to provide a wait time of at least 20 s, even when the external clock is being used. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 127 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 7 ROM Table 7.7 Flash Memory Operating States Flash Memory Operating State LSI Operating State Active mode Subactive mode Sleep mode Subsleep mode Standby mode PDWND = 0 (Initial Value) Normal operating mode Power-down mode Normal operating mode Standby mode Standby mode PDWND = 1 Normal operating mode Normal operating mode Normal operating mode Standby mode Standby mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 128 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 8 RAM Section 8 RAM Microcontrollers of the H8/36079 Group and H8/36077 Group have an on-chip high-speed static RAM. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, enabling two-state access by the CPU to both byte data and word data. Product Classification Flash memory version (F-ZTAT version) H8/36079 Group 5.0-V specification 3.3-V specification 5.0-V specification 3.3-V specification H8/36077 Group 5.0-V specification 3.3-V specification 5.0-V specification 3.3-V specification H8/36079GF H8/36079LF H8/36078GF H8/36078LF H8/36077GF H8/36077LF H8/36074GF H8/36074LF 4 Kbytes H'E800 to H'EFFF, H'F780 to H'FF7F*2 RAM Size RAM Address 6 Kbytes H'FFE000 to H'FFEFFF, H'FFF780 to H'FFFF7F*1 Notes: 1. When the E7 or E8 is used, area H'FFF780 to H'FFFB7F must not be accessed. 2. When the E7 or E8 is used, area H'F780 to H'FB7F must not be accessed. RAM0500A_000120030300 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 129 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 8 RAM Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 130 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports Section 9 I/O Ports This LSI has 47 general I/O ports and 8 general input-only ports. Port 6 is a large current port, which can drive 20 mA (@VOL = 1.5 V) when a low level signal is output. Any of these ports can become an input port immediately after a reset. They can also be used as I/O pins of the on-chip peripheral modules or external interrupt input pins, and these functions can be switched depending on the register settings. The registers for selecting these functions can be divided into two types: those included in I/O ports and those included in each on-chip peripheral module. General I/O ports are comprised of the port control register for controlling inputs/outputs and the port data register for storing output data and can select inputs/outputs in bit units. For functions in each port, see appendix B.1, I/O Port Block Diagrams. For the execution of bitmanipulation instructions to the port control register and port data register, see section 2.8.3, BitManipulation Instruction. 9.1 Port 1 Port 1 is a general I/O port also functioning as IRQ interrupt input pins, an RTC output pin, a 14bit PWM output pin, a timer B1 input pin, and a timer V input pin. Figure 9.1 shows its pin configuration. P17/IRQ3/TRGV P16/IRQ2 P15/IRQ1/TMIB1 Port 1 P14/IRQ0 P12 P11/PWM P10/TMOW Figure 9.1 Port 1 Pin Configuration Port 1 has the following registers. * Port mode register 1 (PMR1) * Port control register 1 (PCR1) * Port data register 1 (PDR1) * Port pull-up control register 1 (PUCR1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 131 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.1.1 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) PMR1 switches the functions of pins in port 1 and port 2. Bit 7 Bit Name IRQ3 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description This bit selects the function of pin P17/IRQ3/TRGV. 0: General I/O port 1: IRQ3/TRGV input pin 6 IRQ2 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P16/IRQ2. 0: General I/O port 1: IRQ2 input pin 5 IRQ1 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P15/IRQ1/TMIB1. 0: General I/O port 1: IRQ1/TMIB1 input pin 4 IRQ0 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P14/IRQ0. 0: General I/O port 1: IRQ0 input pin 3 TXD2 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P72/TXD_2. 0: General I/O port 1: TXD_2 output pin 2 PWM 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P11/PWM. 0: General I/O port 1: PWM output pin 1 TXD 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P22/TXD. 0: General I/O port 1: TXD output pin 0 TMOW 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P10/TMOW. 0: General I/O port 1: TMOW output pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 132 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.1.2 Port Control Register 1 (PCR1) PCR1 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 1. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PCR17 PCR16 PCR15 PCR14 PCR12 PCR11 PCR10 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W Description When the corresponding pin is designated in PMR1 as a general I/O pin, setting a PCR1 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Bit 3 is a reserved bit. 9.1.3 Port Data Register 1 (PDR1) PDR1 is a general I/O port data register of port 1. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P17 P16 P15 P14 P12 P11 P10 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description PDR1 stores output data for port 1 pins. If PDR1 is read while PCR1 bits are set to 1, the value stored in PDR1 are read. If PDR1 is read while PCR1 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the value stored in PDR1. Bit 3 is a reserved bit. This bit is always read as 1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 133 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.1.4 Port Pull-Up Control Register 1 (PUCR1) PUCR1 controls the pull-up MOS in bit units of the pins set as the input ports. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PUCR17 PUCR16 PUCR15 PUCR14 PUCR12 PUCR11 PUCR10 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Only bits for which PCR1 is cleared are valid. The pull-up MOS of P17 to P14 and P12 to P10 pins enter the onstate when these bits are set to 1, while they enter the off-state when these bits are cleared to 0. Bit 3 is a reserved bit. This bit is always read as 1. 9.1.5 Pin Functions The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below. P17/IRQ3/TRGV pin Register Bit Name Setting value PMR1 IRQ3 0 PCR1 PCR17 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P17 input pin P17 output pin IRQ3 input/TRGV input pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 134 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports P16/IRQ2 pin Register Bit Name Setting value PMR1 IRQ2 0 PCR1 PCR16 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P16 input pin P16 output pin IRQ2 input pin P15/IRQ1/TMIB1 pin Register Bit Name Setting value PMR1 IRQ1 0 PCR1 PCR15 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P15 input pin P15 output pin IRQ1 input/TMIB1 input pin P14/IRQ0 pin Register Bit Name Setting value PMR1 IRQ0 0 PCR1 PCR14 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P14 input pin P14 output pin IRQ0 input pin P12 pin Register Bit Name Setting value PCR1 PCR12 0 1 Pin Function P12 input pin P12 output pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 135 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports P11/PWM pin Register Bit Name Setting value PMR1 PWM 0 PCR1 PCR11 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P11 input pin P11 output pin PWM output pin P10/TMOW pin Register Bit Name Setting value PMR1 TMOW 0 PCR1 PCR10 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P10 input pin P10 output pin TMOW output pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 136 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.2 Port 2 Port 2 is a general I/O port also functioning as SCI3 I/O pins. Each pin of the port 2 is shown in figure 9.2. The register settings of PMR1and SCI3 have priority for functions of the pins for both uses. P24 P23 Port 2 P22/TXD P21/RXD P20/SCK3 Figure 9.2 Port 2 Pin Configuration Port 2 has the following registers. * Port control register 2 (PCR2) * Port data register 2 (PDR2) * Port mode register 3 (PMR3) 9.2.1 Port Control Register 2 (PCR2) PCR2 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 2. Bit 7 to 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PCR24 PCR23 PCR22 PCR21 PCR20 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W Description Reserved When each of the port 2 pins P24 to P20 functions as a general I/O port, setting a PCR2 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 137 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.2.2 Port Data Register 2 (PDR2) PDR2 is a general I/O port data register of port 2. Bit 7 to 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P24 P23 P22 P21 P20 Initial Value All 1 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. PDR2 stores output data for port 2 pins. If PDR2 is read while PCR2 bits are set to 1, the value stored in PDR2 is read. If PDR2 is read while PCR2 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the value stored in PDR2. 9.2.3 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3) PMR3 selects the CMOS output or NMOS open-drain output for port 2. Bit 7 to 5 4 3 Bit Name POF24 POF23 Initial Value All 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. When the bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin is cut off by PMOS and it functions as the NMOS open-drain output. When cleared to 0, the pin functions as the CMOS output. Reserved These bits are always read as 1. 2 to 0 All 1 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 138 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.2.4 Pin Functions The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below. P24 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR2 PCR24 0 1 Pin Function P24 input pin P24 output pin P23 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR2 PCR23 0 1 Pin Function P23 input pin P23 output pin P22/TXD pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PMR1 TXD 0 PCR2 PCR22 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P22 input pin P22 output pin TXD output pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 139 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports P21/RXD pin Register Bit Name Setting Value SCR3 RE 0 PCR2 PCR21 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P21 input pin P21 output pin RXD input pin P20/SCK3 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value SCR3 CKE1 0 CKE0 0 SMR COM 0 PCR2 PCR20 0 1 0 0 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. 0 1 x 1 x x x x x Pin Function P20 input pin P20 output pin SCK3 output pin SCK3 output pin SCK3 input pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 140 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.3 Port 3 Port 3 is a general I/O port. Each pin of the port 3 is shown in figure 9.3. P37 P36 P35 Port 3 P34 P33 P32 P31 P30 Figure 9.3 Port 3 Pin Configuration Port 3 has the following registers. * Port control register 3 (PCR3) * Port data register 3 (PDR3) 9.3.1 Port Control Register 3 (PCR3) PCR3 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 3. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PCR37 PCR36 PCR35 PCR34 PCR33 PCR32 PCR31 PCR30 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description Setting a PCR3 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 141 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.3.2 Port Data Register 3 (PDR3) PDR3 is a general I/O port data register of port 3. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 P30 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description PDR3 stores output data for port 3 pins. If PDR3 is read while PCR3 bits are set to 1, the value stored in PDR3 is read. If PDR3 is read while PCR3 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the value stored in PDR3. 9.3.3 Pin Functions The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below. P37 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR3 PCR37 0 1 Pin Function P37 input pin P37 output pin P36 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR3 PCR36 0 1 Pin Function P36 input pin P36 output pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 142 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports P35 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR3 PCR35 0 1 Pin Function P35 input pin P35 output pin P34 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR3 PCR34 0 1 Pin Function P34 input pin P34 output pin P33 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR3 PCR33 0 1 Pin Function P33 input pin P33 output pin P32 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR3 PCR32 0 1 Pin Function P32 input pin P32 output pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 143 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports P31 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR3 PCR31 0 1 Pin Function P31 input pin P31 output pin P30 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR3 PCR30 0 1 Pin Function P30 input pin P30 output pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 144 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.4 Port 5 2 Port 5 is a general I/O port also functioning as an I C bus interface I/O pin, an A/D trigger input pin, and wakeup interrupt input pin. Each pin of the port 5 is shown in figure 9.4. The register 2 setting of the I C bus interface register has priority for functions of the pins P57/SCL and P56/SDA. Since the output buffer for pins P56 and P57 has the NMOS push-pull structure, it differs from an output buffer with the CMOS structure in the high-level output characteristics (see section 22, Electrical Characteristics). P57/SCL P56/SDA P55/WKP5/ADTRG Port 5 P54/WKP4 P53/WKP3 P52/WKP2 P51/WKP1 P50/WKP0 Figure 9.4 Port 5 Pin Configuration Port 5 has the following registers. * Port mode register 5 (PMR5) * Port control register 5 (PCR5) * Port data register 5 (PDR5) * Port pull-up control register 5 (PUCR5) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 145 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.4.1 Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5) PMR5 switches the functions of pins in port 5. Bit 7 6 Bit Name POF57 POF56 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description When the bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin is cut off by PMOS and it functions as the NMOS open-drain output. When cleared to 0, the pin functions as the CMOS output. This bit selects the function of pin P55/WKP5/ADTRG. 0: General I/O port 1: WKP5/ADTRG input pin 4 WKP4 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P54/WKP4. 0: General I/O port 1: WKP4 input pin 3 WKP3 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P53/WKP3. 0: General I/O port 1: WKP3 input pin 2 WKP2 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P52/WKP2. 0: General I/O port 1: WKP2 input pin 1 WKP1 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P51/WKP1. 0: General I/O port 1: WKP1 input pin 0 WKP0 0 R/W This bit selects the function of pin P50/WKP0. 0: General I/O port 1: WKP0 input pin 5 WKP5 0 R/W Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 146 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.4.2 Port Control Register 5 (PCR5) PCR5 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 5. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PCR57 PCR56 PCR55 PCR54 PCR53 PCR52 PCR51 PCR50 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description When each of the port 5 pins P57 to P50 functions as a general I/O port, setting a PCR5 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. 9.4.3 Port Data Register 5 (PDR5) PDR5 is a general I/O port data register of port 5. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P57 P56 P55 P54 P53 P52 P51 P50 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Stores output data for port 5 pins. If PDR5 is read while PCR5 bits are set to 1, the value stored in PDR5 are read. If PDR5 is read while PCR5 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the value stored in PDR5. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 147 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.4.4 Port Pull-Up Control Register 5 (PUCR5) PUCR5 controls the pull-up MOS in bit units of the pins set as the input ports. Bit 7, 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PUCR55 PUCR54 PUCR53 PUCR52 PUCR51 PUCR50 Initial Value All 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Only bits for which PCR5 is cleared are valid. The pull-up MOS of the corresponding pins enter the on-state when these bits are set to 1, while they enter the off-state when these bits are cleared to 0. 9.4.5 Pin Functions The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below. P57/SCL pin Register Bit Name Setting Value ICCR1 ICE 0 PCR5 PCR57 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P57 input pin P57 output pin SCL I/O pin SCL performs the NMOS open-drain output, that enables a direct bus drive. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 148 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports P56/SDA pin Register Bit Name Setting Value ICCR1 ICE 0 PCR5 PCR56 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P56 input pin P56 output pin SDA I/O pin SDA performs the NMOS open-drain output that enables a direct bus drive. P55/WKP5/ADTRG pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PMR5 WKP5 0 PCR5 PCR55 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P55 input pin P55 output pin WKP5/ADTRG input pin P54/WKP4 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PMR5 WKP4 0 PCR5 PCR54 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P54 input pin P54 output pin WKP4 input pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 149 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports P53/WKP3 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PMR5 WKP3 0 PCR5 PCR53 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P53 input pin P53 output pin WKP3 input pin P52/WKP2 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PMR5 WKP2 0 PCR5 PCR52 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P52 input pin P52 output pin WKP2 input pin P51/WKP1 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PMR5 WKP1 0 PCR5 PCR51 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P51 input pin P51 output pin WKP1 input pin P50/WKP0 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PMR5 WKP0 0 PCR5 PCR50 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P50 input pin P50 output pin WKP0 input pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 150 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.5 Port 6 Port 6 is a general I/O port also functioning as a timer Z I/O pin. Each pin of the port 6 is shown in figure 9.5. The register setting of the timer Z has priority for functions of the pins for both uses. P67/FTIOD1 P66/FTIOC1 P65/FTIOB1 Port 6 P64/FTIOA1 P63/FTIOD0 P62/FTIOC0 P61/FTIOB0 P60/FTIOA0 Figure 9.5 Port 6 Pin Configuration Port 6 has the following registers. * Port control register 6 (PCR6) * Port data register 6 (PDR6) 9.5.1 Port Control Register 6 (PCR6) PCR6 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 6. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PCR67 PCR66 PCR65 PCR64 PCR63 PCR62 PCR61 PCR60 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description When each of the port 6 pins P67 to P60 functions as a general I/O port, setting a PCR6 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 151 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.5.2 Port Data Register 6 (PDR6) PDR6 is a general I/O port data register of port 6. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P67 P66 P65 P64 P63 P62 P61 P60 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Stores output data for port 6 pins. If PDR6 is read while PCR6 bits are set to 1, the value stored in PDR6 are read. If PDR6 is read while PCR6 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the value stored in PDR6. 9.5.3 Pin Functions The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below. P67/FTIOD1 pin Register Bit Name TOER ED1 TFCR TPMR TIORC1 PCR6 PCR67 0 1 x Pin Function P67 input/FTIOD1 input pin P67 output pin FTIOD1 output pin CMD1 and IOD2 to CMD0 PWMD1 IOD0 00 0 000 or 1xx 001 or 01x xxx xxx Setting Value 1 0 00 0 1 Other than x 00 [Legend] x: Don't care. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 152 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports P66/FTIOC1 pin Register Bit Name TOER EC1 TFCR TPMR TIORC1 PCR6 PCR66 0 1 x Pin Function P66 input/FTIOC1 input pin P66 output pin FTIOC1 output pin IOC2 to CMD1 and CMD0 PWMC1 IOC0 00 0 000 or 1xx 001 or 01x xxx xxx Setting Value 1 0 00 0 1 Other than x 00 [Legend] x: Don't care. P65/FTIOB1 pin Register Bit Name TOER EB1 TFCR CMD1 to CMD0 00 TPMR TIORA1 PCR6 PCR65 0 1 x Pin Function P65 input/FTIOB1 input pin P65 output pin FTIOB1 output pin IOB2 to PWMB1 IOB0 0 000 or 1xx 001 or 01x xxx xxx Setting Value 1 0 00 0 1 Other than x 00 [Legend] x: Don't care. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 153 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports P64/FTIOA1 pin Register Bit Name TOER EB1 TFCR CMD1 to CMD0 xx TIORA1 PCR6 IOA2 to IOA0 PCR64 000 or 1xx 001 or 01x 0 1 x Pin Function P64 input/FTIOA1 input pin P64 output pin FTIOA1 output pin Setting Value 1 0 [Legend] x: Don't care. 00 P63/FTIOD0 pin Register Bit Name TOER ED0 TFCR CMD1 to CMD0 00 TPMR TIORC0 PCR6 PCR63 0 1 x Pin Function P63 input/FTIOD0 input pin P63 output pin FTIOD0 output pin IOD2 to PWMD0 IOD0 0 000 or 1xx 001 or 01x xxx xxx Setting Value 1 0 00 0 1 Other than x 00 [Legend] x: Don't care. P62/FTIOC0 pin Register Bit Name TOER EC0 TFCR CMD1 to CMD0 00 TPMR TIORC0 PCR6 PCR62 0 1 x Pin Function P62 input/FTIOC0 input pin P62 output pin FTIOC0 output pin IOC2 to PWMC0 IOC0 0 000 or 1xx 001 or 01x xxx xxx Setting Value 1 0 00 0 1 Other than x 00 [Legend] x: Don't care. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 154 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports P61/FTIOB0 pin Register Bit Name TOER EB0 TFCR CMD1 to CMD0 00 TPMR TIORA0 PCR6 PCR61 0 1 x Pin Function P61 input/FTIOB0 input pin P61 output pin FTIOB0 output pin IOB2 to PWMB0 IOB0 0 000 or 1xx 001 or 01x xxx xxx Setting Value 1 0 00 0 1 Other than x 00 [Legend] x: Don't care. P60/FTIOA0 pin Register Bit Name TOER EA0 TFCR CMD1 to CMD0 xx TFCR STCLK x TIORA0 IOA2 to IOA0 000 or 1xx 001 or 01x PCR6 PCR60 0 1 x Pin Function P60 input/FTIOA0 input pin P60 output pin FTIOA0 output pin Setting Value 1 0 [Legend] x: Don't care. 00 0 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 155 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.6 Port 7 Port 7 is a general I/O port also functioning as a timer V I/O pin and SCI3_2 I/O pin. Each pin of the port 7 is shown in figure 9.6. The register settings of the timer V and SCI3_2 have priority for functions of the pins for both uses. P76/TMOV P75/TMCIV Port 7 P74/TMRIV P72/TXD_2 P71/RXD_2 P70/SCK3_2 Figure 9.6 Port 7 Pin Configuration Port 7 has the following registers. * Port control register 7 (PCR7) * Port data register 7 (PDR7) 9.6.1 Port Control Register 7 (PCR7) PCR7 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 7. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PCR76 PCR75 PCR74 PCR72 PCR71 PCR70 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W Description When each of the port 7 pins P76 to P74 and P72 to P70 functions as a general I/O port, setting a PCR7 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Bits 7 and 3 are reserved bits. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 156 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.6.2 Port Data Register 7 (PDR7) PDR7 is a general I/O port data register of port 7. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P76 P75 P74 P72 P71 P70 Initial Value 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Stores output data for port 7 pins. If PDR7 is read while PCR7 bits are set to 1, the value stored in PDR7 are read. If PDR7 is read while PCR7 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the value stored in PDR7. Bits 7 and 3 are reserved bits. These bits are always read as 1. 9.6.3 Pin Functions The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below. P76/TMOV pin Register Bit Name Setting Value TCSRV PCR7 Pin Function P76 input pin P76 output pin TMOV output pin OS3 to OS0 PCR76 0000 0 1 Other than the above values x [Legend] x: Don't care. P75/TMCIV pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR7 PCR75 0 1 Pin Function P75 input/TMCIV input pin P75 output/TMCIV input pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 157 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports P74/TMRIV pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR7 PCR74 0 1 Pin Function P74 input/TMRIV input pin P74 output/TMRIV input pin P72/TXD_2 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PMR1 TXD2 0 PCR7 PCR72 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P72 input pin P72 output pin TXD_2 output pin P71/RXD_2 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value SCR3_2 RE 0 PCR7 PCR71 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function P71 input pin P71 output pin RXD_2 input pin P70/SCK3_2 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value SCR3_2 CKE1 0 CKE0 0 SMR2 COM 0 PCR7 PCR70 Pin Function 0 1 0 0 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. 0 1 x 1 x x x x x P70 input pin P70 output pin SCK3_2 output pin SCK3_2 output pin SCK3_2 input pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 158 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.7 Port 8 Port 8 is a general I/O port. Each pin of the port 8 is shown in figure 9.7. P87 Port 8 P86 P85 Figure 9.7 Port 8 Pin Configuration Port 8 has the following registers. * Port control register 8 (PCR8) * Port data register 8 (PDR8) 9.7.1 Port Control Register 8 (PCR8) PCR8 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 8. Bit 7 6 5 4 to 0 Bit Name PCR87 PCR86 PCR85 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W W W W Description When each of the port 8 pins P87 to P85 functions as a general I/O port, setting a PCR8 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Reserved 9.7.2 Port Data Register 8 (PDR8) PDR8 is a general I/O port data register of port 8. Bit 7 6 5 Bit Name P87 P86 P85 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description PDR8 stores output data for port 8 pins. If PDR8 is read while PCR8 bits are set to 1, the value stored in PDR8 is read. If PDR8 is read while PCR8 bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the value stored in PDR8. Reserved These bits are always read as 1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 159 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 4 to 0 All 1 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.7.3 Pin Functions The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below. P87 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR8 PCR87 0 1 Pin Function P87 input pin P87 output pin P86 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR8 PCR86 0 1 Pin Function P86 input pin P86 output pin P85 pin Register Bit Name Setting Value PCR8 PCR85 0 1 Pin Function P85 input pin P85 output pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 160 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.8 Port B Port B is an input port also functioning as an A/D converter analog input pin. Each pin of the port B is shown in figure 9.8. PB7/AN7/ExtU PB6/AN6/ExtD PB5/AN5 Port B PB4/AN4 PB3/AN3 PB2/AN2 PB1/AN1 PB0/AN0 Figure 9.8 Port B Pin Configuration Port B has the following register. * Port data register B (PDRB) 9.8.1 Port Data Register B (PDRB) PDRB is a general input-only port data register of port B. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 Initial Value R/W R R R R R R R R Description The input value of each pin is read by reading this register. However, if a port B pin is designated as an analog input channel by ADCSR in the A/D converter or as an external comparison voltage input pin by LVDCR in the lowvoltage detection circuit, the corresponding bit is read as 0. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 161 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.8.2 Pin Functions The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below. PB0/AN0 pin Register Bit Name SCAN CH2 0 ADCSR CH1 0 x CH0 0 x PB0 output pin Pin Function AN0 input pin Setting Value 0 1 Other than above [Legend] x: Don't care. PB1/AN1 pin Register Bit Name SCAN CH2 0 ADCSR CH1 0 0 1 Other than above [Legend] x: Don't care. CH0 1 1 x PB1 output pin Pin Function AN1 input pin Setting Value 0 1 PB2/AN2 pin Register Bit Name SCAN CH2 0 ADCSR CH1 1 1 CH0 0 x PB2 output pin Pin Function AN2 input pin Setting Value 0 1 Other than above [Legend] x: Don't care. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 162 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports PB3/AN3 pin Register Bit Name SCAN CH2 0 ADCSR CH1 1 CH0 1 Pin Function AN3 input pin Setting Value 0 1 Other than above PB3 output pin PB4/AN4 pin Register Bit Name SCAN CH2 1 ADCSR CH1 0 x CH0 0 x PB4 output pin Pin Function AN4 input pin Setting Value 0 1 Other than above [Legend] x: Don't care. PB5/AN5 pin Register Bit Name SCAN CH2 1 ADCSR CH1 0 0 1 Other than above [Legend] x: Don't care. CH0 1 1 x PB5 output pin Pin Function AN5 input pin Setting Value 0 1 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 163 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports PB6/AN6/ExtD pin Register Bit Name SCAN CH2 ADCSR CH1 1 CH0 0 x 0 x 0 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. PB6 input/ExtD input pin PB6 input pin 1 LVDCR VDDII 0 Pin Function AN6 input/ExtD input pin AN6 input pin Setting Value 0 1 0 1 Other than above PB7/AN7/ExtU pin Register Bit Name SCAN CH2 ADCSR CH1 1 CH0 LVDCR VDDII 0 Pin Function AN7 input/ExtU input pin AN7 input pin Setting Value 0 1 0 1 Other than above 1 0 1 PB7 input/ExtU input pin PB7 input pin [Legend] x: Don't care. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 164 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.9 Port C Port C is a general I/O port also functioning as an external oscillation pin and clock output pin. Each pin of the port C is shown in figure 9.9. The register setting of CKCSR has priority for functions of the pins for both uses. Port C PC1/OSC2/CLKOUT PC0/OSC1 Figure 9.9 Port C Pin Configuration Port C has the following registers. * * Port control register C (PCRC) Port data register C (PDRC) Port Control Register C (PCRC) 9.9.1 PCRC selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port C. Bit 7 to 2 1 0 Bit Name PCRC1 PCRC0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W W W Description Reserved When each of the port C pins, PC1 and PC0, functions as an general I/O port, setting a PCRC bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 165 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 9 I/O Ports 9.9.2 Port Data Register C (PDRC) PDRC is a general I/O port data register of port C. Bit 7 to 2 1 0 Bit Name PC1 PC0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits store output data for port C pins. If PDRC is read while PCRC bits are set to 1, the value stored in PDRC is read. If PDRC is read while PCRC bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the value stored in PDRC. 9.9.3 Pin Functions The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below. PC1/OSC2/CLKOUT pin Register Bit Name Setting value PMRC1 0 CKCSR PMRC0 0 PCRC PCRC1 0 1 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. 0 1 x x x Pin Function PC1 input pin PC1 output pin Open CLKOUT output pin OSC2 oscillation pin PC0/OSC1 pin Register Bit Name CKCSR PMRC0 PCRC PCRC0 0 1 1 [Legend] x: Don't care. x Pin Function PC0 input pin PC0 output pin OSC1 oscillation pin Setting value 0 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 166 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) The realtime clock (RTC) is a timer used to count time ranging from a second to a week. Figure 10.1 shows the block diagram of the RTC. 10.1 Features * Counts seconds, minutes, hours, and day-of-week * Start/stop function * Reset function * Readable/writable counter of seconds, minutes, hours, and day-of-week with BCD codes * Periodic (seconds, minutes, hours, days, and weeks) interrupts * 8-bit free running counter * Selection of clock source PSS 32-kHz oscillator circuit RTCCSR 1/4 RSECDR RHRDR TMOW Clock count control circuit RWKDR RTCCR1 RTCCR2 Interrupt [Legend] control circuit RTCCSR: Clock source select register RSECDR: Second date register/free running counter data register RMINDR: Minute date register RHRDR: Hour date register RWKDR: Day-of-week date register RTCCR1: RTC control register 1 RTCCR2: RTC control register 2 Prescaler S PSS: Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of RTC RTC3000A_000020030300 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 167 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Internal data bus Interrupt RMINDR Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) 10.2 Input/Output Pin Table 10.1 shows the RTC input/output pin. Table 10.1 Pin Configuration Name Clock output Abbreviation TMOW I/O Output Function RTC divided clock output Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 168 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) 10.3 Register Descriptions The RTC has the following registers. * Second data register/free running counter data register (RSECDR) * Minute data register (RMINDR) * Hour data register (RHRDR) * Day-of-week data register (RWKDR) * RTC control register 1 (RTCCR1) * RTC control register 2 (RTCCR2) * Clock source select register (RTCCSR) 10.3.1 Second Data Register/Free Running Counter Data Register (RSECDR) RSECDR counts the BCD-coded second value. The setting range is decimal 00 to 59. It is an 8-bit read register used as a counter, when it operates as a free running counter. For more information on reading seconds, minutes, hours, and day-of-week, see section 10.4.3, Data Reading Procedure. Bit 7 Bit Name BSY Initial Value -- R/W R Description RTC Busy This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating) the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SC12 SC11 SC10 SC03 SC02 SC01 SC00 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Counting One's Position of Seconds Counts on 0 to 9 once per second. When a carry is generated, 1 is added to the ten's position. Counting Ten's Position of Seconds Counts on 0 to 5 for 60-second counting. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 169 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) 10.3.2 Minute Data Register (RMINDR) RMINDR counts the BCD-coded minute value on the carry generated once per minute by the RSECDR counting. The setting range is decimal 00 to 59. Bit 7 Bit Name BSY Initial Value -- R/W R Description RTC Busy This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating) the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MN12 MN11 MN10 MN03 MN02 MN01 MN00 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Counting One's Position of Minutes Counts on 0 to 9 once per minute. When a carry is generated, 1 is added to the ten's position. Counting Ten's Position of Minutes Counts on 0 to 5 for 60-minute counting. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 170 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) 10.3.3 Hour Data Register (RHRDR) RHRDR counts the BCD-coded hour value on the carry generated once per hour by RMINDR. The setting range is either decimal 00 to 11 or 00 to 23 by the selection of the 12/24 bit in RTCCR1. Bit 7 Bit Name BSY Initial Value -- R/W R Description RTC Busy This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating) the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- HR11 HR10 HR03 HR02 HR01 HR00 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 0. Counting Ten's Position of Hours Counts on 0 to 2 for ten's position of hours. Counting One's Position of Hours Counts on 0 to 9 once per hour. When a carry is generated, 1 is added to the ten's position. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 171 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) 10.3.4 Day-of-Week Data Register (RWKDR) RWKDR counts the BCD-coded day-of-week value on the carry generated once per day by RHRDR. The setting range is decimal 0 to 6 using bits WK2 to WK0. Bit 7 Bit Name BSY Initial Value -- R/W R Description RTC Busy This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating) the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted. 6 to 3 2 1 0 -- WK2 WK1 WK0 All 0 -- -- -- -- R/W R/W R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Day-of-Week Counting Day-of-week is indicated with a binary code 000: Sunday 001: Monday 010: Tuesday 011: Wednesday 100: Thursday 101: Friday 110: Saturday 111: Reserved (setting prohibited) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 172 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) 10.3.5 RTC Control Register 1 (RTCCR1) RTCCR1 controls start/stop and reset of the clock timer. For the definition of time expression, see figure 10.2. Bit 7 Bit Name RUN Initial Value -- R/W R/W Description RTC Operation Start 0: Stops RTC operation 1: Starts RTC operation Operating Mode 0: RTC operates in 12-hour mode. RHRDR counts on 0 to 11. 1: RTC operates in 24-hour mode. RHRDR counts on 0 to 23. a.m./p.m. 0: Indicates a.m. when RTC is in the 12-hour mode. 1: Indicates p.m. when RTC is in the 12-hour mode. Reset 0: Normal operation 1: Resets registers and control circuits except RTCCSR and this bit. Clear this bit to 0 after having been set to 1. Interrupt Generation Timing 0: Generates a second, minute, hour, or day-of-week periodic interrupt during RTC busy period. 1: Generates a second, minute, hour, or day-of-week periodic interrupt immediately after completing RTC busy period. Reserved These bits are always read as 0. 6 12/24 -- R/W 5 PM -- R/W 4 RST 0 R/W 3 INT -- R/W 2 to 0 -- All 0 -- Noon 24-hour count 0 12-hour count 0 PM 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 567 567 0 (Morning) 8 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 9 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 (Afternoon) 24-hour count 18 19 20 21 22 23 0 12-hour count 6 7 8 9 10 11 0 1 (Afternoon) 0 PM Figure 10.2 Definition of Time Expression Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 173 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) 10.3.6 RTC Control Register 2 (RTCCR2) RTCCR2 controls RTC periodic interrupts of weeks, days, hours, minutes, and seconds. Enabling interrupts of weeks, days, hours, minutes, and seconds sets the IRRTA flag to 1 in the interrupt flag register 1 (IRR1) when an interrupt occurs. It also controls an overflow interrupt of a free running counter when RTC operates as a free running counter. Bit 7, 6 5 Bit Name -- FOIE Initial Value All 0 -- R/W -- R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. Free Running Counter Overflow Interrupt Enable 0: Disables an overflow interrupt 1: Enables an overflow interrupt 4 WKIE -- R/W Week Periodic Interrupt Enable 0: Disables a week periodic interrupt 1: Enables a week periodic interrupt 3 DYIE -- R/W Day Periodic Interrupt Enable 0: Disables a day periodic interrupt 1: Enables a day periodic interrupt 2 HRIE -- R/W Hour Periodic Interrupt Enable 0: Disables an hour periodic interrupt 1: Enables an hour periodic interrupt 1 MNIE -- R/W Minute Periodic Interrupt Enable 0: Disables a minute periodic interrupt 1: Enables a minute periodic interrupt 0 SEIE -- R/W Second Periodic Interrupt Enable 0: Disables a second periodic interrupt 1: Enables a second periodic interrupt Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 174 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) 10.3.7 Clock Source Select Register (RTCCSR) RTCCSR selects clock source. A free running counter controls start/stop of counter operation by the RUN bit in RTCCR1. When a clock other than 32.768 kHz is selected, the RTC is disabled and operates as an 8-bit free running counter. When the RTC operates as an 8-bit free running counter, RSECDR enables counter values to be read. An interrupt can be generated by setting 1 to the FOIE bit in RTCCR2 and enabling an overflow interrupt of the free running counter. A clock in which the system clock is divided by 32, 16, 8, or 4 is output in active or sleep mode. Bit 7 6 5 Bit Name -- RCS6 RCS5 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W -- R/W R/W Description Reserved This bit is always read as 0. Clock Output Selection Selects a clock output from the TMOW pin when setting TMOW in PMR1 to 1. 00: /4 01: /8 10: /16 11: /32 4 3 2 1 0 -- RCS3 RCS2 RCS1 RCS0 0 1 0 0 0 -- R/W R/W R/W R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 0. Clock Source Selection 0000: /8 Free running counter operation 0001: /32 Free running counter operation 0010: /128 Free running counter operation 0011: /256 Free running counter operation 0100: /512 Free running counter operation 0101: /2048 Free running counter operation 0110: /4096 Free running counter operation 0111: /8192 Free running counter operation 1XXX: 32.768 kHzRTC operation [Legend] X: Don't care. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 175 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) 10.4 10.4.1 Operation Initial Settings of Registers after Power-On The RTC registers that store second, minute, hour, and day-of week data are not reset by a RES input. Therefore, all registers must be set to their initial values after power-on. Once the register setting are made, the RTC provides an accurate time as long as power is supplied regardless of a RES input. 10.4.2 Initial Setting Procedure Figure 10.3 shows the procedure for the initial setting of the RTC. To set the RTC again, also follow this procedure. RUN in RTCCR1=0 RST in RTCCR1=1 RST in RTCCR1=0 Set RTCCSR, RSECDR, RMINDR,RHRDR, RWKDR,12/24 in RTCCR1, and PM RUN in RTCCR1=1 RTC operation is stopped. RTC registers and clock count controller are reset. Clock output and clock source are selected and second, minute, hour, day-of-week,operating mode, and a.m/p.m are set. RTC operation is started. Figure 10.3 Initial Setting Procedure Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 176 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) 10.4.3 Data Reading Procedure When the seconds, minutes, hours, or day-of-week datum is updated while time data is being read, the data obtained may not be correct, and so the time data must be read again. Figure 10.4 shows an example in which correct data is not obtained. In this example, since only RSECDR is read after data update, about 1-minute inconsistency occurs. To avoid reading in this timing, the following processing must be performed. 1. Check the setting of the BSY bit, and when the BSY bit changes from 1 to 0, read from the second, minute, hour, and day-of-week registers. When about 62.5 ms is passed after the BSY bit is set to 1, the registers are updated, and the BSY bit is cleared to 0. 2. Making use of interrupts, read from the second, minute, hour, and day-of week registers after the IRRTA flag in IRR1 is set to 1 and the BSY bit is confirmed to be 0. 3. Read from the second, minute, hour, and day-of week registers twice in a row, and if there is no change in the read data, the read data is used. Before update BSY bit = 0 RWKDR = H'03, RHDDR = H'13, RMINDR = H'46, RSECDR = H'59 Processing flow (1) Day-of-week data register read (2) Hour data register read (3) Minute data register read H'03 H'13 H'46 BSY bit -> 1 (under data update) After update BSY bit -> 0 RWKDR = H'03, RHDDR = H'13, RMINDR = H'47, RSECDR = H'00 (4) Second data register read H'00 Figure 10.4 Example: Reading of Inaccurate Time Data Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 177 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC) 10.5 Interrupt Sources There are five kinds of RTC interrupts: week interrupts, day interrupts, hour interrupts, minute interrupts, and second interrupts. When using an interrupt, initiate the RTC last after other registers are set. Do not set multiple interrupt enable bits in RTCCR2 simultaneously to 1. When an interrupt request of the RTC occurs, the IRRTA flag in IRR1 is set to 1. When clearing the flag, write 0. Table 10.2 Interrupt Sources Interrupt Name Overflow interrupt Week periodic interrupt Day periodic interrupt Hour periodic interrupt Minute periodic interrupt Second periodic interrupt Interrupt Source Occurs when the free running counter is overflowed. Occurs every week when the day-of-week date register value becomes 0. Interrupt Enable Bit FOIE WKIE Occurs every day when the day-of-week date DYIE register is counted. Occurs every hour when the hour date register is counted. Occurs every minute when the minute date register is counted. Occurs every second when the second date register is counted. HRIE MNIE SCIE Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 178 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 11 Timer B1 Section 11 Timer B1 Timer B1 is an 8-bit timer that increments each time a clock pulse is input. This timer has two operating modes, interval and auto reload. Figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of timer B1. 11.1 Features * Selection of seven internal clock sources (/8192, /2048, /512, /256, /64, /16, and /4) or an external clock (can be used to count external events). * An interrupt is generated when the counter overflows. TMB1 PSS TCB1 TMIB1 TLB1 [Legend] TMB1: TCB1: TLB1: IRRTB1: PSS: TMIB1: Timer mode register B1 Timer counter B1 Timer load register B1 Timer B1 interrupt request flag Prescaler S Timer B1 event input IRRTB1 Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of Timer B1 TIM08B0A_000020020200 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 179 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Internal data bus Section 11 Timer B1 11.2 Input/Output Pin Table 11.1 shows the timer B1 pin configuration. Table 11.1 Pin Configuration Name Timer B1 event input Abbreviation TMIB1 I/O Input Function Event input to TCB1 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 180 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 11 Timer B1 11.3 Register Descriptions The timer B1 has the following registers. * Timer mode register B1 (TMB1) * Timer counter B1 (TCB1) * Timer load register B1 (TLB1) 11.3.1 Timer Mode Register B1 (TMB1) TMB1 selects the auto-reload function and input clock. Bit 7 Bit Name TMB17 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Auto-reload function select 0: Interval timer function selected 1: Auto-reload function selected 6 to 3 2 1 0 TMB12 TMB11 TMB10 All 1 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 1. Clock select 000: Internal clock: /8192 001: Internal clock: /2048 010: Internal clock: /512 011: Internal clock: /256 100: Internal clock: /64 101: Internal clock: /16 110: Internal clock: /4 111: External event (TMIB1): rising or falling edge* Note: * The edge of the external event signal is selected by bit IEG1 in the interrupt edge select register 1 (IEGR1). See section 3.2.1, Interrupt Edge Select Register 1 (IEGR1), for details. Before setting TMB12 to TMB10 to 1, IRQ1 in the port mode register 1 (PMR1) should be set to 1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 181 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 11 Timer B1 11.3.2 Timer Counter B1 (TCB1) TCB1 is an 8-bit read-only up-counter, which is incremented by internal clock input. The clock source for input to this counter is selected by bits TMB12 to TMB10 in TMB1. TCB1 values can be read by the CPU at any time. When TCB1 overflows from H'FF to H'00 or to the value set in TLB1, the IRRTB1 flag in IRR2 is set to 1. TCB1 is allocated to the same address as TLB1. TCB1 is initialized to H'00. 11.3.3 Timer Load Register B1 (TLB1) TLB1 is an 8-bit write-only register for setting the reload value of TCB1. When a reload value is set in TLB1, the same value is loaded into TCB1 as well, and TCB1 starts counting up from that value. When TCB1 overflows during operation in auto-reload mode, the TLB1 value is loaded into TCB1. Accordingly, overflow periods can be set within the range of 1 to 256 input clocks. TLB1 is allocated to the same address as TCB1. TLB1 is initialized to H'00. 11.4 11.4.1 Operation Interval Timer Operation When bit TMB17 in TMB1 is cleared to 0, timer B1 functions as an 8-bit interval timer. Upon reset, TCB1 is cleared to H'00 and bit TMB17 is cleared to 0, so up-counting and interval timing resume immediately. The operating clock of timer B1 is selected from seven internal clock signals output by prescaler S, or an external clock input at pin TMB1. The selection is made by bits TMB12 to TMB10 in TMB1. After the count value in TMB1 reaches H'FF, the next clock signal input causes timer B1 to overflow, setting flag IRRTB1 in IRR2 to 1. If IENTB1 in IENR2 is 1, an interrupt is requested to the CPU. At overflow, TCB1 returns to H'00 and starts counting up again. During interval timer operation (TMB17 = 0), when a value is set in TLB1, the same value is set in TCB1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 182 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 11 Timer B1 11.4.2 Auto-Reload Timer Operation Setting bit TMB17 in TMB1 to 1 causes timer B1 to function as an 8-bit auto-reload timer. When a reload value is set in TLB1, the same value is loaded into TCB1, becoming the value from which TCB1 starts its count. After the count value in TCB1 reaches H'FF, the next clock signal input causes timer B1 to overflow. The TLB1 value is then loaded into TCB1, and the count continues from that value. The overflow period can be set within a range from 1 to 256 input clocks, depending on the TLB1 value. The clock sources and interrupts in auto-reload mode are the same as in interval mode. In autoreload mode (TMB17 = 1), when a new value is set in TLB1, the TLB1 value is also loaded into TCB1. 11.4.3 Event Counter Operation Timer B1 can operate as an event counter in which TMIB1 is set to an event input pin. External event counting is selected by setting bits TMB12 to TMB10 in TMB1 to 1. TCB1 counts up at rising or falling edge of an external event signal input at pin TMB1. When timer B1 is used to count external event input, bit IRQ1 in PMR1 should be set to 1 and IEN1 in IENR1 should be cleared to 0 to disable IRQ1 interrupt requests. 11.5 Timer B1 Operating Modes Table 11.2 shows the timer B1 operating modes. Table 11.2 Timer B1 Operating Modes Operating Mode TCB1 Interval Reset Reset Active Functions Functions Functions Sleep Functions Functions Retained Subactive Halted Halted Retained Subsleep Halted Halted Retained Standby Halted Halted Retained Auto-reload Reset TMB1 Reset Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 183 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 11 Timer B1 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 184 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V Section 12 Timer V Timer V is an 8-bit timer based on an 8-bit counter. Timer V counts external events. Comparematch signals with two registers can also be used to reset the counter, request an interrupt, or output a pulse signal with an arbitrary duty cycle. Counting can be initiated by a trigger input at the TRGV pin, enabling pulse output control to be synchronized to the trigger, with an arbitrary delay from the trigger input. Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of timer V. 12.1 Features * Choice of seven clock signals is available. Choice of six internal clock sources (/128, /64, /32, /16, /8, /4) or an external clock. * Counter can be cleared by compare match A or B, or by an external reset signal. If the count stop function is selected, the counter can be halted when cleared. * Timer output is controlled by two independent compare match signals, enabling pulse output with an arbitrary duty cycle, PWM output, and other applications. * Three interrupt sources: compare match A, compare match B, timer overflow * Counting can be initiated by trigger input at the TRGV pin. The rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of the TRGV input can be selected. TIM08V0A_000120030300 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 185 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V TCRV1 TCORB TRGV Trigger control Comparator Comparator PSS TCORA Clear control TMRIV TCRV0 Interrupt request control TMOV Output control TCSRV CMIA CMIB OVI [Legend] TCORA: TCORB: TCNTV: TCSRV: TCRV0: TCRV1: PSS: CMIA: CMIB: OVI: Time constant register A Time constant register B Timer counter V Timer control/status register V Timer control register V0 Timer control register V1 Prescaler S Compare-match interrupt A Compare-match interrupt B Overflow interupt Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of Timer V Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 186 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Internal data bus TMCIV Clock select TCNTV Section 12 Timer V 12.2 Input/Output Pins Table 12.1 shows the timer V pin configuration. Table 12.1 Pin Configuration Name Timer V output Timer V clock input Timer V reset input Trigger input Abbreviation I/O TMOV TMCIV TMRIV TRGV Output Input Input Input Function Timer V waveform output Clock input to TCNTV External input to reset TCNTV Trigger input to initiate counting 12.3 Register Descriptions Time V has the following registers. * Timer counter V (TCNTV) * Timer constant register A (TCORA) * Timer constant register B (TCORB) * Timer control register V0 (TCRV0) * Timer control/status register V (TCSRV) * Timer control register V1 (TCRV1) 12.3.1 Timer Counter V (TCNTV) TCNTV is an 8-bit up-counter. The clock source is selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in timer control register V0 (TCRV0). The TCNTV value can be read and written by the CPU at any time. TCNTV can be cleared by an external reset input signal, or by compare match A or B. The clearing signal is selected by bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCRV0. When TCNTV overflows, OVF is set to 1 in timer control/status register V (TCSRV). TCNTV is initialized to H'00. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 187 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V 12.3.2 Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA, TCORB) TCORA and TCORB have the same function. TCORA and TCORB are 8-bit read/write registers. TCORA and TCNTV are compared at all times. When the TCORA and TCNTV contents match, CMFA is set to 1 in TCSRV. If CMIEA is also set to 1 in TCRV0, a CPU interrupt is requested. Note that they must not be compared during the T3 state of a TCORA write cycle. Timer output from the TMOV pin can be controlled by the identifying signal (compare match A) and the settings of bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV. TCORA and TCORB are initialized to H'FF. 12.3.3 Timer Control Register V0 (TCRV0) TCRV0 selects the input clock signals of TCNTV, specifies the clearing conditions of TCNTV, and controls each interrupt request. Bit 7 Bit Name CMIEB Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Compare Match Interrupt Enable B When this bit is set to 1, interrupt request from the CMFB bit in TCSRV is enabled. 6 CMIEA 0 R/W Compare Match Interrupt Enable A When this bit is set to 1, interrupt request from the CMFA bit in TCSRV is enabled. 5 OVIE 0 R/W Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, interrupt request from the OVF bit in TCSRV is enabled. 4 3 CCLR1 CCLR0 0 0 R/W R/W Counter Clear 1 and 0 These bits specify the clearing conditions of TCNTV. 00: Clearing is disabled 01: Cleared by compare match A 10: Cleared by compare match B 11: Cleared on the rising edge of the TMRIV pin. The operation of TCNTV after clearing depends on TRGE in TCRV1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 188 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Clock Select 2 to 0 These bits select clock signals to input to TCNTV and the counting condition in combination with ICKS0 in TCRV1. Refer to table 12.2. Table 12.2 Clock Signals to Input to TCNTV and Counting Conditions TCRV0 Bit 2 CKS2 0 Bit 1 CKS1 0 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 TCRV1 Bit 0 ICKS0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Clock input prohibited Internal clock: counts on /4, falling edge Internal clock: counts on /8, falling edge Internal clock: counts on /16, falling edge Internal clock: counts on /32, falling edge Internal clock: counts on /64, falling edge Internal clock: counts on /128, falling edge Clock input prohibited External clock: counts on rising edge External clock: counts on falling edge External clock: counts on rising and falling edge 12.3.4 Timer Control/Status Register V (TCSRV) TCSRV indicates the status flag and controls outputs by using a compare match. Bit 7 Bit Name CMFB Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Compare Match Flag B Setting condition: When the TCNTV value matches the TCORB value Clearing condition: After reading CMFB = 1, cleared by writing 0 to CMFB Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 189 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V Bit 6 Bit Name CMFA Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Compare Match Flag A Setting condition: When the TCNTV value matches the TCORA value Clearing condition: After reading CMFA = 1, cleared by writing 0 to CMFA 5 OVF 0 R/W Timer Overflow Flag Setting condition: When TCNTV overflows from H'FF to H'00 Clearing condition: After reading OVF = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OVF 4 3 2 OS3 OS2 1 0 0 R/W R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 1. Output Select 3 and 2 These bits select an output method for the TMOV pin by the compare match of TCORB and TCNTV. 00: No change 01: 0 output 10: 1 output 11: Output toggles 1 0 OS1 OS0 0 0 R/W R/W Output Select 1 and 0 These bits select an output method for the TMOV pin by the compare match of TCORA and TCNTV. 00: No change 01: 0 output 10: 1 output 11: Output toggles OS3 and OS2 select the output level for compare match B. OS1 and OS0 select the output level for compare match A. The two output levels can be controlled independently. After a reset, the timer output is 0 until the first compare match. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 190 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V 12.3.5 Timer Control Register V1 (TCRV1) TCRV1 selects the edge at the TRGV pin, enables TRGV input, and selects the clock input to TCNTV. Bit 7 to 5 4 3 Bit Name TVEG1 TVEG0 Initial Value All 1 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. TRGV Input Edge Select These bits select the TRGV input edge. 00: TRGV trigger input is prohibited 01: Rising edge is selected 10: Falling edge is selected 11: Rising and falling edges are both selected 2 TRGE 0 R/W TCNT starts counting up by the input of the edge which is selected by TVEG1 and TVEG0. 0: Disables starting counting-up TCNTV by the input of the TRGV pin and halting counting-up TCNTV when TCNTV is cleared by a compare match. 1: Enables starting counting-up TCNTV by the input of the TRGV pin and halting counting-up TCNTV when TCNTV is cleared by a compare match. 1 0 ICKS0 1 0 R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 1. Internal Clock Select 0 This bit selects clock signals to input to TCNTV in combination with CKS2 to CKS0 in TCRV0. Refer to table 12.2. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 191 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V 12.4 12.4.1 Operation Timer V Operation 1. According to table 12.2, six internal/external clock signals output by prescaler S can be selected as the timer V operating clock signals. When the operating clock signal is selected, TCNTV starts counting-up. Figure 12.2 shows the count timing with an internal clock signal selected, and figure 12.3 shows the count timing with both edges of an external clock signal selected. 2. When TCNTV overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), the overflow flag (OVF) in TCRV0 will be set. The timing at this time is shown in figure 12.4. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU when OVIE in TCRV0 is 1. 3. TCNTV is constantly compared with TCORA and TCORB. Compare match flag A or B (CMFA or CMFB) is set to 1 when TCNTV matches TCORA or TCORB, respectively. The compare-match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match. Figure 12.5 shows the timing. An interrupt request is generated for the CPU when CMIEA or CMIEB in TCRV0 is 1. 4. When a compare match A or B is generated, the TMOV responds with the output value selected by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV. Figure 12.6 shows the timing when the output is toggled by compare match A. 5. When CCLR1 or CCLR0 in TCRV0 is 01 or 10, TCNTV can be cleared by the corresponding compare match. Figure 12.7 shows the timing. 6. When CCLR1 or CCLR0 in TCRV0 is 11, TCNTV can be cleared by the rising edge of the input of TMRIV pin. A TMRIV input pulse-width of at least 1.5 system clocks is necessary. Figure 12.8 shows the timing. 7. When a counter-clearing source is generated with TRGE in TCRV1 set to 1, the counting-up is halted as soon as TCNTV is cleared. TCNTV resumes counting-up when the edge selected by TVEG1 or TVEG0 in TCRV1 is input from the TGRV pin. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 192 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V Internal clock TCNTV input clock TCNTV N-1 N N+1 Figure 12.2 Increment Timing with Internal Clock TMCIV (External clock input pin) TCNTV input clock TCNTV N-1 N N+1 Figure 12.3 Increment Timing with External Clock TCNTV H'FF H'00 Overflow signal OVF Figure 12.4 OVF Set Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 193 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V TCNTV N N+1 TCORA or TCORB Compare match signal CMFA or CMFB N Figure 12.5 CMFA and CMFB Set Timing Compare match A signal Timer V output pin Figure 12.6 TMOV Output Timing Compare match A signal TCNTV N H'00 Figure 12.7 Clear Timing by Compare Match Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 194 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V TMRIV (External counter reset input pin) TCNTV reset signal TCNTV N-1 N H'00 Figure 12.8 Clear Timing by TMRIV Input 12.5 12.5.1 Timer V Application Examples Pulse Output with Arbitrary Duty Cycle Figure 12.9 shows an example of output of pulses with an arbitrary duty cycle. 1. Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCRV0 so that TCNTV will be cleared by compare match with TCORA. 2. Set bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV so that the output will go to 1 at compare match with TCORA and to 0 at compare match with TCORB. 3. Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCRV0 and bit ICKS0 in TCRV1 to select the desired clock source. 4. With these settings, a waveform is output without further software intervention, with a period determined by TCORA and a pulse width determined by TCORB. TCNTV value H'FF Counter cleared TCORA TCORB H'00 TMOV Time Figure 12.9 Pulse Output Example Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 195 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V 12.5.2 Pulse Output with Arbitrary Pulse Width and Delay from TRGV Input The trigger function can be used to output a pulse with an arbitrary pulse width at an arbitrary delay from the TRGV input, as shown in figure 12.10. To set up this output: 1. Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCRV0 so that TCNTV will be cleared by compare match with TCORB. 2. Set bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV so that the output will go to 1 at compare match with TCORA and to 0 at compare match with TCORB. 3. Set bits TVEG1 and TVEG0 in TCRV1 and set TRGE to select the falling edge of the TRGV input. 4. Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCRV0 and bit ICKS0 in TCRV1 to select the desired clock source. 5. After these settings, a pulse waveform will be output without further software intervention, with a delay determined by TCORA from the TRGV input, and a pulse width determined by (TCORB - TCORA). TCNTV value H'FF Counter cleared TCORB TCORA H'00 TRGV Time TMOV Compare match A Compare match A Compare match B clears TCNTV and halts count-up Compare match B clears TCNTV and halts count-up Figure 12.10 Example of Pulse Output Synchronized to TRGV Input Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 196 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V 12.6 Usage Notes The following types of contention or operation can occur in timer V operation. 1. Writing to registers is performed in the T3 state of a TCNTV write cycle. If a TCNTV clear signal is generated in the T3 state of a TCNTV write cycle, as shown in figure 12.11, clearing takes precedence and the write to the counter is not carried out. If counting-up is generated in the T3 state of a TCNTV write cycle, writing takes precedence. 2. If a compare match is generated in the T3 state of a TCORA or TCORB write cycle, the write to TCORA or TCORB takes precedence and the compare match signal is inhibited. Figure 12.12 shows the timing. 3. If compare matches A and B occur simultaneously, any conflict between the output selections for compare match A and compare match B is resolved by the following priority: toggle output > output 1 > output 0. 4. Depending on the timing, TCNTV may be incremented by a switch between different internal clock sources. When TCNTV is internally clocked, an increment pulse is generated from the falling edge of an internal clock signal, that is divided system clock (). Therefore, as shown in figure 12.3 the switch is from a high clock signal to a low clock signal, the switchover is seen as a falling edge, causing TCNTV to increment. TCNTV can also be incremented by a switch between internal and external clocks. TCNTV write cycle by CPU T1 T2 T3 Address TCNTV address Internal write signal Counter clear signal TCNTV N H'00 Figure 12.11 Contention between TCNTV Write and Clear Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 197 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 12 Timer V TCORA write cycle by CPU T1 T2 T3 Address TCORA address Internal write signal TCNTV N N+1 TCORA N M TCORA write data Compare match signal Inhibited Figure 12.12 Contention between TCORA Write and Compare Match Clock before switching Clock after switching Count clock TCNTV N N+1 N+2 Write to CKS1 and CKS0 Figure 12.13 Internal Clock Switching and TCNTV Operation Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 198 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Section 13 Timer Z The timer Z has a 16-bit timer with two channels. Figures 13.1, 13.2, and 13.3 show the block diagrams of entire timer Z, its channel 0, and its channel 1, respectively. For details on the timer Z functions, refer to table 13.1. 13.1 Features * Capability to process up to eight inputs/outputs * Eight general registers (GR): four registers for each channel Independently assignable output compare or input capture functions * Selection of five counter clock sources: four internal clocks (, /2, /4, and /8) and an external clock * Seven selectable operating modes Output compare function Selection of 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output Input capture function Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges Synchronous operation Timer counters_0 and _1 (TCNT_0 and TCNT_1) can be written simultaneously. Simultaneous clearing by compare match or input capture is possible. PWM mode Up to six-phase PWM output can be provided with desired duty ratio. Reset synchronous PWM mode Three-phase PWM output for normal and counter phases Complementary PWM mode Three-phase PWM output for non-overlapped normal and counter phases The A/D conversion start trigger can be set for PWM cycles. Buffer operation The input capture register can be consisted of double buffers. The output compare register can automatically be modified. * High-speed access by the internal 16-bit bus 16-bit TCNT and GR registers can be accessed in high speed by a 16-bit bus interface * Any initial timer output value can be set * Output of the timer is disabled by external trigger Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 199 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 TIM08Z0A_000120030300 Section 13 Timer Z * Eleven interrupt sources Four compare match/input capture interrupts and an overflow interrupt are available for each channel. An underflow interrupt can be set for channel 1. Table 13.1 Timer Z Functions Item Count clock General registers (output compare/input capture registers) Buffer register I/O pins Counter clearing function Channel 0 Internal clocks: , /2, /4, /8 External clock: FTIOA0 (TCLK) GRA_0, GRB_0, GRC_0, GRD_0 GRA_1, GRB_1, GRC_1, GRD_1 Channel 1 GRC_0, GRD_0 FTIOA0, FTIOB0, FTIOC0, FTIOD0 Compare match/input capture of GRA_0, GRB_0, GRC_0, or GRD_0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Compare match/input capture A0 to D0 Overflow GRC_1, GRD_1 FTIOA1, FTIOB1, FTIOC1, FTIOD1 Compare match/input capture of GRA_1, GRB_1, GRC_1, or GRD_1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Compare match/input capture A1 to D1 Overflow Underflow Compare match output 0 output 1 output output Input capture function Synchronous operation PWM mode Reset synchronous PWM mode Complementary PWM mode Buffer function Interrupt sources Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 200 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z ITMZ0 FTIOA0 FTIOB0 FTIOC0 FTIOD0 FTIOA1 FTIOB1 FTIOC1 FTIOD1 ITMZ1 Control logic , /2, /4, /8 ADTRG TSTR TMDR TFCR TOCR Channel 0 timer Channel 1 timer TPMR TOER Module data bus [Legend] TSTR: TMDR: TPMR: TFCR: TOER: TOCR: Timer start register (8 bits) Timer mode register (8 bits) Timer PWM mode register (8 bits) Timer function control register (8 bits) Timer output master enable register (8 bits) Timer output control register (8 bits) ADTRG: A/D conversion start trigger output signal ITMZ0: ITMZ1: Channel 0 interrupt Channel 1 interrupt Figure 13.1 Timer Z Block Diagram Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 201 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z FTIOA0 FTIOB0 , /2, /4, /8 Clock select Control logic Comparator FTIOC0 FTIOD0 ITMZ0 TIORC_0 TIORA_0 Module data bus [Legend] TCNT_0: GRA_0, GRB_0, GRC_0, GRD_0: TCR_0: TIORA_0: TIORC_0: TSR_0: TIER_0: POCR_0: ITMZ0: Timer counter_0 (16 bits) General registers A_0, B_0, C_0, and D_0 (input capture/output compare registers: 16 bits x 4) Timer control register_0 (8 bits) Timer I/O control register A_0 (8 bits) Timer I/O control register C_0 (8 bits) Timer status register_0 (8 bits) Timer interrupt enable register_0 (8 bits) PWM mode output level control register_0 (8 bits) Channel 0 interrupt Figure 13.2 Timer Z (Channel 0) Block Diagram Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 202 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 POCR_0 TCNT_0 TIER_0 GRC_0 GRD_0 GRA_0 GRB_0 TCR_0 TSR_0 Section 13 Timer Z FTIOA1 FTIOB1 , /2, /4, /8 Clock select Control logic Comparator FTIOC1 FTIOD1 ITMZ1 TIORC_1 TIORA_1 Module data bus [Legend] TCNT_1: GRA_1, GRB_1, GRC_1, GRD_1: TCR_1: TIORA_1: TIORC_1: TSR_1: TIER_1: POCR_1: ITMZ1: Timer counter_1 (16 bits) General registers A_1, B_1, C_1, and D_1 (input capture/output compare registers: 16 bits x 4) Timer control register_1 (8 bits) Timer I/O control register A_1 (8 bits) Timer I/O control register C_1 (8 bits) Timer status register_1 (8 bits) Timer interrupt enable register_1 (8 bits) PWM mode output level control register_1 (8 bits) Channel 1 interrupt Figure 13.3 Timer Z (Channel 1) Block Diagram Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 203 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 POCR_1 TCNT_1 TIER_1 GRC_1 GRD_1 GRA_1 GRB_1 TCR_1 TSR_1 Section 13 Timer Z 13.2 Input/Output Pins Table 13.2 summarizes the timer Z pins. Table 13.2 Pin Configuration Name Input capture/output compare A0 Input capture/output compare B0 Input capture/output compare C0 Abbreviation FTIOA0 Input/Output Input/output Function GRA_0 output compare output, GRA_0 input capture input, or external clock input (TCLK) GRB_0 output compare output, GRB_0 input capture input, or PWM output GRC_0 output compare output, GRC_0 input capture input, or PWM synchronous output (in reset synchronous PWM and complementary PWM modes) GRD_0 output compare output, GRD_0 input capture input, or PWM output GRA_1 output compare output, GRA_1 input capture input, or PWM output (in reset synchronous PWM and complementary PWM modes) GRB_1 output compare output, GRB_1 input capture input, or PWM output GRC_1 output compare output, GRC_1 input capture input, or PWM output GRD_1 output compare output, GRD_1 input capture input, or PWM output FTIOB0 FTIOC0 Input/output Input/output Input capture/output compare D0 Input capture/output compare A1 FTIOD0 FTIOA1 Input/output Input/output Input capture/output compare B1 Input capture/output compare C1 Input capture/output compare D1 FTIOB1 FTIOC1 FTIOD1 Input/output Input/output Input/output Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 204 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.3 Register Descriptions The timer Z has the following registers. Common * Timer start register (TSTR) * Timer mode register (TMDR) * Timer PWM mode register (TPMR) * Timer function control register (TFCR) * Timer output master enable register (TOER) * Timer output control register (TOCR) Channel 0 * Timer control register_0 (TCR_0) * Timer I/O control register A_0 (TIORA_0) * Timer I/O control register C_0 (TIORC_0) * Timer status register_0 (TSR_0) * Timer interrupt enable register_0 (TIER_0) * PWM mode output level control register_0 (POCR_0) * Timer counter_0 (TCNT_0) * General register A_0 (GRA_0) * General register B_0 (GRB_0) * General register C_0 (GRC_0) * General register D_0 (GRD_0) Channel 1 * Timer control register_1 (TCR_1) * Timer I/O control register A_1 (TIORA_1) * Timer I/O control register C_1 (TIORC_1) * Timer status register_1 (TSR_1) * Timer interrupt enable register_1 (TIER_1) * PWM mode output level control register_1 (POCR_1) * Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1) * General register A_1 (GRA_1) * General register B_1 (GRB_1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 205 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z * General register C_1 (GRC_1) * General register D_1 (GRD_1) 13.3.1 Timer Start Register (TSTR) TSTR selects the operation/stop for the TCNT counter. Bit 7 to 2 1 Bit Name STR1 Initial Value All 1 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified. Channel 1 Counter Start 0: TCNT_1 halts counting 1: TCNT_1 starts counting 0 STR0 0 R/W Channel 0 Counter Start 0: TCNT_0 halts counting 1: TCNT_0 starts counting 13.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) TMDR selects buffer operation settings and synchronized operation. Bit 7 Bit Name BFD1 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Buffer Operation D1 0: GRD_1 operates normally 1: GRB_1 and GRD_1 are used together for buffer operation 6 BFC1 0 R/W Buffer Operation C1 0: GRC_1 operates normally 1: GRA_1 and GRD_1 are used together for buffer operation 5 BFD0 0 R/W Buffer Operation D0 0: GRD_0 operates normally 1: GRB_0 and GRD_0 are used together for buffer operation Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 206 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Bit 4 Bit Name BFC0 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Buffer Operation C0 0: GRC_0 operates normally 1: GRA_0 and GRC_0 are used together for buffer operation 3 to 1 0 SYNC All 1 0 R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified. Timer Synchronization 0: TCNT_1 and TCNT_0 operate as a different timer counter 1: TCNT_1 and TCNT_0 are synchronized TCNT_1 and TCNT_0 can be pre-set or cleared synchronously 13.3.3 Timer PWM Mode Register (TPMR) TPMR sets the pin to enter PWM mode. Bit 7 6 Bit Name PWMD1 Initial Value 1 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved This bit is always read as 1, and cannot be modified. PWM Mode D1 0: FTIOD1 operates normally 1: FTIOD1 operates in PWM mode 5 PWMC1 0 R/W PWM Mode C1 0: FTIOC1 operates normally 1: FTIOC1 operates in PWM mode 4 PWMB1 0 R/W PWM Mode B1 0: FTIOB1 operates normally 1: FTIOB1 operates in PWM mode 3 1 Reserved This bit is always read as 1, and cannot be modified. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 207 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Bit 2 Bit Name PWMD0 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description PWM Mode D0 0: FTIOD0 operates normally 1: FTIOD0 operates in PWM mode 1 PWMC0 0 R/W PWM Mode C0 0: FTIOC0 operates normally 1: FTIOC0 operates in PWM mode 0 PWMB0 0 R/W PWM Mode B0 0: FTIOB0 operates normally 1: FTIOB0 operates in PWM mode 13.3.4 Timer Function Control Register (TFCR) TFCR selects the settings and output levels for each operating mode. Bit 7 6 Bit Name STCLK Initial Value 1 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved This bit is always read as 1. External Clock Input Select 0: External clock input is disabled 1: External clock input is enabled 5 ADEG 0 R/W A/D Trigger Edge Select A/D module should be set to start an A/D conversion by the external trigger 0: A/D trigger at the crest in complementary PWM mode 1: A/D trigger at the trough in complementary PWM mode 4 ADTRG 0 R/W External Trigger Disable 0: A/D trigger for PWM cycles is disabled in complementary PWM mode 1: A/D trigger for PWM cycles is enabled in complementary PWM mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 208 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Bit 3 Bit Name OLS1 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Output Level Select 1 Selects the counter-phase output levels in reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode. 0: Initial output is high and the active level is low. 1: Initial output is low and the active level is high. 2 OLS0 0 R/W Output Level Select 0 Selects the normal-phase output levels in reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode. 0: Initial output is high and the active level is low. 1: Initial output is low and the active level is high. Figure 13.4 shows an example of outputs in reset synchronous PWM mode and complementary PWM mode when OLS1 = 0 and OLS0 = 0. 1 0 CMD1 CMD0 0 0 R/W R/W Combination Mode 1 and 0 00: Channel 0 and channel 1 operate normally 01: Channel 0 and channel 1 are used together to operate in reset synchronous PWM mode 10: Channel 0 and channel 1 are used together to operate in complementary PWM mode (transferred at the trough) 11: Channel 0 and channel 1 are used together to operate in complementary PWM mode (transferred at the crest) Note: When reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode is selected by these bits, this setting has the priority to the settings for PWM mode by each bit in TPMR. Stop TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 before making settings for reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 209 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z TCNT_0 TCNT_1 Normal phase Active level Counter phase Normal phase Counter phase Initial output Initial output Active level Complementary PWM mode Active level Active level Reset synchronous PWM mode Note: Write H'00 to TOCR to start initial outputs after stopping the counter. Figure 13.4 Example of Outputs in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode and Complementary PWM Mode 13.3.5 Timer Output Master Enable Register (TOER) TOER enables/disables the outputs for channel 0 and channel 1. When WKP4 is selected for inputs, if a low level signal is input to WKP4, the bits in TOER are set to 1 to disable the output for timer Z. Bit 7 Bit Name ED1 Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Master Enable D1 0: FTIOD1 pin output is enabled according to the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORC_1 settings 1: FTIOD1 pin output is disabled regardless of the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORC_1 settings (FTIOD1 pin is operated as an I/O port). 6 EC1 1 R/W Master Enable C1 0: FTIOC1 pin output is enabled according to the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORC_1 settings 1: FTIOC1 pin output is disabled regardless of the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORC_1 settings (FTIOC1 pin is operated as an I/O port). Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 210 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Bit 5 Bit Name EB1 Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Master Enable B1 0: FTIOB1 pin output is enabled according to the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORA_1 settings 1: FTIOB1 pin output is disabled regardless of the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORA_1 settings (FTIOB1 pin is operated as an I/O port). 4 EA1 1 R/W Master Enable A1 0: FTIOA1 pin output is enabled according to the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORA_1 settings 1: FTIOA1 pin output is disabled regardless of the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORA_1 settings (FTIOA1 pin is operated as an I/O port). 3 ED0 1 R/W Master Enable D0 0: FTIOD0 pin output is enabled according to the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORC_0 settings 1: FTIOD0 pin output is disabled regardless of the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORC_0 settings (FTIOD0 pin is operated as an I/O port). 2 EC0 1 R/W Master Enable C0 0: FTIOC0 pin output is enabled according to the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORC_0 settings 1: FTIOC0 pin output is disabled regardless of the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORC_0 settings (FTIOC0 pin is operated as an I/O port). 1 EB0 1 R/W Master Enable B0 0: FTIOB0 pin output is enabled according to the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORA_0 settings 1: FTIOB0 pin output is disabled regardless of the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORA_0 settings (FTIOB0 pin is operated as an I/O port). 0 EA0 1 R/W Master Enable A0 0: FTIOA0 pin output is enabled according to the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORA_0 settings 1: FTIOA0 pin output is disabled regardless of the TPMR, TFCR, and TIORA_0 settings (FTIOA0 pin is operated as an I/O port). Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 211 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.3.6 Timer Output Control Register (TOCR) TOCR selects the initial outputs before the first occurrence of a compare match. Note that bits OLS1 and OLS0 in TFCR set these initial outputs in reset synchronous PWM mode and complementary PWM mode. Bit 7 Bit Name TOD1 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Output Level Select D1 0: 0 output at the FTIOD1 pin* 1: 1 output at the FTIOD1 pin* 6 TOC1 0 R/W Output Level Select C1 0: 0 output at the FTIOC1 pin* 1: 1 output at the FTIOC1 pin* 5 TOB1 0 R/W Output Level Select B1 0: 0 output at the FTIOB1 pin* 1: 1 output at the FTIOB1 pin* 4 TOA1 0 R/W Output Level Select A1 0: 0 output at the FTIOA1 pin* 1: 1 output at the FTIOA1 pin* 3 TOD0 0 R/W Output Level Select D0 0: 0 output at the FTIOD0 pin* 1: 1 output at the FTIOD0 pin* 2 TOC0 0 R/W Output Level Select C0 0: 0 output at the FTIOC0 pin* 1: 1 output at the FTIOC0 pin* 1 TOB0 0 R/W Output Level Select B0 0: 0 output at the FTIOB0 pin* 1: 1 output at the FTIOB0 pin* 0 TOA0 0 R/W Output Level Select A0 0: 0 output at the FTIOA0 pin* 1: 1 output at the FTIOA0 pin* Note: * The change of the setting is immediately reflected in the output value. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 212 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.3.7 Timer Counter (TCNT) The timer Z has two TCNT counters (TCNT_0 and TCNT_1), one for each channel. The TCNT counters are 16-bit readable/writable registers that increment/decrement according to input clocks. Input clocks can be selected by bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. TCNT0 and TCNT 1 increment/decrement in complementary PWM mode, while they only increment in other modes. The TCNT counters are initialized to H'0000 by compare matches with corresponding GRA, GRB, GRC, or GRD, or input captures to GRA, GRB, GRC, or GRD (counter clearing function). When the TCNT counters overflow, an OVF flag in TSR for the corresponding channel is set to 1. When TCNT_1 underflows, an UDF flag in TSR is set to 1. The TCNT counters cannot be accessed in 8bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. TCNT is initialized to H'0000. 13.3.8 General Registers A, B, C, and D (GRA, GRB, GRC, and GRD) GR are 16-bit registers. Timer Z has eight general registers (GR), four for each channel. The GR registers are dual function 16-bit readable/writable registers, functioning as either output compare or input capture registers. Functions can be switched by TIORA and TIORC. The values in GR and TCNT are constantly compared with each other when the GR registers are used as output compare registers. When the both values match, the IMFA to IMFD flags in TSR are set to 1. Compare match outputs can be selected by TIORA and TIORC. When the GR registers are used as input capture registers, the TCNT value is stored after detecting external signals. At this point, IMFA to IMFD flags in the corresponding TSR are set to 1. Detection edges for input capture signals can be selected by TIORA and TIORC. When PWM mode, complementary PWM mode, or reset synchronous PWM mode is selected, the values in TIORA and TIORC are ignored. Upon reset, the GR registers are set as output compare registers (no output) and initialized to H'FFFF. The GR registers cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 213 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.3.9 Timer Control Register (TCR) The TCR registers select a TCNT counter clock, an edge when an external clock is selected, and counter clearing sources. Timer Z has a total of two TCR registers, one for each channel. Bit 7 6 5 Bit Name CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 Initial value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Counter Clear 2 to 0 000: Disables TCNT clearing 001: Clears TCNT by GRA compare match/input 1 capture* 010: Clears TCNT by GRB compare match/input 1 capture* 011: Synchronization clear; Clears TCNT in synchronous 2 with counter clearing of the other channel's timer* 100: Disables TCNT clearing 101: Clears TCNT by GRC compare match/input 1 capture* 110: Clears TCNT by GRD compare match/input 1 capture* 111: Synchronization clear; Clears TCNT in synchronous 2 with counter clearing of the other channel's timer* 4 3 CKEG1 CKEG0 0 0 R/W R/W Clock Edge 1 and 0 00: Count at rising edge 01: Count at falling edge 1X: Count at both edges 2 1 0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Time Prescaler 2 to 0 000: Internal clock: count by 001: Internal clock: count by /2 010: Internal clock: count by /4 011: Internal clock: count by /8 1XX: External clock: count by FTIOA0 (TCLK) pin input Notes: 1. When GR functions as an output compare register, TCNT is cleared by compare match. When GR functions as input capture, TCNT is cleared by input capture. 2. Synchronous operation is set by TMDR. 3. X: Don't care Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 214 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.3.10 Timer I/O Control Register (TIORA and TIORC) The TIOR registers control the general registers (GR). Timer Z has four TIOR registers (TIORA_0, TIORA_1, TIORC_0, and TIORC_1), two for each channel. In PWM mode including complementary PWM mode and reset synchronous PWM mode, the settings of TIOR are invalid. TIORA: TIORA selects whether GRA or GRB is used as an output compare register or an input capture register. When an output compare register is selected, the output setting is selected. When an input capture register is selected, an input edge of an input capture signal is selected. TIORA also selects the function of FTIOA or FTIOB pin. Bit 7 6 5 4 Bit Name IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Initial value 1 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved This bit is always read as 1. I/O Control B2 to B0 GRB is an output compare register: 000: Disables pin output by compare match 001: 0 output by GRB compare match 010: 1 output by GRB compare match 011: Toggle output by GRB compare match GRB is an input capture register: 100: Input capture to GRB at the rising edge 101: Input capture to GRB at the falling edge 11X: Input capture to GRB at both rising and falling edges 3 1 Reserved This bit is always read as 1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 215 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Initial value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description I/O Control A2 to A0 GRA is an output compare register: 000: Disables pin output by compare match 001: 0 output by GRA compare match 010: 1 output by GRA compare match 011: Toggle output by GRA compare match GRA is an input capture register: 100: Input capture to GRA at the rising edge 101: Input capture to GRA at the falling edge 11X: Input capture to GRA at both rising and falling edges [Legend] X: Don't care. TIORC: TIORC selects whether GRC or GRD is used as an output compare register or an input capture register. When an output compare register is selected, the output setting is selected. When an input capture register is selected, an input edge of an input capture signal is selected. TIORC also selects the function of FTIOC or FTIOD pin. Bit 7 6 5 4 Bit Name IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 Initial value 1 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved This bit is always read as 1. I/O Control D2 to D0 GRD is an output compare register: 000: Disables pin output by compare match 001: 0 output by GRD compare match 010: 1 output by GRD compare match 011: Toggle output by GRD compare match GRD is an input capture register: 100: Input capture to GRD at the rising edge 101: Input capture to GRD at the falling edge 11X: Input capture to GRD at both rising and falling edges 3 1 Reserved This bit is always read as 1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 216 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 Initial value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description I/O Control C2 to C0 GRC is an output compare register: 000: Disables pin output by compare match 001: 0 output by GRC compare match 010: 1 output by GRC compare match 011: Toggle Output by GRC compare match GRC is an input capture register: 100: Input capture to GRC at the rising edge 101: Input capture to GRC at the falling edge 11X: Input capture to GRC at both rising and falling edges [Legend] X: Don't care. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 217 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.3.11 Timer Status Register (TSR) TSR indicates generation of an overflow/underflow of TCNT and a compare match/input capture of GRA, GRB, GRC, and GRD. These flags are interrupt sources. If an interrupt is enabled by a corresponding bit in TIER, TSR requests an interrupt for the CPU. Timer Z has two TSR registers, one for each channel. Bit 7, 6 5 Bit Name UDF* Initial value All 1 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. Underflow Flag [Setting condition] * * 4 OVF 0 R/W When TCNT_1 underflows When 0 is written to UDF after reading UDF = 1 [Clearing condition] Overflow Flag [Setting condition] * * 3 IMFD 0 R/W When the TCNT value underflows When 0 is written to OVF after reading OVF = 1 [Clearing condition] Input Capture/Compare Match Flag D [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = GRD and GRD is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to GRD by input capture signal and GRD is functioning as input capture register When 0 is written to IMFD after reading IMFD = 1 [Clearing condition] * Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 218 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Bit 2 Bit Name IMFC Initial value 0 R/W R/W Description Input Capture/Compare Match Flag C [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = GRC and GRC is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to GRC by input capture signal and GRC is functioning as input capture register When 0 is written to IMFC after reading IMFC = 1 [Clearing condition] * 1 IMFB 0 R/W Input Capture/Compare Match Flag B [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = GRB and GRB is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to GRB by input capture signal and GRB is functioning as input capture register When 0 is written to IMFB after reading IMFB = 1 [Clearing condition] * 0 IMFA 0 R/W Input Capture/Compare Match Flag A [Setting conditions] * * When TCNT = GRA and GRA is functioning as output compare register When TCNT value is transferred to GRA by input capture signal and GRA is functioning as input capture register When 0 is written to IMFA after reading IMFA = 1 [Clearing condition] * Note: Bit 5 is not the UDF flag in TSR_0. It is a reserved bit. It is always read as 1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 219 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.3.12 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) TIER enables or disables interrupt requests for overflow or GR compare match/input capture. Timer Z has two TIER registers, one for each channel. Bit 7 to 5 4 Bit Name OVIE Initial value All 1 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. Overflow Interrupt Enable 0: Interrupt requests (OVI) by OVF or UDF flag are disabled 1: Interrupt requests (OVI) by OVF or UDF flag are enabled 3 IMIED 0 R/W Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable D 0: Interrupt requests (IMID) by IMFD flag are disabled 1: Interrupt requests (IMID) by IMFD flag are enabled 2 IMIEC 0 R/W Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable C 0: Interrupt requests (IMIC) by IMFC flag are disabled 1: Interrupt requests (IMIC) by IMFC flag are enabled 1 IMIEB 0 R/W Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable B 0: Interrupt requests (IMIB) by IMFB flag are disabled 1: Interrupt requests (IMIB) by IMFB flag are enabled 0 IMIEA 0 R/W Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable A 0: Interrupt requests (IMIA) by IMFA flag are disabled 1: Interrupt requests (IMIA) by IMFA flag are enabled Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 220 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.3.13 PWM Mode Output Level Control Register (POCR) POCR control the active level in PWM mode. Timer Z has two POCR registers, one for each channel. Bit 7 to 3 2 Bit Name POLD Initial value All 1 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. PWM Mode Output Level Control D 0: The output level of FTIOD is low-active 1: The output level of FTIOD is high-active 1 POLC 0 R/W PWM Mode Output Level Control C 0: The output level of FTIOC is low-active 1: The output level of FTIOC is high-active 0 POLB 0 R/W PWM Mode Output Level Control B 0: The output level of FTIOB is low-active 1: The output level of FTIOB is high-active Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 221 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.3.14 Interface with CPU 1. 16-bit register TCNT and GR are 16-bit registers. Reading/writing in a 16-bit unit is enabled but disabled in an 8-bit unit since the data bus with the CPU is 16-bit width. These registers must always be accessed in a 16-bit unit. Figure 13.5 shows an example of accessing the 16-bit registers. Internal data bus H C P U L Bus interface Module data bus TCNTH TCNTL Figure 13.5 Accessing Operation of 16-Bit Register (between CPU and TCNT (16 bits)) 2. 8-bit register Registers other than TCNT and GR are 8-bit registers that are connected internally with the CPU in an 8-bit width. Figure 13.6 shows an example of accessing the 8-bit registers. Internal data bus H C P U L Bus interface Module data bus TSTR Figure 13.6 Accessing Operation of 8-Bit Register (between CPU and TSTR (8 bits)) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 222 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.4 13.4.1 Operation Counter Operation When one of bits STR0 and STR1 in TSTR is set to 1, the TCNT counter for the corresponding channel begins counting. TCNT can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, for example. Figure 13.7 shows an example of the counter operation setting procedure. Operation selection Select counter clock [1] Periodic counter Free-running counter Select counter clearing source [2] Select output compare register [3] Set period [4] Start count operation [5] [1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. When an external clock is selected, select the external clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. [2] For periodic counter operation, select the TCNT clearing source with bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. [3] Designate the general register selected in [2] as an output compare register by means of TIOR. [4] Set the periodic counter cycle in the general register selected in [2]. [5] Set the STR bit in TSTR to 1 to start the counter operation. Figure 13.7 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 223 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 1. Free-running count operation and periodic count operation Immediately after a reset, the TCNT counters for channels 0 and 1 are all designated as freerunning counters. When the relevant bit in TSTR is set to 1, the corresponding TCNT counter starts an increment operation as a free-running counter. When TCNT overflows, the OVF flag in TSR is set to 1. If the value of the OVIE bit in the corresponding TIER is 1 at this point, timer Z requests an interrupt. After overflow, TCNT starts an increment operation again from H'0000. Figure 13.8 illustrates free-running counter operation. TCNT value H'FFFF H'0000 Time STR0, STR1 OVF Figure 13.8 Free-Running Counter Operation When compare match is selected as the TCNT clearing source, the TCNT counter for the relevant channel performs periodic count operation. The GR registers for setting the period are designated as output compare registers, and counter clearing by compare match is selected by means of bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR. After the settings have been made, TCNT starts an increment operation as a periodic counter when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When the count value matches the value in GR, the IMFA, IMFB, IMFC, or IMFD flag in TSR is set to 1 and TCNT is cleared to H'0000. If the value of the corresponding IMIEA, IMIEB, IMIEC, or IMIED bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the timer Z requests an interrupt. After a compare match, TCNT starts an increment operation again from H'0000. Figure 13.9 illustrates periodic counter operation. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 224 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z TCNT value Counter cleared by GR compare match GR value H'0000 Time STR IMF Figure 13.9 Periodic Counter Operation 2. TCNT count timing A. Internal clock operation A system clock () or three types of clocks (/2, /4, or /8) that divides the system clock can be selected by bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Figure 13.10 illustrates this timing. Internal clock TCNT input TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 13.10 Count Timing at Internal Clock Operation Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 225 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z B. External clock operation An external clock input pin (TCLK) can be selected by bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR, and a detection edge can be selected by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0. To detect an external clock, the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected. The pulse width of the external clock needs two or more system clocks. Note that an external clock does not operate correctly with the lower pulse width. Figure 13.11 illustrates the detection timing of the rising and falling edges. External clock input pin TCNT input TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 13.11 Count Timing at External Clock Operation (Both Edges Detected) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 226 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.4.2 Waveform Output by Compare Match Timer Z can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the corresponding FTIOA, FTIOB, FTIOC, or FTIOD output pin using compare match A, B, C, or D. Figure 13.12 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by compare match. Output selection Select waveform output mode [1] Set output timing [2] Enable waveform output [3] [1] Select 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output as a compare much output, by means of TIOR. The initial values set in TOCR are output unit the first compare match occurs. [2] Set the timing for compare match generation in GRA/GRB/GRC/GRD. [3] Enable or disable the timer output by TOER. [4] Set the STR bit in TSTR to 1 to start the TCNT count operation. Start count operation [4] Figure 13.12 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match 1. Examples of waveform output operation Figure 13.13 shows an example of 0 output/1 output. In this example, TCNT has been designated as a free-running counter, and settings have been made such that 0 is output by compare match A, and 1 is output by compare match B. When the set level and the pin level coincide, the pin level does not change. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 227 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z TCNT value H'FFFF H'0000 Time FTIOB No change No change FTIOA No change No change Figure 13.13 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation Figure 13.14 shows an example of toggle output. In this example, TCNT has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing on compare match B), and settings have been made such that the output is toggled by both compare match A and compare match B. TCNT value GRB GRA H'0000 Time FTIOB Toggle output FTIOA Toggle output Figure 13.14 Example of Toggle Output Operation Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 228 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 2. Output compare timing The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which TCNT and GR match (when TCNT changes from the matching value to the next value). When the compare match signal is generated, the output value selected in TIOR is output at the compare match output pin (FTIOA, FTIOB, FTIOC, or FTIOD). When TCNT matches GR, the compare match signal is generated only after the next TCNT input clock pulse is input. Figure 13.15 shows an example of the output compare timing. TCNT input TCNT N N+1 GR N Compare match signal FTIOA to FTIOD Figure 13.15 Output Compare Timing 13.4.3 Input Capture Function The TCNT value can be transferred to GR on detection of the input edge of the input capture/output compare pin (FTIOA, FTIOB, FTIOC, or FTIOD). Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detected edge. When the input capture function is used, the pulse width or period can be measured. Figure 13.16 shows an example of the input capture operation setting procedure. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 229 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Input selection Select input edge of input capture [1] [1] Designate GR as an input capture register by means of TIOR, and select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input edge of the input capture signal. [2] Set the STR bit in TSTR to 1 to start the TCNT counter operation. Start counter operation [2] Figure 13.16 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 230 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 1. Example of input capture operation Figure 13.17 shows an example of input capture operation. In this example, both rising and falling edges have been selected as the FTIOA pin input capture input edge, the falling edge has been selected as the FTIOB pin input capture input edge, and counter clearing by GRB input capture has been designated for TCNT. Counter cleared by FTIOB input (falling edge) TCNT value H'0180 H'0160 H'0005 H'0000 Time FTIOB FTIOA GRA H'0005 H'0160 GRB H'0180 Figure 13.17 Example of Input Capture Operation Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 231 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 2. Input capture signal timing Input capture on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected through settings in TIOR. Figure 13.18 shows the timing when the rising edge is selected. The pulse width of the input capture signal must be at least two system clock () cycles. Input capture input Input capture signal TCNT N GR N Figure 13.18 Input Capture Signal Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 232 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.4.4 Synchronous Operation In synchronous operation, the values in a number of TCNT counters can be rewritten simultaneously (synchronous presetting). Also, a number of TCNT counters can be cleared simultaneously by making the appropriate setting in TCR (synchronous clearing). Synchronous operation enables GR to be increased with respect to a single time base. Figure 13.19 shows an example of the synchronous operation setting procedure. Synchronous operation selection Set synchronous operation [1] Synchronous presetting Synchronous clearing Set TCNT [2] Clearing source generation channel? Yes No Select counter clearing source Start counter operation [3] Select counter clearing source Start counter operation [4] [5] [5] [1] Set the SYNC bits in TMDR to 1. [2] When a value is written to either of the TCNT counters, the same value is simultaneously written to the other TCNT counter. [3] Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to specify counter clearing by compare match/input capture. [4] Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to designate synchronous clearing for the counter clearing source. [5] Set the STR bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Figure 13.19 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 233 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Figure 13.20 shows an example of synchronous operation. In this example, synchronous operation has been selected, FTIOB0 and FTIOB1 have been designated for PWM mode, GRA_0 compare match has been set as the channel 0 counter clearing source, and synchronous clearing has been set for the channel 1 counter clearing source. In addition, the same input clock has been set as the counter input clock for channel 0 and channel 1. Two-phase PWM waveforms are output from pins FTIOB0 and FTIOB1. At this time, synchronous presetting and synchronous operation by GRA_0 compare match are performed by TCNT counters. For details on PWM mode, see section 13.4.5, PWM Mode. TCNT values GRA_0 GRA_1 GRB_0 GRB_1 H'0000 Time Synchronous clearing by GRA_0 compare match FTIOB0 FTIOB1 Figure 13.20 Example of Synchronous Operation 13.4.5 PWM Mode In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are output from the FTIOB, FTIOC, and FTIOD output pins with GRA as a cycle register and GRB, GRC, and GRD as duty registers. The initial output level of the corresponding pin depends on the setting values of TOCR and POCR. Table 13.3 shows an example of the initial output level of the FTIOB0 pin. The output level is determined by the POLB to POLD bits corresponding to POCR. When POLB is 0, the FTIOB output pin is set to 0 by compare match B and set to 1 by compare match A. When POLB is 1, the FTIOB output pin is set to 1 by compare match B and cleared to 0 by compare match A. In PWM mode, maximum 6-phase PWM outputs are possible. Figure 13.21 shows an example of the PWM mode setting procedure. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 234 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Table 13.3 Initial Output Level of FTIOB0 Pin TOB0 0 0 1 1 POLB 0 1 0 1 Initial Output Level 1 0 0 1 PWM mode [1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to TOSC0 in TCR. When an external clock is selected, select the external clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. [2] Use bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to select the counter clearing source. [3] Select the PWM mode with bits PWMB0 to PWMD0 and PWMB1 to PWMD1 in TPMR. [4] Set the initial output value with bits TOB0 to TOD0 and TOB1 to TOD1 in TOCR. [5] Set the output level with bits POLB to POLD in POCR. [6] Set the cycle in GRA, and set the duty in the other GR. [7] Enable or disable the timer output by TOER. [8] Set the STR bit in TSTR to 1 and start the counter operation. Select counter clock [1] Select counter clearing source [2] Set PWM mode [3] Set initial output level [4] Select output level [5] Set GR [6] Enable waveform output [7] Start counter operation [8] Figure 13.21 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 235 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Figure 13.22 shows an example of operation in PWM mode. The output signals go to 1 and TCNT is reset at compare match A, and the output signals go to 0 at compare match B, C, and D (TOB, TOC, and TOD = 0, POLB, POLC, and POLD = 0). Counter cleared by GRA compare match TCNT value GRA GRB GRC GRD H'0000 Time FTIOB FTIOC FTIOD Figure 13.22 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 236 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Figure 13.23 shows another example of operation in PWM mode. The output signals go to 0 and TCNT is reset at compare match A, and the output signals go to 1 at compare match B, C, and D (TOB, TOC, and TOD = 0, POLB, POLC, and POLD = 1). Counter cleared by GRA compare match TCNT value GRA GRB GRC GRD H'0000 Time FTIOB FTIOC FTIOD Figure 13.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) Figures 13.24 (when TOB, TOC, and TOD = 0, POLB, POLC, and POLD = 0) and 13.25 (when TOB, TOC, and TOD = 0, POLB, POLC, and POLD = 1) show examples of the output of PWM waveforms with duty cycles of 0% and 100% in PWM mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 237 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z TCNT value GRB rewritten GRA GRB GRB rewritten H'0000 Time FTIOB 0% duty TCNT value GRB rewritten GRA When cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously, duty register compare match has priority. GRB rewritten GRB rewritten GRB H'0000 Time FTIOB 100% duty When cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously, duty register compare match has priority. TCNT value GRB rewritten GRA GRB rewritten GRB rewritten GRB H'0000 Time FTIOB 100% duty 0% duty Figure 13.24 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 238 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z TCNT value GRB rewritten GRA GRB GRB rewritten H'0000 Time FTIOB 0% duty TCNT value GRB rewritten GRA When cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously, duty register compare match has priority. GRB rewritten GRB rewritten GRB H'0000 Time FTIOB 100% duty When cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously, duty register compare match has priority. TCNT value GRB rewritten GRA GRB rewritten GRB rewritten GRB H'0000 Time FTIOB 100% duty 0% duty Figure 13.25 Example of PWM Mode Operation (4) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 239 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.4.6 Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Three normal- and counter-phase PWM waveforms are output by combining channels 0 and 1 that one of changing points of waveforms will be common. In reset synchronous PWM mode, the FTIOB0 to FTIOD0 and FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 pins become PWM-output pins automatically. TCNT_0 performs an increment operation. Tables 13.4 and 13.5 show the PWM-output pins used and the register settings, respectively. Figure 13.26 shows the example of reset synchronous PWM mode setting procedure. Table 13.4 Output Pins in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Channel 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Pin Name FTIOC0 FTIOB0 FTIOD0 FTIOA1 FTIOC1 FTIOB1 FTIOD1 Input/Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Pin Function Toggle output in synchronous with PWM cycle PWM output 1 PWM output 1 (counter-phase waveform of PWM output 1) PWM output 2 PWM output 2 (counter-phase waveform of PWM output 2) PWM output 3 PWM output 3 (counter-phase waveform of PWM output 3) Table 13.5 Register Settings in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Register TCNT_0 TCNT_1 GRA_0 GRB_0 GRA_1 GRB_1 Description Initial setting of H'0000 Not used (independently operates) Sets counter cycle of TCNT_0 Set a changing point of the PWM waveform output from pins FTIOB0 and FTIOD0. Set a changing point of the PWM waveform output from pins FTIOA1 and FTIOC1. Set a changing point of the PWM waveform output from pins FTIOB1 and FTIOD1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 240 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Reset synchronous PWM mode [1] Clear bit STR0 in TSTR to 0 and stop the counter operation of TCNT_0. Set reset synchronous PWM mode after TCNT_0 stops. [2] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to TOSC0 in TCR. When an external clock is selected, select the external clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. [3] Use bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to select counter clearing source GRA_0. [4] Select the reset synchronous PWM mode with bits CMD1 and CMD0 in TFCR. FTIOB0 to FTIOD0 and FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 become PWM output pins automatically. [5] Set H'00 to TOCR. [6] Set TCNT_0 as H'0000. TCNT1 does not need to be set. [7] GRA_0 is a cycle register. Set a cycle for GRA_0. Set the changing point timing of the PWM output waveform for GRB_0, GRA_1, and GRB_1. [8] Enable or disable the timer output by TOER. [9] Set the STR bit in TSTR to 1 and start the counter operation. Stop counter operation [1] Select counter clock [2] Select counter clearing source [3] Set reset synchronous PWM mode [4] Initialize the output pin [5] Set TCNT [6] Set GR [7] Enable waveform output [8] Start counter operation [9] Figure 13.26 Example of Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Setting Procedure Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 241 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Figures 13.27 and 13.28 show examples of operation in reset synchronous PWM mode. Counter cleared by GRA compare match TCNT value GRA_0 GRB_0 GRA_1 GRB_1 H'0000 Time FTIOB0 FTIOD0 FTIOA1 FTIOC1 FTIOB1 FTIOD1 FTIOC0 Figure 13.27 Example of Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Operation (OLS0 = OLS1 = 1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 242 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Counter cleared by GRA compare match TCNT value GRA_0 GRB_0 GRA_1 GRB_1 H'0000 Time FTIOB0 FTIOD0 FTIOA1 FTIOC1 FTIOB1 FTIOD1 FTIOC0 Figure 13.28 Example of Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Operation (OLS0 = OLS1 = 0) In reset synchronous PWM mode, TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 perform increment and independent operations, respectively. However, GRA_1 and GRB_1 are separated from TCNT_1. When a compare match occurs between TCNT_0 and GRA_0, a counter is cleared and an increment operation is restarted from H'0000. The PWM pin outputs 0 or 1 whenever a compare match between GRB_0, GRA_1, GRB_1 and TCNT_0 or counter clearing occur. For details on operations when reset synchronous PWM mode and buffer operation are simultaneously set, refer to section 13.4.8, Buffer Operation. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 243 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.4.7 Complementary PWM Mode Three PWM waveforms for non-overlapped normal and counter phases are output by combining channels 0 and 1. In complementary PWM mode, the FTIOB0 to FTIOD0 and FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 pins become PWM-output pins automatically. TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 perform an increment or decrement operation. Tables 13.6 and 13.7 show the output pins and register settings in complementary PWM mode, respectively. Figure 13.29 shows the example of complementary PWM mode setting procedure. Table 13.6 Output Pins in Complementary PWM Mode Channel 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Pin Name FTIOC0 FTIOB0 FTIOD0 FTIOA1 FTIOC1 FTIOB1 FTIOD1 Input/Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Pin Function Toggle output in synchronous with PWM cycle PWM output 1 PWM output 1 (counter-phase waveform nonoverlapped with PWM output 1) PWM output 2 PWM output 2 (counter-phase waveform nonoverlapped with PWM output 2) PWM output 3 PWM output 3 (counter-phase waveform nonoverlapped with PWM output 3) Table 13.7 Register Settings in Complementary PWM Mode Register TCNT_0 TCNT_1 GRA_0 GRB_0 GRA_1 GRB_1 Description Initial setting of non-overlapped periods (non-overlapped periods are differences with TCNT_1) Initial setting of H'0000 Sets (upper limit value - 1) of TCNT_0 Set a changing point of the PWM waveform output from pins FTIOB0 and FTIOD0. Set a changing point of the PWM waveform output from pins FTIOA1 and FTIOC1. Set a changing point of the PWM waveform output from pins FTIOB1 and FTIOD1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 244 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Complementary PWM mode Stop counter operation [1] Initialize output pin [2] Select counter clock [3] Set complementary PWM mode [4] Initialize output pin [5] Set TCNT [6] Set GR [7] Enable waveform output [8] [1] Clear bits STR0 and STR1 in TSTR to 0, and stop the counter operation of TCNT_0. Stop TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 and set complementary PWM mode. [2] Write H'00 to TOCR. [3] Use bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR to select the same counter clock for channels 0 and 1. When an external clock is selected, select the edge of the external clock by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. Do not use bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to clear the counter. [4] Use bits CMD1 and CMD0 in TFCR to set complementary PWM mode. FTIOB0 to FTIOD0 and FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 automatically become PWM output pins. [5] Set H'00 to TOCR. [6] TCNT_1 must be H'0000. Set a nonoverlapped period to TCNT_0. [7] GRA_0 is a cycle register. Set the cycle to GRA_0. Set the timing to change the PWM output waveform to GRB_0, GRA_1, and GRB_1. Note that the timing must be set within the range of compare match carried out for TCNT_0 and TCNT_1. For GR settings, see 3. Setting GR Value in Complementary PWM Mode in section 13.4.7, Complementary PWM Mode. [8] Use TOER to enable or disable the timer output. [9] Set the STR0 and STR1 bits in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Start counter operation [9] Figure 13.29 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Setting Procedure Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 245 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 1. Canceling Procedure of Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 13.30 shows the complementary PWM mode canceling procedure. Complementary PWM mode [1] Clear bit CMD1 in TFCR to 0, and set channels 0 and 1 to normal operation. [2] After setting channels 0 and 1 to normal operation, clear bits STR0 and STR1 in TSTR to 0 and stop TCNT0 and TCNT1. Stop counter operation [1] Cancel complementary PWM mode [2] Figure 13.30 Canceling Procedure of Complementary PWM Mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 246 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 2. Examples of Complementary PWM Mode Operation: Figure 13.31 shows an example of complementary PWM mode operation. In complementary PWM mode, TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 perform an increment or decrement operation. When TCNT_0 and GRA_0 are compared and their contents match, the counter is decremented, and when TCNT_1 underflows, the counter is incremented. In GRA_0, GRA_1, and GRB_1, compare match is carried out in the order of TCNT_0 TCNT_1 TCNT_1 TCNT_0 and PWM waveform is output, during one cycle of a up/down counter. In this mode, the initial setting will be TCNT_0 > TCNT_1. TCNT_0 and GRA_0 are compared and their contents match TCNT values GRA_0 GRB_0 GRA_1 GRB_1 H'0000 Time FTIOB0 FTIOD0 FTIOA1 FTIOC1 FTIOB1 FTIOD1 FTIOC0 Figure 13.31 Example of Complementary PWM Mode Operation (1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 247 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Figure 13.32 (1) and (2) show examples of PWM waveform output with 0% duty and 100% duty in complementary PWM mode (for one phase). * TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0 Set GRB_0 to H'0000 or a value equal to or more than GRA_0. The waveform with a duty cycle of 0% and 100% can be output. When buffer operation is used together, the duty cycles can easily be changed, including the above settings, during operation. For details on buffer operation, refer to section 13.4.8, Buffer Operation. * Other than TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0 Set GRB_0 to satisfy the following expression: GRA_0 + 1 < GRB_0 < H'FFFF. The waveform with a duty cycle of 0% and 100% can be output. For details on 0%- and 100%-duty cycle waveform output, see 3.C., Outputting a waveform with a duty cycle of 0% and 100% in section 13.4.7, Complementary PWM Mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 248 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z TCNT values GRA0 GRB0 H'0000 Time FTIOB0 FTIOD0 0% duty (a) When duty is 0% TCNT values GRA0 GRB0 H'0000 Time FTIOB0 FTIOD0 100% duty (b) When duty is 100% Figure 13.32 (1) Example of Complementary PWM Mode Operation (TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0) (2) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 249 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z TCNT values GRA0 GRB0 H'0000 Time FTIOB0 FTIOD0 0% duty (a) When duty is 0% TCNT values GRA0 GRB0 H'0000 Time FTIOB0 FTIOD0 100% duty (b) When duty is 100% Figure 13.32 (2) Example of Complementary PWM Mode Operation (TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 0) (3) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 250 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z In complementary PWM mode, when the counter switches from up-counter to down-counter or vice versa, TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 overshoots or undershoots, respectively. In this case, the conditions to set the IMFA flag in channel 0 and the UDF flag in channel 1 differ from usual settings. Also, the transfer conditions in buffer operation differ from usual settings. Such timings are shown in figures 13.33 and 13.34. TCNT N-1 N N+1 N N-1 GRA_0 N IMFA Set to 1 Flag is not set Buffer transfer signal GR Transferred to buffer Not transferred to buffer Figure 13.33 Timing of Overshooting TCNT H'0001 H'0000 H'FFFF H'0000 H'0001 Flag is not set UDF Set to 1 Buffer transfer signal GR Transferred to buffer Not transferred to buffer Figure 13.34 Timing of Undershooting Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 251 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z When the counter is incremented or decremented, the IMFA flag of channel 0 is set to 1, and when the register is underflowed, the UDF flag of channel 0 is set to 1. After buffer operation has been designated for BR, BR is transferred to GR when the counter is incremented by compare match A0 or when TCNT_1 is underflowed. If the or /2 clock is selected by TPSC2 to TPSC0 bits, the OVF flag is not set to 1 at the timing that the counter value changes from H'FFFF to H'0000. If the /4 or /8 clock is selected by TPSC2 to TPSC0 bits, the OVF flag is set to 1. 3. Setting GR Value in Complementary PWM Mode: To set the general register (GR) or modify GR during operation in complementary PWM mode, refer to the following notes. A. Initial value a. When other than TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0, the GRA_0 value must be equal to H'FFFC or less. When TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0, the GRA_0 value can be set to H'FFFF or less. b. H'0000 to T - 1 (T: Initial value of TCNT0) must not be set for the initial value. c. GRA_0 - (T - 1) or more must not be set for the initial value. d. When using buffer operation, the same values must be set in the buffer registers and corresponding general registers. B. Modifying the setting value a. Writing to GR directly must be performed while the TCNT_1 and TCNT_0 values should satisfy the following expression: H'0000 TCNT_1 < previous GR value, and previous GR value < TCNT_0 GRA_0. Otherwise, a waveform is not output correctly. For details on outputting a waveform with a duty cycle of 0% and 100%, see C., Outputting a waveform with a duty cycle of 0% and 100%. b. Do not write the following values to GR directly. When writing the values, a waveform is not output correctly. H'0000 GR T - 1 and GRA_0 - (T - 1) GR < GRA_0 when TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0 H'0000 < GR T - 1 and GRA_0 - (T - 1) GR < GRA_0 + 1 when TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0 c. Do not change settings of GRA_0 during operation. C. Outputting a waveform with a duty cycle of 0% and 100% a. Buffer operation is not used and TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0 Write H'0000 or a value equal to or more than the GRA_0 value to GR directly at the timing shown below. * To output a 0%-duty cycle waveform, write a value equal to or more than the GRA_0 value while H'0000 TCNT_1 < previous GR value * To output a 100%-duty cycle waveform, write H'0000 while previous GR value< TCNT_0 GRA_0 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 252 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z To change duty cycles while a waveform with a duty cycle of 0% or 100% is being output, make sure the following procedure. * To change duty cycles while a 0%-duty cycle waveform is being output, write to GR while H'0000 TCNT_1 < previous GR value * To change duty cycles while a 100%-duty cycle waveform is being output, write to GR while previous GR value< TCNT_0 GRA_0 Note that changing from a 0%-duty cycle waveform to a 100%-duty cycle waveform and vice versa is not possible. b. Buffer operation is used and TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0 Write H'0000 or a value equal to or more than the GRA_0 value to the buffer register. * To output a 0%-duty cycle waveform, write a value equal to or more than the GRA_0 value to the buffer register * To output a 100%-duty cycle waveform, write H'0000 to the buffer register For details on buffer operation, see section 13.4.8, Buffer Operation. c. Buffer operation is not used and other than TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0 Write a value which satisfies GRA_0 + 1 < GR < H'FFFF to GR directly at the timing shown below. * To output a 0%-duty cycle waveform, write the value while H'0000 TCNT_1 < previous GR value * To output a 100%-duty cycle waveform, write the value while previous GR value< TCNT_0 GRA_0 To change duty cycles while a waveform with a duty cycle of 0% and 100% is being output, the following procedure must be followed. * To change duty cycles while a 0%-duty cycle waveform is being output, write to GR while H'0000 TCNT_1 < previous GR value * To change duty cycles while a 100%-duty cycle waveform is being output, write to GR while previous GR value< TCNT_0 GRA_0 Note that changing from a 0%-duty cycle waveform to a 100%-duty cycle waveform and vice versa is not possible. d. Buffer operation is used and other than TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 0 Write a value which satisfies GRA_0 + 1 < GR < H'FFFF to the buffer register. A waveform with a duty cycle of 0% can be output. However, a waveform with a duty cycle of 100% cannot be output using the buffer operation. Also, the buffer operation cannot be used to change duty cycles while a waveform with a duty cycle of 100% is being output. For details on buffer operation, see section 13.4.8, Buffer Operation. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 253 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.4.8 Buffer Operation Buffer operation differs depending on whether GR has been designated for an input capture register or an output compare register, or in reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode. Table 13.8 shows the register combinations used in buffer operation. Table 13.8 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation General Register GRA GRB Buffer Register GRC GRD 1. When GR is an output compare register When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register of the corresponding channel is transferred to the general register. This operation is illustrated in figure 13.35. Compare match signal Buffer register General register Comparator TCNT Figure 13.35 Compare Match Buffer Operation 2. When GR is an input capture register When an input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transferred to the general register and the value previously stored in the general register is transferred to the buffer register. This operation is illustrated in figure 13.36. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 254 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Input capture signal Buffer register General register TCNT Figure 13.36 Input Capture Buffer Operation 3. Complementary PWM Mode When the counter switches from counting up to counting down or vice versa, the value of the buffer register is transferred to the general register. Here, the value of the buffer register is transferred to the general register in the following timing: A. When TCNT_0 and GRA_0 are compared and their contents match B. When TCNT_1 underflows 4. Reset Synchronous PWM Mode The value of the buffer register is transferred from compare match A0 to the general register. 5. Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure Figure 13.37 shows an example of the buffer operation setting procedure. Buffer operation Select GR function [1] [1] Designate GR as an input capture register or output compare register by means of TIOR. [2] Designate GR for buffer operation with bits BFD1, BFC1, BFD0, or BFC0 in TMDR. [3] Set the STR bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation of TCNT. Set buffer operation [2] Start count operation [3] Figure 13.37 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 255 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 6. Examples of Buffer Operation Figure 13.38 shows an operation example in which GRA has been designated as an output compare register, and buffer operation has been designated for GRA and GRC. This is an example of TCNT operating as a periodic counter cleared by compare match B. Pins FTIOA and FTIOB are set for toggle output by compare match A and B. As buffer operation has been set, when compare match A occurs, the FTIOA pin performs toggle outputs and the value in buffer register is simultaneously transferred to the general register. This operation is repeated each time that compare match A occurs. The timing to transfer data is shown in figure 13.39. Counter is cleared by GBR compare match TCNT value GRB H'0250 H'0200 H'0100 H'0000 Time GRC H'0200 H'0100 H'0200 GRA H'0250 H'0200 H'0100 H'0200 FTIOB FTIOA Compare match A Figure 13.38 Example of Buffer Operation (1) (Buffer Operation for Output Compare Register) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 256 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z TCNT n n+1 Compare match signal Buffer transfer signal GRC N GRA n N Figure 13.39 Example of Compare Match Timing for Buffer Operation Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 257 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Figure 13.40 shows an operation example in which GRA has been designated as an input capture register, and buffer operation has been designated for GRA and GRC. Counter clearing by input capture B has been set for TCNT, and falling edges have been selected as the FIOCB pin input capture input edge. And both rising and falling edges have been selected as the FIOCA pin input capture input edge. As buffer operation has been set, when the TCNT value is stored in GRA upon the occurrence of input capture A, the value previously stored in GRA is simultaneously transferred to GRC. The transfer timing is shown in figure 13.41. Counter is cleared by the input capture B TCNT value H'0180 H'0160 H'0005 H'0000 Time FTIOB FTIOA GRA H'0005 H'0160 GRC H'0005 H'0160 GRB H'0180 Input capture A Figure 13.40 Example of Buffer Operation (2) (Buffer Operation for Input Capture Register) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 258 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z FTIO pin Input capture signal TCNT n n+1 N N+1 GRA M n n N GRC m M M n Figure 13.41 Input Capture Timing of Buffer Operation Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 259 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z Figures 13.42 and 13.43 show the operation examples when buffer operation has been designated for GRB_0 and GRD_0 in complementary PWM mode. These are examples when a PWM waveform of 0% duty is created by using the buffer operation and performing GRD_0 GRA_0. Data is transferred from GRD_0 to GRB_0 according to the settings of CMD_0 and CMD_1 when TCNT_0 and GRA_0 are compared and their contents match or when TCNT_1 underflows. However, when GRD_0 GRA_0, data is transferred from GRD_0 to GRB_0 when TCNT_1 underflows regardless of the setting of CMD_0 and CMD_1. When GRD_0 = H'0000, data is transferred from GRD_0 to GRB_0 when TCNT_0 and GRA_0 are compared and their contents match regardless of the settings of CMD_0 and CMD_1. TCNT values TCNT_0 GRA_0 TCNT_1 H'0999 GRB_0 (When restored, data will be transferred to the saved location regardless of the CMD1 and CMD0 values) H'0000 Time GRD_0 H'0999 H'1FFF H'0999 GRB_0 H'0999 H'0999 H'1FFF H'0999 FTIOB0 FTIOD0 Figure 13.42 Buffer Operation (3) (Buffer Operation in Complementary PWM Mode CMD1 = CMD0 = 1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 260 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z TCNT values TCNT_0 GRA_0 TCNT_1 H'0999 GRB_0 (When restored, data will be transferred to the saved location regardless of the CMD1 and CMD0 values) H'0000 GRB_0 Time GRD_0 H'0999 H'0000 H'0999 GRB_0 H'0999 H'0000 H'0999 FTIOC0 FTIOD0 Figure 13.43 Buffer Operation (4) (Buffer Operation in Complementary PWM Mode CMD1 = CMD0 = 1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 261 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.4.9 Timer Z Output Timing The outputs of channels 0 and 1 can be disabled or inverted by the settings of TOER and TOCR and the external level. 1. Output Disable/Enable Timing of Timer Z by TOER: Setting the master enable bit in TOER to 1 disables the output of timer Z. By setting the PCR and PDR of the corresponding I/O port beforehand, any value can be output. Figure 13.44 shows the timing to enable or disable the output of timer Z by TOER. T1 T2 Address bus TOER address TOER N H'FF Timer Z output pin Timer output I/O port Timer Z output I/O port Figure 13.44 Example of Output Disable Timing of Timer Z by Writing to TOER Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 262 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 2. Output Disable Timing of Timer Z by External Trigger: When P54/WKP4 is set as a WKP4 input pin, and low level is input to WKP4, the master enable bit in TOER is set to 1 and the output of timer Z will be disabled. WKP4 TOER N H'FF Timer Z output pin Timer Z output I/O port Timer Z output I/O port Figure 13.45 Example of Output Disable Timing of Timer Z by External Trigger Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 263 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 3. Output Inverse Timing by TFCR: The output level can be inverted by inverting the OLS1 and OLS0 bits in TFCR in reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode. Figure 13.46 shows the timing. T1 T2 Address bus TOER address TFCR Timer Z output pin Inverted Figure 13.46 Example of Output Inverse Timing of Timer Z by Writing to TFCR 4. Output Inverse Timing by POCR: The output level can be inverted by inverting the POLD, POLC, and POLB bits in POCR in PWM mode. Figure 13.47 shows the timing. T1 T2 Address bus POCR address TFCR Timer Z output pin Inverted Figure 13.47 Example of Output Inverse Timing of Timer Z by Writing to POCR Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 264 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.5 Interrupts There are three kinds of timer Z interrupt sources; input capture/compare match, overflow, and underflow. An interrupt is requested when the corresponding interrupt request flag is set to 1 while the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1. 13.5.1 Status Flag Set Timing 1. IMF Flag Set Timing: The IMF flag is set to 1 by the compare match signal that is generated when the GR matches with the TCNT. The compare match signal is generated at the last state of matching (timing to update the counter value when the GR and TCNT match). Therefore, when the TCNT and GR matches, the compare match signal will not be generated until the TCNT input clock is generated. Figure 13.48 shows the timing to set the IMF flag. TCNT input clock TCNT N N+1 GR N Compare match signal IMF ITMZ Figure 13.48 IMF Flag Set Timing when Compare Match Occurs Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 265 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 2. IMF Flag Set Timing at Input Capture: When an input capture signal is generated, the IMF flag is set to 1 and the value of TCNT is simultaneously transferred to corresponding GR. Figure 13.49 shows the timing. Input capture signal IMF TCNT N GR N ITMZ Figure 13.49 IMF Flag Set Timing at Input Capture 3. Overflow Flag (OVF) Set Timing: The overflow flag is set to 1 when the TCNT overflows. Figure 13.50 shows the timing. TCNT H'FFFF H'0000 Overflow signal OVF ITMZ Figure 13.50 OVF Flag Set Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 266 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.5.2 Status Flag Clearing Timing The status flag can be cleared by writing 0 after reading 1 from the CPU. Figure 13.51 shows the timing in this case. Address WTSR (internal write signal) TSR address IMF, OVF ITMZ Figure 13.51 Status Flag Clearing Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 267 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 13.6 Usage Notes 1. Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations: If a counter clear signal is generated in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing has priority and the TCNT write is not performed. Figure 13.52 shows the timing in this case. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 TCNT address WTCNT (internal write signal) Counter clear signal TCNT N H'0000 Clearing has priority. Figure 13.52 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations 2. Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations: If increment is done in T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT writing has priority. Figure 13.53 shows the timing in this case. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 268 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z TCNT write cycle T1 T2 TCNT address WTCNT (internal write signal) TCNT input clock TCNT N TCNT write data M Figure 13.53 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations 3. Contention between GR Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a GR write cycle, GR write has priority and the compare match signal is disabled. Figure 13.54 shows the timing in this case. GR write cycle T1 T2 GR address WGR (internal write signal) TCNT N N+1 GR N GR write data M Compare match signal Disabled Figure 13.54 Contention between GR Write and Compare Match Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 269 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 4. Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow: If overflow/underflow occurs in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT write has priority without an increment operation. At this time, the OVF flag is set to 1. Figure 13.55 shows the timing in this case. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 TCNT address WTCNT (internal write signal) TCNT input clock Overflow signal TCNT H'FFFF TCNT write data M OVF Figure 13.55 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 270 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 5. Contention between GR Read and Input Capture: If an input capture signal is generated in the T1 state of a GR read cycle, the data that is read will be transferred before input capture transfer. Figure 13.56 shows the timing in this case. GR read cycle T1 T2 GR address Internal read signal Input capture signal GR X M Internal data bus X Figure 13.56 Contention between GR Read and Input Capture Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 271 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 6. Contention between Count Clearing and Increment Operations by Input Capture: If an input capture and increment signals are simultaneously generated, count clearing by the input capture operation has priority without an increment operation. The TCNT contents before clearing counter are transferred to GR. Figure 13.57 shows the timing in this case. Input capture signal Counter clear signal TCNT input clock TCNT N H'0000 GR N Clearing has priority. Figure 13.57 Contention between Count Clearing and Increment Operations by Input Capture Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 272 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 7. Contention between GR Write and Input Capture: If an input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a GR write cycle, the input capture operation has priority and the write to GR is not performed. Figure 13.58 shows the timing in this case. GR write cycle T1 T2 Address bus GR address WGR (internal write signal) Input capture signal TCNT N GR M GR write data Figure 13.58 Contention between GR Write and Input Capture 8. Notes on Setting Reset Synchronous PWM Mode/Complementary PWM Mode: When bits CMD1 and CMD0 in TFCR are set, note the following: A. Write bits CMD1 and CMD0 while TCNT_1 and TCNT_0 are halted. B. Changing the settings of reset synchronous PWM mode to complementary PWM mode or vice versa is disabled. Set reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode after the normal operation (bits CMD1 and CMD0 are cleared to 0) has been set. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 273 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 13 Timer Z 9. Note on Writing to the TOA0 to TOD0 Bits and the TOA1 to TOD1 Bits in TOCR: The TOA0 to TOD0 bits and the TOA1 to TOD1 bits in TOCR decide the value of the FTIO pin, which is output until the first compare match occurs. Once a compare match occurs and this compare match changes the values of FTIOA0 to FTIOD0 and FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 output, the values of the FTIOA0 to FTIOD0 and FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 pin output and the values read from the TOA0 to TOD0 and TOA1 to TOD1 bits may differ. Moreover, when the writing to TOCR and the generation of the compare match A0 to D0 and A1 to D1 occur at the same timing, the writing to TOCR has the priority. Thus, output change due to the compare match is not reflected to the FTIOA0 to FTIOD0 and FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 pins. Therefore, when bit manipulation instruction is used to write to TOCR, the values of the FTIOA0 to FTIOD0 and FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 pin output may result in an unexpected result. When TOCR is to be written to while compare match is operating, stop the counter once before accessing to TOCR, read the port 6 state to reflect the values of FTIOA0 to FTIOD0 and FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 output, to TOA0 to TOD0 and TOA1 to TOD1, and then restart the counter. Figure 13.59 shows an example when the compare match and the bit manipulation instruction to TOCR occur at the same timing. TOCR has been set to H'06. Compare match B0 and compare match C0 are used. The FTIOB0 pin is in the 1 output state, and is set to the toggle output or the 0 output by compare match B0. When BCLR#2, @TOCR is executed to clear the TOC0 bit (the FTIOC0 signal is low) and compare match B0 occurs at the same timing as shown below, the H'02 writing to TOCR has priority and compare match B0 does not drive the FTIOB0 signal low; the FTIOB0 signal remains high. Bit TOCR Set value 7 TOD1 0 6 TOC1 0 5 TOB1 0 4 TOA1 0 3 TOD0 0 2 TOC0 1 1 TOB0 1 0 TOA0 0 BCLR#2, @TOCR (1) TOCR read operation: Read H'06 (2) Modify operation: Modify H'06 to H'02 (3) Write operation to TOCR: Write H'02 TOCR write signal Compare match signal B0 FTIOB0 pin Expected output Remains high because the 1 writing to TOB has priority Figure 13.59 When Compare Match and Bit Manipulation Instruction to TOCR Occur at the Same Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 274 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 14 Watchdog Timer Section 14 Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer is an 8-bit timer that can generate an internal reset signal for this LSI if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, thus allowing it to overflow. The block diagram of the watchdog timer is shown in figure 14.1. WDT dedicated internal oscillator CLK TCSRWD PSS TCWD TMWD [Legend] TCSRWD: TCWD: PSS: TMWD: Timer control/status register WD Timer counter WD Prescaler S Timer mode register WD Internal reset signal Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer 14.1 Features * Selectable from nine counter input clocks. Eight clock sources (/64, /128, /256, /512, /1024, /2048, /4096, and /8192) or the WDT dedicated internal oscillator can be selected as the timer-counter clock. When the WDT dedicated internal oscillator is selected, it can operate as the watchdog timer in any operating mode. * Reset signal generated on counter overflow An overflow period of 1 to 256 times the selected clock can be set. * The watchdog timer is enabled in the initial state. It starts operating after the reset state is canceled. WDT0110A_000020030700 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 275 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Internal data bus Section 14 Watchdog Timer 14.2 Register Descriptions The watchdog timer has the following registers. * Timer control/status register WD (TCSRWD) * Timer counter WD (TCWD) * Timer mode register WD (TMWD) 14.2.1 Timer Control/Status Register WD (TCSRWD) TCSRWD performs the TCSRWD and TCWD write control. TCSRWD also controls the watchdog timer operation and indicates the operating state. TCSRWD must be rewritten by using the MOV instruction. The bit manipulation instruction cannot be used to change the setting value. Bit 7 Bit Name B6WI Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Bit 6 Write Inhibit The TCWE bit can be written only when the write value of the B6WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1. 6 TCWE 0 R/W Timer Counter WD Write Enable TCWD can be written when the TCWE bit is set to 1. When writing data to this bit, the value for bit 7 must be 0. 5 B4WI 1 R/W Bit 4 Write Inhibit The TCSRWE bit can be written only when the write value of the B4WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1. 4 TCSRWE 0 R/W Timer Control/Status Register WD Write Enable The WDON and WRST bits can be written when the TCSRWE bit is set to 1. When writing data to this bit, the value for bit 5 must be 0. 3 B2WI 1 R/W Bit 2 Write Inhibit This bit can be written to the WDON bit only when the write value of the B2WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 276 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 14 Watchdog Timer Bit 2 Bit Name WDON Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Watchdog Timer On TCWD starts counting up when the WDON bit is set to 1 and halts when the WDON bit is cleared to 0. The watchdog timer is enabled in the initial state. When the watchdog timer is not used, clear the WDON bit to 0. [Setting conditions] * * Reset When 1 is written to the WDON bit and 0 is written to the B2WI bit while the TCSRWE bit = 1 When 0 is written to the WDON bit and 0 is written to the B2WI bit while the TCSRWE bit = 1 [Clearing condition] * 1 B0WI 1 R/W Bit 0 Write Inhibit This bit can be written to the WRST bit only when the write value of the B0WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1. 0 WRST 0 R/W Watchdog Timer Reset [Setting condition] * When TCWD overflows and an internal reset signal is generated Reset by the RES pin When 0 is written to the WRST bit and 0 is written to the B0WI bit while the TCSRWE bit = 1 [Clearing conditions] * * Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 277 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 14 Watchdog Timer 14.2.2 Timer Counter WD (TCWD) TCWD is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. When TCWD overflows from H'FF to H'00, the internal reset signal is generated and the WRST bit in TCSRWD is set to 1. TCWD is initialized to H'00. 14.2.3 Timer Mode Register WD (TMWD) TMWD selects the input clock. Bit 7 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name CKS3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Initial Value All 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1. Clock Select 3 to 0 Select the clock to be input to TCWD. 1000: Internal clock: counts on /64 1001: Internal clock: counts on /128 1010: Internal clock: counts on /256 1011: Internal clock: counts on /512 1100: Internal clock: counts on /1024 1101: Internal clock: counts on /2048 1110: Internal clock: counts on /4096 1111: Internal clock: counts on 8192 0XXX: WDT dedicated internal oscillator For the overflow periods of the WDT dedicated internal oscillator, see section 22, Electrical Characteristics. [Legend] X: Don't care. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 278 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 14 Watchdog Timer 14.3 Operation The watchdog timer is provided with an 8-bit counter. After the reset state is released, TCWD starts counting up. When the TCWD count value overflows H'FF, an internal reset signal is generated. The internal reset signal is output for a period of 256 OSC clock cycles. As TCWD is a writable counter, it starts counting from the value set in TCWD. An overflow period in the range of 1 to 256 input clock cycles can therefore be set, according to the TCWD set value. When the watchdog timer is not used, stop TCWD counting by writing 0 to B2WI and WDON simultaneously while the TCSRWE bit in TCSRWD is set to 1. (To stop the watchdog timer, two write accesses to TCSRWD are required.) Figure 14.2 shows an example of watchdog timer operation. Example: With 30-ms overflow period when = 4 MHz 4 x 106 8192 x 30 x 10-3 = 14.6 Therefore, 256 - 15 = 241 (H'F1) is set in TCW. TCWD overflow H'FF H'F1 TCWD count value H'00 H'F1 written to TCWD Internal reset signal H'F1 written to TCWD Reset generated 256 OSC clock cycles Figure 14.2 Watchdog Timer Operation Example Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 279 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 14 Watchdog Timer Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 280 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 15 14-Bit PWM Section 15 14-Bit PWM The 14-bit PWM is a pulse division type PWM that can be used for electronic tuner control, etc. Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the 14-bit PWM. 15.1 Features * Choice of two conversion periods A conversion period of 32768/ with a minimum modulation width of 2/, or a conversion period of 16384/ with a minimum modulation width of 1/, can be selected. * Pulse division method for less ripple PWCR Internal data bus PWDRL PWDRU /4 /2 PWM waveform generator PWM [Legend] PWCR: PWDRL: PWDRU: PWM: PWM control register PWM data register L PWM data register U PWM output pin Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of 14-Bit PWM PWM1400A_000120030300 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 281 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 15 14-Bit PWM 15.2 Input/Output Pin Table 15.1 shows the 14-bit PWM pin configuration. Table 15.1 Pin Configuration Name 14-bit PWM square-wave output Abbreviation I/O PWM Output Function 14-bit PWM square-wave output pin Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 282 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 15 14-Bit PWM 15.3 Register Descriptions The 14-bit PWM has the following registers. * PWM control register (PWCR) * PWM data register U (PWDRU) * PWM data register L (PWDRL) 15.3.1 PWM Control Register (PWCR) PWCR selects the conversion period. Bit 7 to 1 0 Bit Name PWCR0 Initial Value All 1 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified. Clock Select 0: The input clock is /2 (t = 2/) The conversion period is 16384/, with a minimum modulation width of 1/ 1: The input clock is /4 (t = 4/) The conversion period is 32768/, with a minimum modulation width of 2/ [Legend] t: Period of PWM clock input 15.3.2 PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL) PWDRU and PWDRL indicate high level width in one PWM waveform cycle. PWDRU and PWDRL are 14-bit write-only registers, with the upper 6 bits assigned to PWDRU and the lower 8 bits to PWDRL. When read, all bits are always read as 1. Both PWDRU and PWDRL are accessible only in bytes. Note that the operation is not guaranteed if word access is performed. When 14-bit data is written in PWDRU and PWDRL, the contents are latched in the PWM waveform generator and the PWM waveform generation data is updated. When writing the 14-bit data, the order is as follows: PWDRL to PWDRU. PWDRU and PWDRL are initialized to H'C000. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 283 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 15 14-Bit PWM 15.4 Operation When using the 14-bit PWM, set the registers in this sequence: 1. Set the PWM bit in the port mode register 1 (PMR1) to set the P11/PWM pin to function as a PWM output pin. 2. Set the PWCR0 bit in PWCR to select a conversion period of either. 3. Set the output waveform data in PWDRU and PWDRL. Be sure to write byte data first to PWDRL and then to PWDRU. When the data is written in PWDRU, the contents of these registers are latched in the PWM waveform generator, and the PWM waveform generation data is updated in synchronization with internal signals. One conversion period consists of 64 pulses, as shown in figure 15.2. The total high-level width during this period (TH) corresponds to the data in PWDRU and PWDRL. This relation can be expressed as follows: TH = (data value in PWDRU and PWDRL + 64) x t/2 where t is the period of PWM clock input: 2/ (bit PWCR0 = 0) or 4/ (bit PWCR0 = 1). If the data value in PWDRU and PWDRL is from H'FFC0 to H'FFFF, the PWM output stays high. When the data value is H'C000, TH is calculated as follows: TH = 64 x t/2 = 32 t Conversion period t f1 t f2 t f63 t f64 t H1 t H2 t H3 t H63 t H64 T H = t H1 + t H2 + t H3 + ... + t H64 t f1 = t f2 = t f3 = ... = t f64 Figure 15.2 Waveform Output by 14-Bit PWM Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 284 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) This LSI includes a serial communication interface 3 (SCI3), which has independent two channels. The SCI3 can handle both asynchronous and clock synchronous serial communication. In asynchronous mode, serial data communication can be carried out using standard asynchronous communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or an Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA). A function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor communication function). Table 16.1 shows the SCI3 channel configuration and figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI3. Since pin functions are identical for each of the two channels (SCI3 and SCI3_2), separate explanations are not given in this section. 16.1 Features * Choice of asynchronous or clock synchronous serial communication mode * Full-duplex communication capability The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to be executed simultaneously. Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous transmission and continuous reception of serial data. * On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected * External clock or on-chip baud rate generator can be selected as a transfer clock source. * Six interrupt sources Transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, overrun error, framing error, and parity error. Asynchronous mode * Data length: 7 or 8 bits * Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits * Parity: Even, odd, or none * Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors * Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in the case of a framing error SCI0011A_000020020200 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 285 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Clock synchronous mode * Data length: 8 bits * Receive error detection: Overrun errors Table 16.1 Channel Configuration Channel Channel 1 Abbreviation SCI3* Pin SCK3 RXD TXD Register SMR BRR SCR3 TDR SSR RDR RSR TSR Channel 2 SCI3_2 SCK3_2 RXD_2 TXD_2 SMR_2 BRR_2 SCR3_2 TDR_2 SSR_2 RDR_2 RSR_2 TSR_2 Note: * Register Address H'FFA8 H'FFA9 H'FFAA H'FFAB H'FFAC H'FFAD H'F740 H'F741 H'F742 H'F743 H'F744 H'F745 The channel 1 of the SCI3 is used in on-board programming mode by boot mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 286 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) SCK3 External clock Baud rate generator Internal clock (/64, /16, /4, ) BRC Clock BRR Transmit/receive control circuit SCR3 SSR TXD TSR TDR RXD RSR RDR Interrupt request (TEI, TXI, RXI, ERI) [Legend] Receive shift register RSR: Receive data register RDR: Transmit shift register TSR: Transmit data register TDR: Serial mode register SMR: SCR3: Serial control register 3 Serial status register SSR: Bit rate register BRR: Bit rate counter BRC: Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of SCI3 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 287 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Internal data bus SMR Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.2 Input/Output Pins Table 16.2 shows the SCI3 pin configuration. Table 16.2 Pin Configuration Pin Name SCI3 clock SCI3 receive data input SCI3 transmit data output Abbreviation SCK3 RXD TXD I/O I/O Input Output Function SCI3 clock input/output SCI3 receive data input SCI3 transmit data output Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 288 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.3 Register Descriptions The SCI3 has the following registers for each channel. * Receive shift register (RSR) * Receive data register (RDR) * Transmit shift register (TSR) * Transmit data register (TDR) * Serial mode register (SMR) * Serial control register 3 (SCR3) * Serial status register (SSR) * Bit rate register (BRR) 16.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) RSR is a shift register that is used to receive serial data input from the RxD pin and convert it into parallel data. When one frame of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically. RSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU. 16.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) RDR is an 8-bit register that stores received data. When the SCI3 has received one frame of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR, where it is stored. After this, RSR is receive-enabled. As RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive operations are possible. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read RDR only once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00. 16.3.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI3 first transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR automatically, then sends the data that starts from the LSB to the TXD pin. TSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 289 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.3.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR) TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for transmission. When the SCI3 detects that TSR is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The doublebuffered structure of TDR and TSR enables continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit data has already been written to TDR during transmission of one-frame data, the SCI3 transfers the written data to TSR to continue transmission. To achieve reliable serial transmission, write transmit data to TDR only once after confirming that the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. TDR is initialized to H'FF. 16.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) SMR is used to set the SCI3's serial transfer format and select the baud rate generator clock source. Bit 7 Bit Name COM Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Communication Mode 0: Asynchronous mode 1: Clock synchronous mode 6 CHR 0 R/W Character Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects 8 bits as the data length. 1: Selects 7 bits as the data length. 5 PE 0 R/W Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit data before transmission, and the parity bit is checked in reception. 4 PM 0 R/W Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects even parity. 1: Selects odd parity. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 290 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Bit 3 Bit Name STOP Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Stop Bit Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode) Selects the stop bit length in transmission. 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits For reception, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the value in the bit. If the second stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit character. 2 MP 0 R/W Multiprocessor Mode When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor communication function is enabled. The PE bit and PM bit settings are invalid in multiprocessor mode. In clock synchronous mode, clear this bit to 0. 1 0 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 R/W R/W Clock Select 0 and 1 These bits select the clock source for the baud rate generator. 00: clock (n = 0) 01: /4 clock (n = 1) 10: /16 clock (n = 2) 11: /64 clock (n = 3) For the relationship between the bit rate register setting and the baud rate, see section 16.3.8, Bit Rate Register (BRR). n is the decimal representation of the value of n in BRR (see section 16.3.8, Bit Rate Register (BRR)). Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 291 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.3.6 Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3) SCR3 is a register that enables or disables SCI3 transfer operations and interrupt requests, and is also used to select the transfer clock source. For details on interrupt requests, refer to section 16.7, Interrupts. Bit 7 Bit Name TIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, the TXI interrupt request is enabled. 6 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests are enabled. 5 4 3 TE RE MPIE 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Transmit Enable When this bit s set to 1, transmission is enabled. Receive Enable When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and OER status flags in SSR is disabled. On receiving data in which the multiprocessor bit is 1, this bit is automatically cleared and normal reception is resumed. For details, refer to section 16.6, Multiprocessor Communication Function. 2 TEIE 0 R/W Transmit End Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, TEI interrupt request is enabled. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 292 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Bit 1 0 Bit Name CKE1 CKE0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Clock Enable 0 and 1 Selects the clock source. * Asynchronous mode 00: On-chip baud rate generator 01: On-chip baud rate generator Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate from the SCK3 pin. 10: External clock Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate from the SCK3 pin. 11:Reserved * Clock synchronous mode 00: On-chip clock (SCK3 pin functions as clock output) 01: Reserved 10: External clock (SCK3 pin functions as clock input) 11: Reserved Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 293 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) SSR is a register containing status flags of the SCI3 and multiprocessor bits for transfer. 1 cannot be written to flags TDRE, RDRF, OER, PER, and FER; they can only be cleared. Bit 7 Bit Name TDRE Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description Transmit Data Register Empty Indicates whether TDR contains transmit data. [Setting conditions] * * * * 6 RDRF 0 R/W When the TE bit in SCR3 is 0 When data is transferred from TDR to TSR When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the transmit data is written to TDR [Clearing conditions] Receive Data Register Full Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR. [Setting condition] * When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 When data is read from RDR [Clearing conditions] * * 5 OER 0 R/W Overrun Error [Setting condition] * * When an overrun error occurs in reception When 0 is written to OER after reading OER = 1 [Clearing condition] 4 FER 0 R/W Framing Error [Setting condition] * * When a framing error occurs in reception When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1 [Clearing condition] Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 294 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Bit 3 Bit Name PER Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Parity Error [Setting condition] * * When a parity error is detected during reception When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1 [Clearing condition] 2 TEND 1 R Transmit End [Setting conditions] * * When the TE bit in SCR3 is 0 When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1frame serial transmit character When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the transmit data is written to TDR [Clearing conditions] * * 1 MPBR 0 R Multiprocessor Bit Receive MPBR stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive character data. When the RE bit in SCR3 is cleared to 0, its state is retained. 0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor Bit Transfer MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the transmit character data. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 295 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.3.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) BRR is an 8-bit register that adjusts the bit rate. The initial value of BRR is H'FF. Table 16.3 shows the relationship between the N setting in BRR and the n setting in bits CKS1 and CKS0 of SMR in asynchronous mode. Table 16.4 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in asynchronous mode. The values shown in both tables 16.3 and 16.4 are values in active (highspeed) mode. Table 16.5 shows the relationship between the N setting in BRR and the n setting in bits CKS1 and CKS0 of SMR in clock synchronous mode. The values shown in table 16.5 are values in active (high-speed) mode. The N setting in BRR and error for other operating frequencies and bit rates can be obtained by the following formulas: [Asynchronous Mode] N= x 106 - 1 64 x 22n-1 x B x 106 - 1 x 100 (N + 1) x B x 64 x 22n-1 Error (%) = [Clock Synchronous Mode] N= 8x 22n-1 xB x 106 - 1 [Legend] B: Bit rate (bit/s) N: BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 N 255) : Operating frequency (MHz) n: CSK1 and CSK0 settings in SMR (0 n 3) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 296 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Table 16.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1) Operating Frequency (MHz) 2 Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 141 103 207 103 51 25 12 6 2 1 1 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -6.99 8.51 0.00 -18.62 n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.097152 N 148 108 217 108 54 26 13 6 2 1 1 Error (%) -0.04 0.21 0.21 0.21 -0.70 1.14 -2.48 -2.48 13.78 4.86 -14.67 n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.4576 N 174 127 255 127 63 31 15 7 3 1 1 Error (%) -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 22.88 0.00 n 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- N 212 155 77 155 77 38 19 9 4 2 -- 3 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 -2.34 -2.34 0.00 -- Operating Frequency (MHz) 3.6864 Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 N 64 191 95 191 95 47 23 11 5 -- 2 Error (%) 0.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -- 0.00 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 70 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 6 3 2 4 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -6.99 0.00 8.51 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4.9152 N 86 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 7 4 3 Error (%) 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 7 4 3 5 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 1.73 1.73 0.00 1.73 [Legend] : A setting is available but error occurs Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 297 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Table 16.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2) Operating Frequency (MHz) 6 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 106 77 155 77 155 77 38 19 9 5 4 Error (%) -0.44 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 -2.34 0.00 -2.34 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6.144 N 108 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 9 5 4 Error (%) 0.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.40 0.00 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7.3728 N 130 95 191 95 191 95 47 23 11 6 5 Error (%) -0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5.33 0.00 Operating Frequency (MHz) 8 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 141 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 7 6 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 -6.99 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9.8304 N 174 127 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 9 7 Error (%) -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 177 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 9 7 10 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 1.73 0.00 1.73 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 212 155 77 155 77 155 77 38 19 11 9 12 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 0.00 -2.34 [Legend] : A setting is available but error occurs. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 298 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Table 16.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (3) Operating Frequency (MHz) 12.288 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 217 159 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 11 9 Error (%) 0.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.40 0.00 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- N 248 181 90 181 90 181 90 45 22 13 -- 14 Error (%) -0.17 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -0.93 -0.93 0.00 -- n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 14.7456 N 64 191 95 191 95 191 95 47 23 14 11 Error (%) 0.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.70 0.00 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 70 207 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 15 12 16 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 Operating Frequency (MHz) 18 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 79 233 116 233 116 233 116 58 28 17 14 Error (%) -0.12 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -0.96 1.02 0.00 -2.34 n 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 19 15 20 Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 0.00 1.73 [Legend] --: A setting is available but error occurs. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 299 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Table 16.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) (MHz) 2 2.097152 2.4576 3 3.6864 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 62500 65536 76800 93750 115200 125000 153600 156250 187500 192000 230400 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (MHz) 8 9.8304 10 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 17.2032 18 20 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 250000 307200 312500 375000 384000 437500 460800 500000 537600 562500 625000 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 300 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Table 16.5 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clock Synchronous Mode) (1) Operating Frequency (MHz) Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 250 500 1k 2.5k 5k 10k 25k 50k 100k 250k 500k 1M 2M 2.5M 4M [Legend] Blank: No setting is available. --: A setting is available but error occurs. *: Continuous transfer is not possible. 2 n 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 70 124 249 124 199 99 49 19 9 4 1 0* n -- 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 N -- 249 124 249 99 199 99 39 19 9 3 1 0* n -- 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 N -- 124 249 124 199 99 199 79 39 19 7 3 1 0* n -- -- -- -- 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- 0 10 N -- -- -- -- 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 -- -- 0* 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 249 124 249 99 199 99 159 79 39 15 7 3 1 -- 0* n 16 N Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 301 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Table 16.5 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clock Synchronous Mode) (2) Operating Frequency (MHz) Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 250 500 1k 2.5k 5k 10k 25k 50k 100k 250k 500k 1M 2M 2.5M 4M 18 n -- -- 3 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- -- N -- -- 140 69 112 224 112 179 89 44 17 8 4 -- -- -- n -- -- 3 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 -- 20 N -- -- 155 77 124 249 124 199 99 49 19 9 4 -- 1 -- [Legend] Blank: No setting is available. --: A setting is available but error occurs. *: Continuous transfer is not possible. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 302 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode Figure 16.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. One character (or frame) consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSB-first order), a parity bit (high or low level), and finally stop bits (high level). Inside the SCI3, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a doublebuffered structure, so data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. LSB Serial Start data bit Transmit/receive data MSB Parity bit Stop bit 1 Mark state 1 bit 7 or 8 bits 1 bit or none 1 or 2 bits One unit of transfer data (character or frame) Figure 16.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication 16.4.1 Clock Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at the SCK3 pin can be selected as the SCI3's serial clock, according to the setting of the COM bit in SMR and the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR3. When an external clock is input at the SCK3 pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used. When the SCI3 is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK3 pin. The frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 16.3. Clock Serial data 0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1 1 character (frame) Figure 16.3 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 303 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.4.2 SCI3 Initialization Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR3 to 0, then initialize the SCI3 as described below. When the operating mode, or transfer format, is changed for example, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and OER flags, or the contents of RDR. When the external clock is used in asynchronous mode, the clock must be supplied even during initialization. [1] Start initialization Set the clock selection in SCR3. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0. When the clock output is selected in asynchronous mode, clock is output immediately after CKE1 and CKE0 settings are made. When the clock output is selected at reception in clocked synchronous mode, clock is output immediately after CKE1, CKE0, and RE are set to 1. [2] [3] No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR3 to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits. For transmit (TE=1), also set the TxD bit in PMR1. [4] Set the data transfer format in SMR. Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. Not necessary if an external clock is used. Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR3 to 1. RE settings enable the RXD pin to be used. For transmission, set the TXD bit in PMR1 to 1 to enable the TXD output pin to be used. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits, depending on whether interrupts are required. In asynchronous mode, the bits are marked at transmission and idled at reception to wait for the start bit. Clear TE and RE bits in SCR3 to 0 [1] Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR3 Set data transfer format in SMR [2] Set value in BRR Wait [3] [4] Figure 16.4 Sample SCI3 Initialization Flowchart Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 304 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.4.3 Data Transmission Figure 16.5 shows an example of operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In transmission, the SCI3 operates as described below. 1. The SCI3 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. If the flag is cleared to 0, the SCI3 recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI3 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated. Continuous transmission is possible because the TXI interrupt routine writes next transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has been completed. 3. The SCI3 checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. 4. If the TDRE flag is 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. 5. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the "mark state" is entered, in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. 6. Figure 16.6 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode. Start bit Serial data 1 0 D0 D1 1 frame Transmit data D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 D0 Transmit data D1 1 frame D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 1 Mark state 1 TDRE TEND LSI TXI interrupt operation request generated User processing TDRE flag cleared to 0 Data written to TDR TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request generated Figure 16.5 Example of SCI3 Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 305 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Start transmission [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR [2] Yes All data transmitted? No [1] Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR. When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is automaticaly cleared to 0. [2] To continue serial transmission, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR. When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is automaticaly cleared to 0. [3] To output a break in serial transmission, after setting PCR to 1 and PDR to 0, clear TxD in PMR1 to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR3 to 0. Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1 Yes No Break output? Yes Clear PDR to 0 and set PCR to 1 [3] Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0 Figure 16.6 Sample Serial Transmission Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 306 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.4.4 Serial Data Reception Figure 16.7 shows an example of operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial reception, the SCI3 operates as described below. 1. The SCI3 monitors the communication line. If a start bit is detected, the SCI3 performs internal synchronization, receives receive data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit. 2. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1), the OER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. 3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. 4. If a framing error is detected (when the stop bit is 0), the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. 5. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Continuous reception is possible because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has been completed. Start bit Serial data 1 0 D0 D1 1 frame Receive data D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 D0 Receive data D1 1 frame D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 0 Mark state (idle state) 1 RDRF FER LSI operation User processing RXI request RDRF cleared to 0 RDR data read 0 stop bit detected ERI request in response to framing error Framing error processing Figure 16.7 Example of SCI3 Reception in Asynchronous Mode (8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 307 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Table 16.6 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive error is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving data. Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the OER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 16.8 shows a sample flow chart for serial data reception. Table 16.6 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling SSR Status Flag RDRF* 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Note: * OER 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 FER 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 PER 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Receive Data Lost Transferred to RDR Transferred to RDR Lost Lost Transferred to RDR Lost Receive Error Type Overrun error Framing error Parity error Overrun error + framing error Overrun error + parity error Framing error + parity error Overrun error + framing error + parity error The RDRF flag retains the state it had before data reception. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 308 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Start reception Read OER, PER, and FER flags in SSR [1] Yes OER+PER+FER = 1 [4] No Error processing (Continued on next page) Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1 Yes [2] Read receive data in RDR [1] Read the OER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. If a receive error occurs, performs the appropriate error processing. [2] Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1, then read the receive data in RDR. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically. [3] To continue serial reception, before the stop bit for the current frame is received, read the RDRF flag and read RDR. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically. [4] If a receive error occurs, read the OER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error processing, ensure that the OER, PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if any of these flags are set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the value of the input port corresponding to the RxD pin. Yes All data received? (A) No Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0 Figure 16.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 309 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) [4] Error processing No OER = 1 Yes Overrun error processing No FER = 1 Yes Yes Break? No Framing error processing No PER = 1 Yes Parity error processing (A) Clear OER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to 0 Figure 16.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (2) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 310 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.5 Operation in Clock Synchronous Mode Figure 16.9 shows the general format for clock synchronous communication. In clock synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received synchronous with clock pulses. A single character in the transmit data consists of the 8-bit data starting from the LSB. In clock synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of the synchronization clock to the next. In clock synchronous mode, the SCI3 receives data in synchronous with the rising edge of the synchronization clock. After 8-bit data is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state. In clock synchronous mode, no parity or multiprocessor bit is added. Inside the SCI3, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication through the use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. 8 bits * Synchronization clock LSB Serial data Don't care Note: * High except in continuous transfer Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 MSB Bit 7 Don't care One unit of transfer data (character or frame) * Figure 16.9 Data Format in Clock Synchronous Communication 16.5.1 Clock Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external synchronization clock input at the SCK3 pin can be selected, according to the setting of the COM bit in SMR and CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR3. When the SCI3 is operated on an internal clock, the synchronization clock is output from the SCK3 pin. Eight synchronization clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high. 16.5.2 SCI3 Initialization Before transmitting and receiving data, the SCI3 should be initialized as described in a sample flowchart in figure 16.4. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 311 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.5.3 Serial Data Transmission Figure 16.10 shows an example of SCI3 operation for transmission in clock synchronous mode. In serial transmission, the SCI3 operates as described below. 1. The SCI3 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if the flag is 0, the SCI3 recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. The SCI3 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated. 3. 8-bit data is sent from the TxD pin synchronized with the output clock when output clock mode has been specified, and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock has been specified. Serial data is transmitted sequentially from the LSB (bit 0), from the TxD pin. 4. The SCI3 checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7). 5. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission of the next frame is started. 6. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TDRE flag maintains the output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. The SCK3 pin is fixed high at the end of transmission. 7. Figure 16.11 shows a sample flow chart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (OER, FER, or PER) is set to 1. Make sure that the receive error flags are cleared to 0 before starting transmission. Serial clock Serial data Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 1 frame TDRE TEND TXI interrupt LSI operation request generated User processing TDRE flag cleared to 0 Data written to TDR 1 frame TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request generated Figure 16.10 Example of SCI3 Transmission in Clock Synchronous Mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 312 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Start transmission [1] [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR No TDRE = 1 Yes [2] Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR. When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is automatically cleared to 0 and clocks are output to start the data transmission. To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR. When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is automatically cleared to 0. Write transmit data to TDR [2] All data transmitted? No Yes Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1 Yes Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0 Figure 16.11 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Clock Synchronous Mode) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 313 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.5.4 Serial Data Reception (Clock Synchronous Mode) Figure 16.12 shows an example of SCI3 operation for reception in clock synchronous mode. In serial reception, the SCI3 operates as described below. 1. The SCI3 performs internal initialization synchronous with a synchronization clock input or output, starts receiving data. 2. The SCI3 stores the receive data in RSR. 3. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag in SSR is still set to 1), the OER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated, receive data is not transferred to RDR, and the RDRF flag remains to be set to 1. 4. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Serial clock Serial data Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 1 frame RDRF OER LSI operation User processing RXI interrupt request generated RDRF flag cleared to 0 RDR data read 1 frame RXI interrupt request generated ERI interrupt request generated by overrun error Overrun error processing RDR data has not been read (RDRF = 1) Figure 16.12 Example of SCI3 Reception in Clock Synchronous Mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 314 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the OER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 16.13 shows a sample flow chart for serial data reception. Start reception [1] Read OER flag in SSR [1] [2] Yes OER = 1 [4] No Error processing (Continued below) Read RDRF flag in SSR [2] [4] RDRF = 1 Yes [3] Read the OER flag in SSR to determine if there is an error. If an overrun error has occurred, execute overrun error processing. Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR. When data is read from RDR, the RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. To continue serial reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, reading the RDRF flag and reading RDR should be finished. When data is read from RDR, the RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. If an overrun error occurs, read the OER flag in SSR, and after performing the appropriate error processing, clear the OER flag to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if the OER flag is set to 1. No Read receive data in RDR Yes All data received? No Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0 [4] Error processing Overrun error processing Clear OER flag in SSR to 0 Figure 16.13 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (Clock Synchronous Mode) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 315 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.5.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception Figure 16.14 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations. The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive operations. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI3 has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND flags are set to 1, clear TE to 0. Then simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. To switch from receive mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI3 has finished reception, clear RE to 0. Then after checking that the RDRF and receive error flags (OER, FER, and PER) are cleared to 0, simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 316 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Start transmission/reception [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR [1] Read OER flag in SSR Yes [4] Error processing OER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR [2] Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR. When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is automatically cleared to 0. [2] Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR. When data is read from RDR, the RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. [3] To continue serial transmission/ reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR. Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible. Then write data to TDR. When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is automatically cleared to 0. When data is read from RDR, the RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. [4] If an overrun error occurs, read the OER flag in SSR, and after performing the appropriate error processing, clear the OER flag to 0. Transmission/reception cannot be resumed if the OER flag is set to 1. For overrun error processing, see figure 16.13. Yes All data received? No [3] Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 Figure 16.14 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations (Clock Synchronous Mode) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 317 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.6 Multiprocessor Communication Function Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer between a number of processors sharing communication lines by asynchronous serial communication using the multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data. When multiprocessor communication is performed, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles; an ID transmission cycle that specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID transmission cycle; if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure 16.15 shows an example of inter-processor communication using the multiprocessor format. The transmitting station first sends the ID code of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added. When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose IDs do not match continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. The SCI3 uses the MPIE bit in SCR3 to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1, transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags, RDRF, FER, and OER, to 1, are inhibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On reception of a receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPBR bit in SSR is set to 1 and the MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt is generated. When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is rendered invalid. All other bit settings are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 318 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Transmitting station Serial transmission line Receiving station A (ID = 01) Serial data Receiving station B (ID = 02) H'01 (MPB = 1) Receiving station C (ID = 03) H'AA (MPB = 0) Receiving station D (ID = 04) ID transmission cycle = Data transmission cycle = receiving station Data transmission to specification receiving station specified by ID Legend MPB: Multiprocessor bit Figure 16.15 Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) 16.6.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission Figure 16.16 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI3 operations are the same as those in asynchronous mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 319 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Start transmission [1] [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 or 1, then write transmit data to TDR. When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is automatically cleared to 0. To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR. When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is automatically cleared to 0. To output a break in serial transmission, set the port PCR to 1, clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR3 to 0. No TDRE = 1 [2] Yes Set MPBT bit in SSR [3] Write transmit data to TDR Yes [2] All data transmitted? No Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1 Yes No [3] Break output? Yes Clear PDR to 0 and set PCR to 1 Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0 Figure 16.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 320 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.6.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception Figure 16.17 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. On receiving data with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI interrupt request is generated at this time. All other SCI3 operations are the same as those in asynchronous mode. Figure 16.18 shows an example of SCI3 operation for multiprocessor format reception. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 321 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Start reception [1] [2] [1] [2] Yes [3] Set MPIE bit in SCR3 to 1 Read OER and FER flags in SSR FER+OER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR No This station's ID? Yes Read OER and FER flags in SSR Yes FER+OER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR Yes All data received? No [A] Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0 Set the MPIE bit in SCR3 to 1. Read OER and FER in SSR to check for errors. Receive error processing is performed in cases where a receive error occurs. Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and compare it with this station's ID. If the data is not this station's ID, set the MPIE bit to 1 again. When data is read from RDR, the RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the data in RDR. If a receive error occurs, read the OER and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error processing, ensure that the OER and FER flags are all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if either of these flags is set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value. [5] Error processing (Continued on next page) Figure 16.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 322 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) [5] Error processing No OER = 1 Yes Overrun error processing No FER = 1 Yes Yes Break? No Framing error processing [A] Clear OER, and FER flags in SSR to 0 Figure 16.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 323 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Start bit Serial data 1 0 D0 Receive data (ID1) D1 1 frame D7 MPB 1 Stop Start bit bit 1 0 D0 Receive data (Data1) D1 1 frame D7 MPB 0 Stop bit 1 Mark state (idle state) 1 MPIE RDRF RDR value LSI operation User processing RXI interrupt request MPIE cleared to 0 RDRF flag cleared to 0 RDR data read When data is not this station's ID, MPIE is set to 1 again ID1 RXI interrupt request is not generated, and RDR retains its state (a) When data does not match this receiver's ID Start bit Serial data 1 0 D0 Receive data (ID2) D1 1 frame D7 MPB 1 Stop Start bit bit 1 0 D0 Receive data (Data2) D1 1 frame D7 MPB 0 Stop bit 1 Mark state (idle state) 1 MPIE RDRF RDR value LSI operation User processing ID1 ID2 Data2 RXI interrupt request MPIE cleared to 0 RDRF flag cleared to 0 RDR data read RXI interrupt request When data is this station's ID, reception is continued RDRF flag cleared to 0 RDR data read MPIE set to 1 again (b) When data matches this receiver's ID Figure 16.18 Example of SCI3 Reception Using Multiprocessor Format (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 324 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.7 Interrupts SCI3 creates the following six interrupt requests: transmission end, transmit data empty, receive data full, and receive errors (overrun error, framing error, and parity error). Table 16.7 shows the interrupt sources. Table 16.7 SCI3 Interrupt Requests Interrupt Requests Receive Data Full Transmit Data Empty Transmission End Receive Error Abbreviation RXI TXI TEI ERI Interrupt Sources Setting RDRF in SSR Setting TDRE in SSR Setting TEND in SSR Setting OER, FER, and PER in SSR The initial value of the TDRE flag in SSR is 1. Thus, when the TIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 before transferring the transmit data to TDR, a TXI interrupt request is generated even if the transmit data is not ready. The initial value of the TEND flag in SSR is 1. Thus, when the TEIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 before transferring the transmit data to TDR, a TEI interrupt request is generated even if the transmit data has not been sent. It is possible to make use of the most of these interrupt requests efficiently by transferring the transmit data to TDR in the interrupt routine. To prevent the generation of these interrupt requests (TXI and TEI), set the enable bits (TIE and TEIE) that correspond to these interrupt requests to 1, after transferring the transmit data to TDR. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 325 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.8 16.8.1 Usage Notes Break Detection and Processing When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value directly. In a break, the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, setting the FER flag, and possibly the PER flag. Note that as the SCI3 continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again. 16.8.2 Mark State and Break Sending When the TXD or TXD2 bit in PMR1 is 1, the TxD pin is used as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) and level are determined by PCR and PDR. This can be used to set the TxD pin to mark state (high level) or send a break during serial data transmission. To maintain the communication line at mark state until TE is set to 1, set both PCR and PDR to 1, and then set the TXD bit to 1. At this point, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 1 is output from the TxD pin. To send a break during serial transmission, first set PCR to 1 and clear PDR to 0, and then set the TXD bit to 1. At this point, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port regardless of the current transmission state, and 0 is output from the TxD pin. 16.8.3 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clock Synchronous Mode Only) Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (OER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 326 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) 16.8.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode In asynchronous mode, the SCI3 operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer rate. In reception, the SCI3 samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the basic clock as shown in figure 16.19. Thus, the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below. 1 D - 0.5 M = (0.5 - )- - (L - 0.5) F x 100(%) 2N N ... Formula (1) [Legend] N: D: L: F: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16) Clock duty (D = 0.5 to 1.0) Frame length (L = 9 to 12) Absolute value of clock rate deviation Assuming values of F (absolute value of clock rate deviation) = 0 and D (clock duty) = 0.5 in formula (1), the reception margin can be given by the formula. M = {0.5 - 1/(2 x 16)} x 100 [%] = 46.875% However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed for in system design. 16 clocks 8 clocks 0 Internal basic clock Receive data (RxD) Synchronization sampling timing Data sampling timing 7 15 0 7 15 0 Start bit D0 D1 Figure 16.19 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 327 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 328 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Section 17 I C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) The I C bus interface 2 conforms to and provides a subset of the Philips I C bus (inter-IC bus) 2 interface functions. The register configuration that controls the I C bus differs partly from the Philips configuration, however. Figure 17.1 shows a block diagram of the I C bus interface 2. Figure 17.2 shows an example of I/O pin connections to external circuits. 2 2 2 2 17.1 Features 2 * Selection of I C format or clock synchronous serial format * Continuous transmission/reception Since the shift register, transmit data register, and receive data register are independent from each other, the continuous transmission/reception can be performed. I C bus format * Start and stop conditions generated automatically in master mode * Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving * Automatic loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting * Bit synchronization/wait function In master mode, the state of SCL is monitored per bit, and the timing is synchronized automatically. If transmission/reception is not yet possible, set the SCL to low until preparations are completed. * Six interrupt sources Transmit data empty (including slave-address match), transmit end, receive data full (including slave-address match), arbitration lost, NACK detection, and stop condition detection * Direct bus drive Two pins, SCL and SDA pins, function as NMOS open-drain outputs when the bus drive function is selected. Clock synchronous format * Four interrupt sources Transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and overrun error 2 IFIIC10A_000020020200 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 329 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Transfer clock generation circuit SCL Output control Transmission/ reception control circuit ICCR1 ICCR2 ICMR Noise canceler ICDRT SAR SDA Output control ICDRS Noise canceler Address comparator ICDRR Bus state decision circuit Arbitration decision circuit ICIER Interrupt generator ICSR [Legend] ICCR1: ICCR2: ICMR: ICSR: ICIER: ICDRT: ICDRR: ICDRS: SAR: I C bus control register 1 I2C bus control register 2 I2C bus mode register I2C bus status register I2C bus interrupt enable register I2C bus transmit data register I2C bus receive data register I2C bus shift register Slave address register 2 Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of I C Bus Interface 2 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 330 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Internal data bus Interrupt request Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Vcc Vcc SCL in SCL out SCL SCL SDA in SDA out SDA SDA SCL SDA (Master) SCL in SCL out SCL in SCL out SDA in SDA out (Slave 1) SDA in SDA out (Slave 2) Figure 17.2 External Circuit Connections of I/O Pins 17.2 Input/Output Pins 2 Table 17.1 summarizes the input/output pins used by the I C bus interface 2. Table 17.1 I C Bus Interface Pins Name Serial clock Serial data Abbreviation SCL SDA I/O I/O I/O Function IIC serial clock input/output IIC serial data input/output 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 331 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 SCL SDA Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 17.3 2 Register Descriptions The I C bus interface 2 has the following registers: * I C bus control register 1 (ICCR1) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * I C bus control register 2 (ICCR2) * I C bus mode register (ICMR) * I C bus interrupt enable register (ICIER) * I C bus status register (ICSR) * I C bus slave address register (SAR) * I C bus transmit data register (ICDRT) * I C bus receive data register (ICDRR) * I C bus shift register (ICDRS) 17.3.1 I C Bus Control Register 1 (ICCR1) 2 2 ICCR1 enables or disables the I C bus interface 2, controls transmission or reception, and selects master or slave mode, transmission or reception, and transfer clock frequency in master mode. Bit 7 Bit Name ICE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description I C Bus Interface Enable 0: This module is halted. (SCL and SDA pins are set to port function.) 1: This bit is enabled for transfer operations. (SCL and SDA pins are bus drive state.) 6 RCVD 0 R/W Reception Disable This bit enables or disables the next operation when TRS is 0 and ICDRR is read. 0: Enables next reception 1: Disables next reception 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 332 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Bit 5 4 Bit Name MST TRS Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Master/Slave Select Transmit/Receive Select In master mode with the I C bus format, when arbitration is lost, MST and TRS are both reset by hardware, causing a transition to slave receive mode. Modification of the TRS bit should be made between transfer frames. After data receive has been started in slave receive mode, when the first seven bits of the receive data agree with the slave address that is set to SAR and the eighth bit is 1, TRS is automatically set to 1. If an overrun error occurs in master mode with the clock synchronous serial format, MST is cleared to 0 and slave receive mode is entered. Operating modes are described below according to MST and TRS combination. When clock synchronous serial format is selected and MST is 1, clock is output. 00: Slave receive mode 01: Slave transmit mode 10: Master receive mode 11: Master transmit mode 2 3 2 1 0 CKS3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Transfer Clock Select 3 to 0 These bits should be set according to the necessary transfer rate (see table 17.2) in master mode. In slave mode, these bits are used for reservation of the setup time in transmit mode. The time is 10 tcyc when CKS3 = 0 and 20 tcyc when CKS3 = 1. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 333 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Table 17.2 Transfer Rate Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bit 0 = 5 MHz = 8 MHz Transfer Rate = 10 MHz = 16 MHz = 20 MHz CKS3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 /28 /40 /48 /64 /80 /100 /112 /128 /56 /80 /96 /128 /160 /200 /224 /256 179 kHz 125 kHz 104 kHz 78.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 50.0 kHz 44.6 kHz 39.1 kHz 89.3 kHz 62.5 kHz 52.1 kHz 39.1 kHz 31.3 kHz 25.0 kHz 22.3 kHz 19.5 kHz 286 kHz 200 kHz 167 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 80.0 kHz 71.4 kHz 62.5 kHz 143 kHz 100 kHz 83.3 kHz 62.5 kHz 50.0 kHz 40.0 kHz 35.7 kHz 31.3 kHz 357 kHz 250 kHz 208 kHz 156 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 89.3 kHz 78.1 kHz 179 kHz 125 kHz 104 kHz 78.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 50.0 kHz 44.6 kHz 39.1 kHz 571 kHz 400 kHz 333 kHz 250 kHz 200 kHz 160 kHz 143 kHz 125 kHz 286 kHz 200 kHz 167 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 80.0 kHz 71.4 kHz 62.5 kHz 714 kHz 500 kHz 417 kHz 313 kHz 250 kHz 200 kHz 179 kHz 156 kHz 357 kHz 250 kHz 208 kHz 156 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 89.3 kHz 78.1 kHz Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 334 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 17.3.2 I C Bus Control Register 2 (ICCR2) 2 ICCR1 issues start/stop conditions, manipulates the SDA pin, monitors the SCL pin, and controls 2 reset in the control part of the I C bus interface 2. Bit 7 Bit Name BBSY Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Bus Busy This bit enables to confirm whether the I C bus is occupied or released and to issue start/stop conditions in master mode. With the clock synchronous serial format, 2 this bit has no meaning. With the I C bus format, this bit is set to 1 when the SDA level changes from high to low under the condition of SCL = high, assuming that the start condition has been issued. This bit is cleared to 0 when the SDA level changes from low to high under the condition of SCL = high, assuming that the stop condition has been issued. Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP to issue a start condition. Follow this procedure when also retransmitting a start condition. Write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP to issue a stop condition. To issue start/stop conditions, use the MOV instruction. 6 SCP 1 W Start/Stop Issue Condition Disable The SCP bit controls the issue of start/stop conditions in master mode. To issue a start condition, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. This bit is always read as 1. If 1 is written, the data is not stored. 5 SDAO 1 R/W SDA Output Value Control This bit is used with SDAOP when modifying output level of SDA. This bit should not be manipulated during transfer. 0: When reading, SDA pin outputs low. When writing, SDA pin is changed to output low. 1: When reading, SDA pin outputs high. When writing, SDA pin is changed to output Hi-Z (outputs high by external pull-up resistance). 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 335 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Bit 4 Bit Name SDAOP Initial Value 1 R/W R/W Description SDAO Write Protect This bit controls change of output level of the SDA pin by modifying the SDAO bit. To change the output level, clear SDAO and SDAOP to 0 or set SDAO to 1 and clear SDAOP to 0 by the MOV instruction. This bit is always read as 1. 3 2 1 SCLO IICRST 1 1 0 R R/W This bit monitors SCL output level. When SCLO is 1, SCL pin outputs high. When SCLO is 0, SCL pin outputs low. Reserved This bit is always read as 1, and cannot be modified. IIC Control Part Reset This bit resets the control part except for I C registers. If this bit is set to 1 when hang-up occurs because of 2 2 communication failure during I C operation, I C control part can be reset without setting ports and initializing registers. 2 0 1 Reserved This bit is always read as 1, and cannot be modified. 17.3.3 I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) 2 ICMR selects whether the MSB or LSB is transferred first, performs master mode wait control, and selects the transfer bit count. Bit 7 Bit Name MLS Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description MSB-First/LSB-First Select 0: MSB-first 1: LSB-first Set this bit to 0 when the I C bus format is used. 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 336 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Bit 6 Bit Name WAIT Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Wait Insertion Bit In master mode with the I C bus format, this bit selects whether to insert a wait after data transfer except the acknowledge bit. When WAIT is set to 1, after the fall of the clock for the final data bit, low period is extended for two transfer clocks. If WAIT is cleared to 0, data and acknowledge bits are transferred consecutively with no wait inserted. The setting of this bit is invalid in slave mode with the I C bus format or with the clock synchronous serial format. 2 2 5, 4 3 BCWP All 1 1 R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified. BC Write Protect This bit controls the BC2 to BC0 modifications. When modifying BC2 to BC0, this bit should be cleared to 0 and use the MOV instruction. In clock synchronous serial mode, BC should not be modified. 0: When writing, values of BC2 to BC0 are set. 1: When reading, 1 is always read. When writing, settings of BC2 to BC0 are invalid. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 337 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name BC2 BC1 BC0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Bit Counter 2 to 0 These bits specify the number of bits to be transferred next. When read, the remaining number of transfer bits is 2 indicated. With the I C bus format, the data is transferred with one addition acknowledge bit. Bit BC2 to BC0 settings should be made during an interval between transfer frames. If bits BC2 to BC0 are set to a value other than 000, the setting should be made while the SCL pin is low. The value returns to 000 at the end of a data transfer, including the acknowledge bit. With the clock synchronous serial format, these bits should not be modified. I C Bus Format 000: 9 bits 001: 2 bits 010: 3 bits 011: 4 bits 100: 5 bits 101: 6 bits 110: 7 bits 111: 8 bits 2 Clock Synchronous Serial Format 000: 8 bits 001: 1 bits 010: 2 bits 011: 3 bits 100: 4 bits 101: 5 bits 110: 6 bits 111: 7 bits 17.3.4 I C Bus Interrupt Enable Register (ICIER) 2 ICIER enables or disables interrupt sources and acknowledge bits, sets acknowledge bits to be transferred, and confirms acknowledge bits to be received. Bit 7 Bit Name TIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit Interrupt Enable When the TDRE bit in ICSR is set to 1, this bit enables or disables the transmit data empty interrupt (TXI). 0: Transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) is disabled. 1: Transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) is enabled. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 338 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Bit 6 Bit Name TEIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit End Interrupt Enable This bit enables or disables the transmit end interrupt (TEI) at the rising of the ninth clock while the TDRE bit in ICSR is 1. TEI can be canceled by clearing the TEND bit or the TEIE bit to 0. 0: Transmit end interrupt request (TEI) is disabled. 1: Transmit end interrupt request (TEI) is enabled. 5 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable This bit enables or disables the receive data full interrupt request (RXI) and the overrun error interrupt request (ERI) with the clock synchronous format, when a receive data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR and the RDRF bit in ICSR is set to 1. RXI can be canceled by clearing the RDRF or RIE bit to 0. 0: Receive data full interrupt request (RXI) and overrun error interrupt request (ERI) with the clock synchronous format are disabled. 1: Receive data full interrupt request (RXI) and overrun error interrupt request (ERI) with the clock synchronous format are enabled. 4 NAKIE 0 R/W NACK Receive Interrupt Enable This bit enables or disables the NACK receive interrupt request (NAKI) and the overrun error (setting of the OVE bit in ICSR) interrupt request (ERI) with the clock synchronous format, when the NACKF and AL bits in ICSR are set to 1. NAKI can be canceled by clearing the NACKF, OVE, or NAKIE bit to 0. 0: NACK receive interrupt request (NAKI) is disabled. 1: NACK receive interrupt request (NAKI) is enabled. 3 STIE 0 R/W Stop Condition Detection Interrupt Enable 0: Stop condition detection interrupt request (STPI) is disabled. 1: Stop condition detection interrupt request (STPI) is enabled. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 339 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Bit 2 Bit Name ACKE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Acknowledge Bit Judgment Select 0: The value of the receive acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed. 1: If the receive acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is halted. 1 ACKBR 0 R Receive Acknowledge In transmit mode, this bit stores the acknowledge data that are returned by the receive device. This bit cannot be modified. 0: Receive acknowledge = 0 1: Receive acknowledge = 1 0 ACKBT 0 R/W Transmit Acknowledge In receive mode, this bit specifies the bit to be sent at the acknowledge timing. 0: 0 is sent at the acknowledge timing. 1: 1 is sent at the acknowledge timing. 17.3.5 I C Bus Status Register (ICSR) 2 ICSR performs confirmation of interrupt request flags and status. Bit 7 Bit Name TDRE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit Data Register Empty [Setting conditions] * * * * When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS and ICDRT becomes empty When TRS is set When a start condition (including re-transfer) has been issued When transmit mode is entered from receive mode in slave mode When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When data is written to ICDRT with an instruction [Clearing conditions] * * Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 340 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Bit 6 Bit Name TEND Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit End [Setting conditions] * * When the ninth clock of SCL rises with the I C bus format while the TDRE flag is 1 When the final bit of transmit frame is sent with the clock synchronous serial format When 0 is written in TEND after reading TEND = 1 When data is written to ICDRT with an instruction 2 [Clearing conditions] * * 5 RDRF 0 R/W Receive Data Register Full [Setting condition] * When a receive data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR When 0 is written in RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 When ICDRR is read with an instruction [Clearing conditions] * * 4 NACKF 0 R/W No Acknowledge Detection Flag [Setting condition] * When no acknowledge is detected from the receive device in transmission while the ACKE bit in ICIER is 1 When 0 is written in NACKF after reading NACKF = 1 [Clearing condition] * Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 341 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Bit 3 Bit Name STOP Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Stop Condition Detection Flag [Setting conditions] * * In master mode, when a stop condition is detected after frame transfer In slave mode, when a stop condition is detected after the following events: A general call is invoked A start condition is detected The first byte in the slave address matches the address set in the SAR [Clearing condition] * When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1 2 AL/OVE 0 R/W Arbitration Lost Flag/Overrun Error Flag This flag indicates that arbitration was lost in master 2 mode with the I C bus format and that the final bit has been received while RDRF = 1 with the clock synchronous format. When two or more master devices attempt to seize the 2 bus at nearly the same time, if the I C bus interface detects data differing from the data it sent, it sets AL to 1 to indicate that the bus has been taken by another master. [Setting conditions] * * * If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit mode When the SDA pin outputs high in master mode while a start condition is detected When the final bit is received with the clock synchronous format while RDRF = 1 When 0 is written in AL/OVE after reading AL/OVE=1 [Clearing condition] * Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 342 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Bit 1 Bit Name AAS Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Slave Address Recognition Flag In slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVA6 to SVA0 in SAR. [Setting conditions] * * When the slave address is detected in slave receive mode When the general call address is detected in slave receive mode. When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS=1 2 [Clearing condition] * 0 ADZ 0 R/W General Call Address Recognition Flag This bit is valid in I C bus format slave receive mode. [Setting condition] * When the general call address is detected in slave receive mode When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ=1 [Clearing condition] * 17.3.6 Slave Address Register (SAR) SAR selects the communication format and sets the slave address. When the chip is in slave mode 2 with the I C bus format, if the upper 7 bits of SAR match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition, the chip operates as the slave device. Bit 7 to 1 Bit Name SVA6 to SVA0 Initial Value All 0 R/W R/W Description Slave Address 6 to 0 These bits set a unique address in bits SVA6 to SVA0, differing form the addresses of other slave devices 2 connected to the I C bus. 0 R/W Format Select 0: I C bus format is selected. 1: Clock synchronous serial format is selected. 2 0 FS Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 343 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 17.3.7 I C Bus Transmit Data Register (ICDRT) 2 ICDRT is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the transmit data. When ICDRT detects the space in the shift register (ICDRS), it transfers the transmit data which is written in ICDRT to ICDRS and starts transferring data. If the next transfer data is written to ICDRT during transferring data of ICDRS, continuous transfer is possible. If the MLS bit of ICMR is set to 1 and when the data is written to ICDRT, the MSB/LSB inverted data is read. The initial value of ICDRT is H'FF. 17.3.8 I C Bus Receive Data Register (ICDRR) 2 ICDRR is an 8-bit register that stores the receive data. When data of one byte is received, ICDRR transfers the receive data from ICDRS to ICDRR and the next data can be received. ICDRR is a receive-only register, therefore the CPU cannot write to this register. The initial value of ICDRR is H'FF. 17.3.9 I C Bus Shift Register (ICDRS) 2 ICDRS is a register that is used to transfer/receive data. In transmission, data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS and the data is sent from the SDA pin. In reception, data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR after data of one byte is received. This register cannot be read directly from the CPU. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 344 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 17.4 2 Operation 2 The I C bus interface can communicate either in I C bus mode or clock synchronous serial mode by setting FS in SAR. 17.4.1 I C Bus Format 2 2 2 Figure 17.3 shows the I C bus formats. Figure 17.4 shows the I C bus timing. The first frame following a start condition always consists of 8 bits. (a) I2C bus format (FS = 0) S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n A 1 m A/A 1 P 1 n: Transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) m: Transfer frame count (m 1) (b) I2C bus format (Start condition retransmission, FS = 0) S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n1 m1 A/A 1 S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n2 m2 A/A 1 P 1 n1 and n2: Transfer bit count (n1 and n2 = 1 to 8) m1 and m2: Transfer frame count (m1 and m2 1) Figure 17.3 I C Bus Formats 2 SDA SCL S 1-7 SLA 8 R/W 9 A 1-7 DATA 2 8 9 A 1-7 DATA 8 9 A P Figure 17.4 I C Bus Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 345 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) [Legend] S: Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is high. SLA: Slave address R/W: Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device when R/W is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/W is 0. A: Acknowledge. The receive device drives SDA to low. DATA: Transfer data P: Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high. 17.4.2 Master Transmit Operation In master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. For master transmit mode operation timing, refer to figures 17.5 and 17.6. The transmission procedure and operations in master transmit mode are described below. 1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR1 to 1. Set the MLS and WAIT bits in ICMR and the CKS3 to CKS0 bits in ICCR1 to 1. (Initial setting) 2. Read the BBSY flag in ICCR2 to confirm that the bus is free. Set the MST and TRS bits in ICCR1 to select master transmit mode. Then, write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP using MOV instruction. (Start condition issued) This generates the start condition. 3. After confirming that TDRE in ICSR has been set, write the transmit data (the first byte data show the slave address and R/W) to ICDRT. At this time, TDRE is automatically cleared to 0, and data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS. TDRE is set again. 4. When transmission of one byte data is completed while TDRE is 1, TEND in ICSR is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. Read the ACKBR bit in ICIER, and confirm that the slave device has been selected. Then, write second byte data to ICDRT. When ACKBR is 1, the slave device has not been acknowledged, so issue the stop condition. To issue the stop condition, write 0 to BBSY and SCP using MOV instruction. SCL is fixed low until the transmit data is prepared or the stop condition is issued. 5. The transmit data after the second byte is written to ICDRT every time TDRE is set. 6. Write the number of bytes to be transmitted to ICDRT. Wait until TEND is set (the end of last byte data transmission) while TDRE is 1, or wait for NACK (NACKF in ICSR = 1) from the receive device while ACKE in ICIER is 1. Then, issue the stop condition to clear TEND or NACKF. 7. When the STOP bit in ICSR is set to 1, the operation returns to the slave receive mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 346 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) SCL (Master output) SDA (Master output) 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 R/W 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 Slave address SDA (Slave output) TDRE A TEND ICDRT Address + R/W Data 1 Data 2 ICDRS Address + R/W Data 1 User processing [2] Instruction of start condition issuance [4] Write data to ICDRT (second byte) [3] Write data to ICDRT (first byte) [5] Write data to ICDRT (third byte) Figure 17.5 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (1) SCL (Master output) SDA (Master output) SDA (Slave output) TDRE A 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 9 A/A TEND ICDRT Data n ICDRS Data n User [5] Write data to ICDRT processing [6] Issue stop condition. Clear TEND. [7] Set slave receive mode Figure 17.6 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (2) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 347 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 17.4.3 Master Receive Operation In master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data from the slave device, and returns an acknowledge signal. For master receive mode operation timing, refer to figures 17.7 and 17.8. The reception procedure and operations in master receive mode are shown below. 1. Clear the TEND bit in ICSR to 0, then clear the TRS bit in ICCR1 to 0 to switch from master transmit mode to master receive mode. Then, clear the TDRE bit to 0. 2. When ICDRR is read (dummy data read), reception is started, and the receive clock is output, and data received, in synchronization with the internal clock. The master device outputs the level specified by ACKBT in ICIER to SDA, at the 9th receive clock pulse. 3. After the reception of first frame data is completed, the RDRF bit in ICST is set to 1 at the rise of 9th receive clock pulse. At this time, the receive data is read by reading ICDRR, and RDRF is cleared to 0. 4. The continuous reception is performed by reading ICDRR every time RDRF is set. If 8th receive clock pulse falls after reading ICDRR by the other processing while RDRF is 1, SCL is fixed low until ICDRR is read. 5. If next frame is the last receive data, set the RCVD bit in ICCR1 to 1 before reading ICDRR. This enables the issuance of the stop condition after the next reception. 6. When the RDRF bit is set to 1 at rise of the 9th receive clock pulse, issue the stage condition. 7. When the STOP bit in ICSR is set to 1, read ICDRR. Then clear the RCVD bit to 0. 8. The operation returns to the slave receive mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 348 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Master transmit mode SCL (Master output) SDA (Master output) SDA (Slave output) TDRE A 9 1 Master receive mode 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 7 TEND TRS RDRF ICDRS Data 1 ICDRR User processing Data 1 [3] Read ICDRR [1] Clear TDRE after clearing TEND and TRS [2] Read ICDRR (dummy read) Figure 17.7 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 349 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) SCL (Master output) SDA (Master output) SDA (Slave output) RDRF 9 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A/A Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 RCVD ICDRS Data n-1 Data n ICDRR User processing Data n-1 Data n [5] Read ICDRR after setting RCVD [7] Read ICDRR, and clear RCVD [6] Issue stop condition [8] Set slave receive mode Figure 17.8 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) 17.4.4 Slave Transmit Operation In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, while the master device outputs the receive clock and returns an acknowledge signal. For slave transmit mode operation timing, refer to figures 17.9 and 17.10. The transmission procedure and operations in slave transmit mode are described below. 1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR1 to 1. Set the MLS and WAIT bits in ICMR and the CKS3 to CKS0 bits in ICCR1 to 1. (Initial setting) Set the MST and TRS bits in ICCR1 to select slave receive mode, and wait until the slave address matches. 2. When the slave address matches in the first frame following detection of the start condition, the slave device outputs the level specified by ACKBT in ICIER to SDA, at the rise of the 9th clock pulse. At this time, if the 8th bit data (R/W) is 1, the TRS and ICSR bits in ICCR1 are set to 1, and the mode changes to slave transmit mode automatically. The continuous transmission is performed by writing transmit data to ICDRT every time TDRE is set. 3. If TDRE is set after writing last transmit data to ICDRT, wait until TEND in ICSR is set to 1, with TDRE = 1. When TEND is set, clear TEND. 4. Clear TRS for the end processing, and read ICDRR (dummy read). SCL is free. 5. Clear TDRE. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 350 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Slave receive mode SCL (Master output) SDA (Master output) SCL (Slave output) SDA (Slave output) TDRE 9 Slave transmit mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 1 A Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 7 TEND TRS ICDRT Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 ICDRS Data 1 Data 2 ICDRR User processing [2] Write data to ICDRT (data 1) [2] Write data to ICDRT (data 2) [2] Write data to ICDRT (data 3) Figure 17.9 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 351 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Slave receive mode Slave transmit mode SCL (Master output) SDA (Master output) SCL (Slave output) SDA (Slave output) TDRE 9 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 TEND TRS ICDRT ICDRS Data n ICDRR User processing [3] Clear TEND [4] Read ICDRR (dummy read) after clearing TRS [5] Clear TDRE Figure 17.10 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (2) 17.4.5 Slave Receive Operation In slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. For slave receive mode operation timing, refer to figures 17.11 and 17.12. The reception procedure and operations in slave receive mode are described below. 1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR1 to 1. Set the MLS and WAIT bits in ICMR and the CKS3 to CKS0 bits in ICCR1 to 1. (Initial setting) Set the MST and TRS bits in ICCR1 to select slave receive mode, and wait until the slave address matches. 2. When the slave address matches in the first frame following detection of the start condition, the slave device outputs the level specified by ACKBT in ICIER to SDA, at the rise of the 9th clock pulse. At the same time, RDRF in ICSR is set to read ICDRR (dummy read). (Since the read data show the slave address and R/W, it is not used.) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 352 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 3. Read ICDRR every time RDRF is set. If 8th receive clock pulse falls while RDRF is 1, SCL is fixed low until ICDRR is read. The change of the acknowledge before reading ICDRR, to be returned to the master device, is reflected to the next transmit frame. 4. The last byte data is read by reading ICDRR. SCL (Master output) SDA (Master output) SCL (Slave output) SDA (Slave output) 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 7 A A RDRF ICDRS Data 1 Data 2 ICDRR User processing Data 1 [2] Read ICDRR (dummy read) [2] Read ICDRR Figure 17.11 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) SCL (Master output) SDA (Master output) SCL (Slave output) SDA (Slave output) 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 9 A A RDRF ICDRS Data 1 Data 2 ICDRR User processing Data 1 [3] Set ACKBT [3] Read ICDRR [4] Read ICDRR Figure 17.12 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 353 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 17.4.6 Clock Synchronous Serial Format This module can be operated with the clock synchronous serial format, by setting the FS bit in SAR to 1. When the MST bit in ICCR1 is 1, the transfer clock output from SCL is selected. When MST is 0, the external clock input is selected. Data Transfer Format Figure 17.13 shows the clock synchronous serial transfer format. The transfer data is output from the rise to the fall of the SCL clock, and the data at the rising edge of the SCL clock is guaranteed. The MLS bit in ICMR sets the order of data transfer, in either the MSB first or LSB first. The output level of SDA can be changed during the transfer wait, by the SDAO bit in ICCR2. SCL SDA Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Figure 17.13 Clock Synchronous Serial Transfer Format Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 354 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Transmit Operation In transmit mode, transmit data is output from SDA, in synchronization with the fall of the transfer clock. The transfer clock is output when MST in ICCR1 is 1, and is input when MST is 0. For transmit mode operation timing, refer to figure 17.14. The transmission procedure and operations in transmit mode are described below. 1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR1 to 1. Set the MST and CKS3 to CKS0 bits in ICCR1 to 1. (Initial setting) 2. Set the TRS bit in ICCR1 to select the transmit mode. Then, TDRE in ICSR is set. 3. Confirm that TDRE has been set. Then, write the transmit data to ICDRT. The data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS, and TDRE is set automatically. The continuous transmission is performed by writing data to ICDRT every time TDRE is set. When changing from transmit mode to receive mode, clear TRS while TDRE is 1. SCL SDA (Output) TRS TDRE ICDRT ICDRS 1 2 7 Bit 6 8 Bit 7 1 Bit 0 7 Bit 6 8 Bit 7 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 2 Data 2 Data 3 Data 3 User processing [3] Write data [3] Write data to ICDRT to ICDRT [2] Set TRS [3] Write data to ICDRT [3] Write data to ICDRT Figure 17.14 Transmit Mode Operation Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 355 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Receive Operation In receive mode, data is latched at the rise of the transfer clock. The transfer clock is output when MST in ICCR1 is 1, and is input when MST is 0. For receive mode operation timing, refer to figure 17.15. The reception procedure and operations in receive mode are described below. 1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR1 to 1. Set the MST and CKS3 to CKS0 bits in ICCR1 to 1. (Initial setting) 2. When the transfer clock is output, set MST to 1 to start outputting the receive clock. 3. When the receive operation is completed, data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR and RDRF in ICSR is set. When MST = 1, the next byte can be received, so the clock is continually output. The continuous reception is performed by reading ICDRR every time RDRF is set. When the 8th clock is risen while RDRF is 1, the overrun is detected and AL/OVE in ICSR is set. At this time, the previous reception data is retained in ICDRR. 4. To stop receiving when MST = 1, set RCVD in ICCR1 to 1, then read ICDRR. Then, SCL is fixed high after receiving the next byte data. SCL SDA (Input) MST TRS 1 2 7 Bit 6 8 Bit 7 1 Bit 0 7 Bit 6 8 Bit 7 1 Bit 0 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 RDRF ICDRS ICDRR Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 1 [2] Set MST (when outputting the clock) Data 2 User processing [3] Read ICDRR [3] Read ICDRR Figure 17.15 Receive Mode Operation Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 356 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 17.4.7 Noise Filter The signal levels on the SCL and SDA pins are internally latched via the noise filter. Figure 17.16 shows a block diagram of the noise filter circuit. The noise filter consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA) input signal is sampled on the system clock. When both outputs of the latches match, its level is output to other blocks by the match detector. If they do not match, the previous value is held. Sampling clock C SCL or SDA input signal D Latch Q D C Q Latch Match detector Internal SCL or SDA signal System clock cycle Sampling clock Figure 17.16 Block Diagram of Noise Filter 17.4.8 Example of Use 2 Flowcharts in respective modes that use the I C bus interface are shown in figures 17.17 to 17.20. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 357 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Start Initialize Read BBSY in ICCR2 No [1] BBSY=0 ? Yes Set MST and TRS in ICCR1 to 1. Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP. Write transmit data in ICDRT Read TEND in ICSR No [5] TEND=1 ? Yes Read ACKBR in ICIER [6] ACKBR=0 ? Yes Transmit mode? Yes No Mater receive mode [12] Clear the STOP flag. [13] Issue the stop condition. [8] TDRE=1 ? Yes No Last byte? [9] Yes Write transmit data in ICDRT Read TEND in ICSR No [10] TEND=1 ? Yes Clear TEND in ICSR Clear STOP in ICSR Write 0 to BBSY and SCP Read STOP in ICSR No [14] STOP=1 ? Yes Set MST to 1 and TRS to 0 in ICCR1 Clear TDRE in ICSR End [11] [12] [13] [14] Wait for the creation of stop condition. [15] Set slave receive mode. Clear TDRE. No [11] Clear the TEND flag. [8] [9] Wait for ICDRT empty. Set the last byte of transmit data. [3] [2] [3] [4] [4] [5] [6] [7] Issue the start candition. Set the first byte (slave address + R/W) of transmit data. Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. Test the acknowledge transferred from the specified slave device. Set the second and subsequent bytes (except for the final byte) of transmit data. [1] [2] Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines. Set master transmit mode. [10] Wait for last byte to be transmitted. Write transmit data in ICDRT Read TDRE in ICSR No [7] [15] Figure 17.17 Sample Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 358 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Mater receive mode [1] Clear TEND in ICSR Clear TRS in ICCR1 to 0 Clear TDRE in ICSR Clear ACKBT in ICIER to 0 Dummy-read ICDRR Read RDRF in ICSR No RDRF=1 ? Yes Last receive - 1? No Read ICDRR Yes [5] [4] [2] Clear TEND, select master receive mode, and then clear TDRE.* Set acknowledge to the transmit device.* Dummy-read ICDDR.* Wait for 1 byte to be received Check whether it is the (last receive - 1). Read the receive data last. Set acknowledge of the final byte. Disable continuous reception (RCVD = 1). Read the (final byte - 1) of receive data. Wait for the last byte to be receive. [2] [1] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [3] [10] Clear the STOP flag. [6] [11] Issue the stop condition. [12] Wait for the creation of stop condition. Set ACKBT in ICIER to 1 [7] [13] Read the last byte of receive data. [14] Clear RCVD. Set RCVD in ICCR1 to 1 Read ICDRR Read RDRF in ICSR No RDRF=1 ? Yes Clear STOP in ICSR. Write 0 to BBSY and SCP Read STOP in ICSR No [12] [10] [9] [8] [15] Set slave receive mode. [11] STOP=1 ? Yes Read ICDRR [13] [14] Clear RCVD in ICCR1 to 0 Clear MST in ICCR1 to 0 End [15] Note: Do not activate an interrupt during the execution of steps [1] to [3]. Supplementary explanation: When one byte is received, steps [2] to [6] are skipped after step [1], before jumping to step [7]. The step [8] is dummy-read in ICDRR. Figure 17.18 Sample Flowchart for Master Receive Mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 359 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Slave transmit mode Clear AAS in ICSR Write transmit data in ICDRT Read TDRE in ICSR No [3] TDRE=1 ? Yes No Last byte? [1] Clear the AAS flag. [1] [2] Set transmit data for ICDRT (except for the last data). [3] Wait for ICDRT empty. [2] [4] Set the last byte of transmit data. [5] Wait for the last byte to be transmitted. [6] Clear the TEND flag . [7] Set slave receive mode. [8] Dummy-read ICDRR to release the SCL line. [4] [9] Clear the TDRE flag. Yes Write transmit data in ICDRT Read TEND in ICSR No [5] TEND=1 ? Yes Clear TEND in ICSR Clear TRS in ICCR1 to 0 Dummy read ICDRR Clear TDRE in ICSR End [6] [7] [8] [9] Figure 17.19 Sample Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 360 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Slave receive mode [1] Clear the AAS flag. Clear AAS in ICSR Clear ACKBT in ICIER to 0 Dummy-read ICDRR [1] [2] Set acknowledge to the transmit device. [2] [3] Dummy-read ICDRR. [3] [4] Wait for 1 byte to be received. [5] Check whether it is the (last receive - 1). [4] [6] Read the receive data. [7] Set acknowledge of the last byte. Read RDRF in ICSR No RDRF=1 ? Yes Last receive - 1? Yes [5] [8] Read the (last byte - 1) of receive data. [9] Wait the last byte to be received. No Read ICDRR [6] [10] Read for the last byte of receive data. Set ACKBT in ICIER to 1 [7] Read ICDRR Read RDRF in ICSR No [8] [9] RDRF=1 ? Yes Read ICDRR End [10] Supplementary explanation: When one byte is received, steps [2] to [6] are skipped after step [1], before jumping to step [7]. The step [8] is dummy-read in ICDRR. Figure 17.20 Sample Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 361 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 17.5 Interrupt Request There are six interrupt requests in this module; transmit data empty, transmit end, receive data full, NACK receive, STOP recognition, and arbitration lost/overrun error. Table 17.3 shows the contents of each interrupt request. Table 17.3 Interrupt Requests Interrupt Request Abbreviation Interrupt Condition (TDRE=1) * (TIE=1) (TEND=1) * (TEIE=1) (RDRF=1) * (RIE=1) (STOP=1) * (STIE=1) {(NACKF=1)+(AL=1)} * (NAKIE=1) I C Mode 2 Clock Synchronous Mode Transmit Data Empty TXI Transmit End Receive Data Full STOP Recognition NACK Receive Arbitration Lost/Overrun Error TEI RXI STPI NAKI x x When interrupt conditions described in table 17.3 are 1 and the I bit in CCR is 0, the CPU executes an interrupt exception processing. Interrupt sources should be cleared in the exception processing. TDRE and TEND are automatically cleared to 0 by writing the transmit data to ICDRT. RDRF are automatically cleared to 0 by reading ICDRR. TDRE is set to 1 again at the same time when transmit data is written to ICDRT. When TDRE is cleared to 0, then an excessive data of one byte may be transmitted. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 362 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 17.6 Bit Synchronous Circuit In master mode, this module has a possibility that high level period may be short in the two states described below. * When SCL is driven to low by the slave device * When the rising speed of SCL is lowered by the load of the SCL line (load capacitance or pullup resistance) Therefore, it monitors SCL and communicates by bit with synchronization. Figure 17.21 shows the timing of the bit synchronous circuit and table 17.4 shows the time when SCL output changes from low to Hi-Z then SCL is monitored. SCL monitor timing reference clock SCL VIH Internal SCL Figure 17.21 The Timing of the Bit Synchronous Circuit Table 17.4 Time for Monitoring SCL CKS3 0 CKS2 0 1 1 0 1 Time for Monitoring SCL 7.5 tcyc 19.5 tcyc 17.5 tcyc 41.5 tcyc Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 363 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 17.7 17.7.1 Usage Notes Issue (Retransmission) of Start/Stop Conditions In master mode, when the start/stop conditions are issued (retransmitted) at the specific timing under the following condition 1 or 2, such conditions may not be output successfully. To avoid this, issue (retransmit) the start/stop conditions after the fall of the ninth clock is confirmed. Check 2 the SCLO bit in the I C control register 2 (IICR2) to confirm the fall of the ninth clock. 1. When the rising of SCL falls behind the time specified in section 17.6, Bit Synchronous Circuit, by the load of the SCL bus (load capacitance or pull-up resistance) 2. When the bit synchronous circuit is activated by extending the low period of eighth and ninth clocks, that is driven by the slave device 17.7.2 WAIT Setting in I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) 2 If the WAIT bit is set to 1, and the SCL signal is driven low for two or more transfer clocks by the slave device at the eighth and ninth clocks, the high period of ninth clock may be shortened. To avoid this, set the WAIT bit in ICMR to 0. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 364 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) 17.7.3 (1) Restriction in Use of Multi-Master Restriction on Setting Transfer Rate 2 In multi-master usage when I C transfer rate setting of this LSI is lower than those of the other masters, unexpected length of SCL may occasionally be output. To avoid this, the specified value must be greater than or equal to the value produced by multiplying the fastest transfer rate among the other masters by 1/1.8. For example, when the transfer rate of the fastest bus master among the 2 other bus masters is 400 kbps, the transfer rate of the I C of this LSI must be set to at least 223 kbps (= 400/1.8). (2) Restriction on Use of Bit Manipulation Instructions to Set MST and TRS When master transmission is selected by consecutively manipulating the MST and TRS bits in multi-master usage, an arbitration loss during execution of the bit-manipulation instruction for TRS leads to the contradictory situation where AL in ICSR is 1 in master transmit mode (MST = 1, TRS = 1). Ways to avoid this effect are listed below. * Use the MOV instruction to set MST and TRS in multi-master usage. * When arbitration is lost, confirm that MST = 0 and TRS = 0. If the setting of MST = 0 and TRS = 0 is not confirmed, set MST = 0 and TRS = 0 again. 17.7.4 Continuous Data Reception in Master Receive Mode In master receive mode, when SCL is fixed low on the falling edge of the 8th clock while the RDRF bit is set to 1 and ICDRR is read around the falling edge of the 8th clock, the clock is only fixed low in the 8th clock of the next round of data reception. The SCL is then released from its fixed state without reading ICDRR and the 9th clock is output. As a result, some receive data is lost. Ways to avoid this phenomenon are listed below. * Read ICDRR in master receive mode before the rising edge of the 8th clock. * Set RCVD to 1 in master receive mode and perform communication in units of one byte. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 365 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 17 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 366 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 18 A/D Converter Section 18 A/D Converter This LSI includes a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D converter that allows up to eight analog input channels to be selected. The block diagram of the A/D converter is shown in figure 18.1. 18.1 Features * 10-bit resolution * Eight input channels * Conversion time: at least 3.5 s per channel (at 20-MHz operation) * Two operating modes Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion Scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels * Four data registers Conversion results are held in a data register for each channel * Sample-and-hold function * Two conversion start methods Software External trigger signal * Interrupt request An A/D conversion end interrupt request (ADI) can be generated ADCMS32A_000020020200 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 367 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 18 A/D Converter Module data bus Internal data bus AVCC 10-bit D/A Successive approximations register A D D R A A D D R B A D D R C A D D R D A D C S R A D C R AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 Analog multiplexer + Control circuit Comparator Sample-andhold circuit ADI interrupt ADTRG [Legend] ADCR: ADCSR: ADDRA: ADDRB: ADDRC: ADDRD: A/D control register A/D control/status register A/D data register A A/D data register B A/D data register C A/D data register D Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 368 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Bus interface Section 18 A/D Converter 18.2 Input/Output Pins Table 18.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter. The 8 analog input pins are divided into two groups; analog input pins 0 to 3 (AN0 to AN3) comprising group 0, analog input pins 4 to 7 (AN4 to AN7) comprising group 1. The AVcc pin is the power supply pin for the analog block in the A/D converter. Table 18.1 Pin Configuration Pin Name Analog power supply pin Analog input pin 0 Analog input pin 1 Analog input pin 2 Analog input pin 3 Analog input pin 4 Analog input pin 5 Analog input pin 6 Analog input pin 7 A/D external trigger input pin Abbreviation AVCC AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 ADTRG I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input External trigger input for starting A/D conversion Group 1 analog input Function Analog block power supply Group 0 analog input Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 369 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 18 A/D Converter 18.3 Register Descriptions The A/D converter has the following registers. * A/D data register A (ADDRA) * A/D data register B (ADDRB) * A/D data register C (ADDRC) * A/D data register D (ADDRD) * A/D control/status register (ADCSR) * A/D control register (ADCR) 18.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) There are four 16-bit read-only ADDR registers; ADDRA to ADDRD, used to store the results of A/D conversion. The ADDR registers, which store a conversion result for each analog input channel, are shown in table 18.2. The converted 10-bit data is stored in bits 15 to 6. The lower 6 bits are always read as 0. The data bus width between the CPU and the A/D converter is 8 bits. The upper byte can be read directly from the CPU, however the lower byte should be read via a temporary register. The temporary register contents are transferred from the ADDR when the upper byte data is read. When reading ADDR, read the upper byte first then the lower one, or read in word units. The ADDR is initialized to H'0000. Table 18.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers Analog Input Channel Group 0 AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 Group 1 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 A/D Data Register to Be Stored Results of A/D Conversion ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 370 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 18 A/D Converter 18.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ADCSR consists of the control bits and conversion end status bits of the A/D converter. Bit 7 Bit Name ADF Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description A/D End Flag [Setting conditions] * * When A/D conversion ends in single mode When A/D conversion ends once on all the channels selected in scan mode When 0 is written after reading ADF = 1 [Clearing condition] * 6 ADIE 0 R/W A/D Interrupt Enable A/D conversion end interrupt request (ADI) is enabled by ADF when this bit is set to 1 5 ADST 0 R/W A/D Start Setting this bit to 1 starts A/D conversion. In single mode, this bit is cleared to 0 automatically when conversion on the specified channel is complete. In scan mode, conversion continues sequentially on the specified channels until this bit is cleared to 0 by software, a reset, or a transition to standby mode. 4 SCAN 0 R/W Scan Mode Selects single mode or scan mode as the A/D conversion operating mode. 0: Single mode 1: Scan mode 3 CKS 0 R/W Clock Select Selects the A/D conversions time. 0: Conversion time = 134 states (max.) 1: Conversion time = 70 states (max.) Clear the ADST bit to 0 before switching the conversion time. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 371 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 18 A/D Converter Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name CH2 CH1 CH0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Channel Select 2 to 0 Select analog input channels. When SCAN = 0 000: AN0 001: AN1 010: AN2 011: AN3 100: AN4 101: AN5 110: AN6 111: AN7 When SCAN = 1 000: AN0 001: AN0 and AN1 010: AN0 to AN2 011: AN0 to AN3 100: AN4 101: AN4 and AN5 110: AN4 to AN6 111: AN4 to AN7 18.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ADCR enables A/D conversion started by an external trigger signal. Bit 7 Bit Name TRGE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Trigger Enable A/D conversion is started at the falling edge and the rising edge of the external trigger signal (ADTRG) when this bit is set to 1. The selection between the falling edge and rising edge of the external trigger pin (ADTRG) conforms to the WPEG5 bit in the interrupt edge select register 2 (IEGR2) 6 to 1 0 -- -- All 1 0 -- R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 1. Reserved Do not set this bit to 1, though the bit is readable/writable. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 372 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 18 A/D Converter 18.4 Operation The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. It has two operating modes; single mode and scan mode. When changing the operating mode or analog input channel, in order to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the bit ADST in ADCSR to 0. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or analog input channel is changed. 18.4.1 Single Mode In single mode, A/D conversion is performed once for the analog input of the specified single channel as follows: 1. A/D conversion is started when the ADST bit in ADCSR is set to 1, according to software or external trigger input. 2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to the corresponding A/D data register of the channel. 3. On completion of conversion, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated. 4. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. When A/D conversion ends, the ADST bit is automatically cleared to 0 and the A/D converter enters the wait state. 18.4.2 Scan Mode In scan mode, A/D conversion is performed sequentially for the analog input of the specified channels (four channels maximum) as follows: 1. When the ADST bit in ADCSR is set to 1 by software or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the first channel in the group (AN0 when CH2 = 0, AN4 when CH2 = 1). 2. When A/D conversion for each channel is completed, the result is sequentially transferred to the A/D data register corresponding to each channel. 3. When conversion of all the selected channels is completed, the ADF flag in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt requested is generated. A/D conversion starts again on the first channel in the group. 4. The ADST bit is not automatically cleared to 0. Steps [2] and [3] are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 373 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 18 A/D Converter 18.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog input when the A/D conversion start delay time (tD) has passed after the ADST bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 18.2 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 18.3 shows the A/D conversion time. As indicated in figure 18.2, the A/D conversion time includes tD and the input sampling time. The length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 18.3. In scan mode, the values given in table 18.3 apply to the first conversion time. In the second and subsequent conversions, the conversion time is 128 states (fixed) when CKS = 0 and 66 states (fixed) when CKS = 1. (1) Address (2) Write signal Input sampling timing ADF tD tSPL tCONV [Legend] ADCSR write cycle (1): ADCSR address (2): A/D conversion start delay time tD: tSPL: Input sampling time tCONV: A/D conversion time Figure 18.2 A/D Conversion Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 374 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 18 A/D Converter Table 18.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) CKS = 0 Item A/D conversion start delay time Input sampling time A/D conversion time Symbol tD tSPL tCONV Min. 6 -- 131 Typ. -- 31 -- Max. 9 -- 134 Min. 4 -- 69 CKS = 1 Typ. -- 15 -- Max. 5 -- 70 Note: All values represent the number of states. 18.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing A/D conversion can also be started by an external trigger input. When the TRGE bit in ADCR is set to 1, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge at the ADTRG input pin sets the ADST bit in ADCSR to 1, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as when the bit ADST has been set to 1 by software. Figure 18.3 shows the timing. ADTRG Internal trigger signal ADST A/D conversion Figure 18.3 External Trigger Input Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 375 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 18 A/D Converter 18.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions This LSI's A/D conversion accuracy definitions are given below. * Resolution The number of A/D converter digital output codes * Quantization error The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 18.4). * Offset error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value 0000000000 to 0000000001 (see figure 18.5). * Full-scale error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from 1111111110 to 1111111111 (see figure 18.5). * Nonlinearity error The deviation from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic as the voltage changes from zero to full scale. This does not include the offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error. * Absolute accuracy The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes offset error, fullscale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 376 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 18 A/D Converter Digital output 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 1 8 Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Quantization error 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 FS 8 Analog input voltage Figure 18.4 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (1) Full-scale error Digital output Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Nonlinearity error Actual A/D conversion characteristic FS Analog input voltage Offset error Figure 18.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (2) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 377 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 18 A/D Converter 18.6 18.6.1 Usage Notes Permissible Signal Source Impedance This LSI's analog input is designed such that conversion accuracy is guaranteed for an input signal for which the signal source impedance is 5 k or less. This specification is provided to enable the A/D converter's sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time; if the sensor output impedance exceeds 5 k, charging may be insufficient and it may not be possible to guarantee A/D conversion accuracy. However, for A/D conversion in single mode with a large capacitance provided externally, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal input resistance of 10 k, and the signal source impedance is ignored. However, as a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/s or greater) (see figure 18.6). When converting a high-speed analog signal or converting in scan mode, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted. 18.6.2 Influences on Absolute Accuracy Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely affect absolute accuracy. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND. Care is also required to ensure that filter circuits do not interfere with digital signals or act as antennas on the mounting board. This LSI Sensor output impedance up to 5 k Sensor input Low-pass filter C to 0.1 F Cin = 15 pF A/D converter equivalent circuit 10 k 20 pF Figure 18.6 Analog Input Circuit Example Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 378 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits This LSI can include a band-gap circuit (BGR, band-gap regulator), a power-on reset circuit and low-voltage detection circuit. BGR supplies a reference voltage to the on-chip oscillator and low-voltage detection circuit. Figure 19.1 shows the block diagram of how BGR is allocated. The low-voltage detection (LVD) circuit consists of two circuits: LVDI (interrupt by low voltage detection) and LVDR (reset by low voltage detection) circuits. This circuit is used to prevent abnormal operation (program runaway) from occurring due to the power supply voltage fall and to recreate the state before the power supply voltage fall when the power supply voltage rises again. Even if the power supply voltage falls, the unstable state when the power supply voltage falls below the guaranteed operating voltage can be removed by entering standby mode when exceeding the guaranteed operating voltage and during normal operation. Thus, system stability can be improved. If the power supply voltage falls more, the reset state is automatically entered. If the power supply voltage rises again, the reset state is held for a specified period, then active mode is automatically entered. Figure 19.2 is a block diagram of the power-on reset circuit and the low-voltage detection circuit. LVI0000A_000020030300 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 379 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits 19.1 Features * BGR circuit Supplies stable reference voltage covering the entire operating voltage range and the operating temperature range. * Power-on reset circuit Uses an external capacitor to generate an internal reset signal when power is first supplied. * Low-voltage detection circuit LVDR: Monitors the power-supply voltage, and generates an internal reset signal when the voltage falls below a given value. LVDI: Monitors the power-supply voltage, and generates an interrupt when the voltage falls below or rises above respective given values. Two detection levels for reset generation voltage are available: when only the LVDR circuit is used, or when the LVDI and LVDR circuits are both used. * Reset source decision The source of a reset can be decided by reading the reset source decision register in the reset exception handler. VCLSEL Vcc Step-down circuit VCL On-chip oscillator BGR VBGR RCSTP LVD (low-voltage detection circuit) [Legend] Vcc: VCL: VBGR: VCLSEL: RCSTP: Power supply Internal power supply generated from Vcc by the step-down circuit Reference voltage from BGR Select signal for the source of the on-chip oscillator power supply On-chip oscillator stop signal Figure 19.1 Block Diagram around BGR Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 380 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits 150 k RES CRES Noise filter circuit Noise filter circuit OVF CK PSS R R Q S Power-on reset circuit Internal reset signal External power supply Vcc Ladder network Vreset VintU VintD LVDRES LVDCR ExtD LVDINT Interrupt control circuit LVDSR ExtU VDDII VBGR [Legend] PSS: LVDCR: LVDSR: VBGR: ExtD: ExtU: VDDII: Prescaler S Low-voltage-detection control register Low-voltage-detection status register Reference voltage from BGR Compared voltage for falling external input voltage Compared voltage for rising external input voltage Bit 5 in LVDCR Interrupt request Figure 19.2 Block Diagram of Power-On Reset Circuit and Low-Voltage Detection Circuit Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 381 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Internal data bus Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits 19.2 Register Descriptions The low-voltage detection circuit has the following registers. * Low-voltage-detection control register (LVDCR) * Low-voltage-detection status register (LVDSR) * Reset source decision register (LVDRF) 19.2.1 Low-Voltage-Detection Control Register (LVDCR) LVDCR selects the compared voltage of the LVDI circuit, sets the detection levels for the LVDR circuit, enables or disables the LVDR circuit, and enables or disables generation of an interrupt when the power-supply voltage rises above or falls below the respective levels. Table 19.1 shows the relationship between the LVDCR settings and functions to be selected. LVDCR should be set according to table 19.1. Bit 7, 6 5 Bit Name VDDII Initial Value All 1 1* 1 R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. LVDR External Compared Voltage Input Inhibit 0: Use external voltage as LVDI compared voltage 1: Use internal voltage as LVDI compared voltage 4 3 LVDSEL* 2 1 1 R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. LVDR Detection Level Select 0: Reset detection voltage is 2.3 V (Typ.) 1: Reset detection voltage is 3.6 V (Typ.) When the falling or rising voltage detection interrupt is used, the reset detection voltage of 2.3 V (Typ.) should be used. When only a reset detection interrupt is used, reset detection voltage of 3.6 V (Typ.) should be used. 2 1 Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 382 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits Bit 1 Bit Name LVDDE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Voltage-Fall-Interrupt Enable 0: Interrupt on the power-supply voltage falling disabled 1: Interrupt on the power-supply voltage falling enabled 0 LVDUE 0 R/W Voltage-Rise-Interrupt Enable 0: Interrupt on the power-supply voltage rising disabled 1: Interrupt on the power-supply voltage rising enabled Notes: 1. Not initialized by an LVDR but initialized by a power-on reset or a watchdog timer reset. 2. For 3.3-V-specification models, this bit 3 of this register is a reserved bit (initial value is 0) and the reset detection voltage is 2.3 V (typ.). Table 19.1 LVDCR Settings and Select Functions LVDCR Settings Power-On Reset Select Functions Low-Voltage- Low-VoltageDetection Fall Detection Rise Interrupt Interrupt VDDII LVDSEL LVDDE LVDUE LVDR * * * Note: * 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 Set these bits if necessary. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 383 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits 19.2.2 Low-Voltage-Detection Status Register (LVDSR) LVDSR indicates whether the power-supply voltage falls below or rises above the respective given values. Bit 7 to 2 1 Bit Name LVDDF Initial Value All 1 0* R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. LVD Power-Supply Voltage Fall Flag [Setting condition] * When the power-supply voltage falls below Vint (D) (Typ. = 3.7 V) When writing 0 to this bit after reading it as 1 [Clearing condition] * 0 LVDUF 0* R/W LVD Power-Supply Voltage Rise Flag [Setting condition] * When the power supply voltage falls below Vint (D) while the LVDUE bit in LVDCR is set to 1 and then rises above Vint (U) (Typ. = 4.0 V) before falling below Vreset1 (Typ. = 2.3 V) When writing 0 to this bit after reading it as 1 [Clearing condition] * Note: * Initialized by an LVDR. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 384 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits 19.2.3 Reset Source Decision Register (LVDRF) LVDSR indicates sources of resets. Bit 7 to 2 Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description Reserved The read value is undefined and these bits cannot be modified. 1 PRST * 1 R/W POR/LVDR Detection [Setting conditions] * * When a power-on reset has occurred When an LVDR has occurred [Clearing condition] When writing 0 0 WRST * 2 R/W WDT Reset Detection [Setting condition] * * * * * When a reset by the WDT has occurred When a power-on reset has occurred When an LVDR has occurred When an reset signal input on the external pin has asserted When writing 0 [Clearing conditions] Notes: 1. The initial value depends on the condition when the PRST bit is set or cleared. 2. The initial value depends on the condition when the WRST bit is set or cleared. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 385 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits 19.3 19.3.1 Operations Power-On Reset Circuit Figure 19.3 shows the timing of the operation of the power-on reset circuit. As the power-supply voltage rises, the capacitor which is externally connected to the RES pin is gradually charged via the internal pull-up resistor (Typ. 150 k). While the RES signal is driven low, the prescaler S and the entire chip retains the reset state. When the level on the RES signal reaches the specified value, the prescaler S is released from its reset state and it starts counting. The OVF signal is generated to release the internal reset signal after the prescaler S has counted 131,072 cycles of the clock. The noise filter circuit which removes noise with less than 400 ns (Typ.) is included to prevent the incorrect operation of this LSI caused by noise on the RES signal. To achieve stable operation of this LSI, the power supply needs to rise to its full level and settles within the specified time. The maximum time required for the power supply to rise and settle (tPWON) is determined by the oscillation frequency (fOSC) and capacitance which is connected to RES pin (CRES). Where tPWON is assumed to be the time required to reach 90 % of the full level of the power supply, the power supply circuit should be designed to satisfy the following formula. tPWON (ms) 90 x CRES (F) + 162/fOSC (MHz) (tPWON 3000 ms, CRES 0.22 F, and fOSC = 10 in 2-MHz to 10-MHz operation) Note that the power supply voltage (Vcc) must fall below Vpor = 100 mV to remove charge on the RES pin. After that, it can be risen. To remove charge on the RES pin, it is recommended that the diode should be placed to Vcc. If the power supply voltage (Vcc) rises from the point above Vpor, a power-on reset may not occur. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 386 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits tPWON Vcc Vpor Vss RES Vss PSS-reset signal OVF Internal reset signal 131,072 cycles PSS counter starts Reset released Figure 19.3 Operational Timing of Power-On Reset Circuit 19.3.2 Low-Voltage Detection Circuit LVDR (Reset by Low Voltage Detection) Circuit: Figure 19.4 shows the timing of the operation of the LVDR circuit. The LVDR circuit is kept enabled during the LSI's operation. When the power-supply voltage falls below the Vreset voltage (the value selected by the LVDSEL bit: Typ. = 2.3 V or 3.6 V), the LVDR circuit clears the LVDRES signal to 0, and resets prescaler S. The low-voltage detection reset state remains in place until a power-on reset is generated. When the power-supply voltage rises above the Vreset voltage (Typ. = 3.6 V) regardless of LVDSEL bit setting) again, the LVDR circuit sets the LVDRES signal to 1 and prescaler S starts counting. When 131,072 clock () cycles have been counted, the internal reset signal is released. In this case, the LVDSEL bit in LVDCR is initialized (the Vreset voltage: Typ. = 3.6 V) though the VDDII bit is not initialized. If the power supply voltage (Vcc) falls below Vpor = 100 mV, a power-on reset occurs. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 387 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits VCC Vreset VLVDRmin VSS LVDRES PSS-reset signal OVF Internal reset signal 131,072 cycles PSS counter starts Reset released Figure 19.4 Operating Timing of LVDR Circuit Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 388 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits Low Voltage Detection Interrupt (LVDI) Circuit (When Internally Generated Voltage is used for Detection): Figure 19.5 shows the timing of the operation of the LVDI circuit. The LVDI circuit is enabled after a power-on reset, however, the interrupt request is disabled. To enable the LVDI, the LVDDF bit and LVDUF bit in LVDSR must be cleared to 0 and then the LVDDE bit or LVDUE bit in LVDCR must be set to 1. After that, the output settings of ports must be made. When the power-supply voltage falls below Vint (D) (Typ. = 3.7 V) voltage, the LVDI circuit clears the LVDINT signal to 0 and sets the LVDDF bit to 1. If the LVDDE bit is 1 at this time, an IRQ0 interrupt request is generated. In this case, the necessary data must be saved in the external EEPROM and a transition to standby mode or subsleep mode must be made. Until this processing is completed, the power supply voltage must be higher than the lower limit of the guaranteed operating voltage. When the power-supply voltage does not fall below the Vreset1 (Typ. = 2.3 V) voltage and rises above the Vint (U) (Typ. = 4.0 V) voltage, the LVDI circuit sets the LVDINT signal to 1. If the LVDUE bit is 1 at this time, the LVDUF bit in LVDSR is set to 1 and an IRQ0 interrupt request is simultaneously generated. If the power supply voltage (Vcc) falls below the Vreset1 (Typ. = 2.3 V) voltage, this LSI enters low voltage detection reset operation (when LVDRE = 1). Vcc Vint (U) Vint (D) Vreset1 VSS LVDINT LVDDE LVDDF LVDUE LVDUF IRQ0 interrupt generated IRQ0 interrupt generated Figure 19.5 Operational Timing of LVDI Circuit Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 389 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits Low Voltage Detection Interrupt (LVDI) Circuit (When Voltages Input via ExtU and ExtD Pins are used for Detection): Figure 19.6 shows the timing of the LVDI circuit. The LVDI circuit is enabled after a power-on reset, however, the interrupt request is disabled. To enable the LVDI, the LVDDF and LVDUF bits in LVDSR must be cleared to 0 and the LVDDE or LVDUE bit in LVDCR must be set to 1. When using external compared voltage, write 0 to the VDDII bit in LVDCR, and wait for 50 s (tLVDON) given by a software timer until the detection circuit has settled. Then clear the LVDDF and LVDUF bits to 0 and set the LVDDE or LVDUE bit to 1. After that, the output settings of ports must be made. The initial value of the external compared voltages input on the ExtU and ExtD pins must be higher than the Vexd voltage. When the external comparison voltage of ExtD pin falls below the Vexd (D) (Typ. = 1.15 V) voltage, the LVDI clears the LVDINT signal to 0 and sets the LVDDF bit in LVDSR to 1. If the LVDDE bit is 1 at this time, an IRQ0 interrupt request is generated. In this case, the necessary data must be saved in the external EEPROM, and a transition to standby mode or subsleep mode must be made. Until this processing is completed, the power supply voltage must be higher than the lower limit of the guaranteed operating voltage. When the power-supply voltage does not fall below the Vreset1 (Typ. = 2.3 V) voltage and the input voltage of the ExtU pin rises above Vexd (Typ. = 1.15 V) voltage, the LVDI circuit sets the LVDINT signal to 1. If the LVDUE bit is 1 at this time, the LVDUF bit in LVDSR is set to 1 and an IRQ0 interrupt request is generated. If the power supply voltage falls below the Vreset1 (Typ. = 2.3 V) voltage, this LSI enters lowvoltage detection reset operation. When the voltages input on the ExtU and ExtD pins are used as the compared voltage, ensure to use the LVDR (reset detection voltage: Typ. = 2.3 V) circuit. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 390 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits External power supply voltage ExtD input voltage ExtU input voltage (1) (2) (3) (4) Vreset1 VSS LVDINT Vexd LVDDE LVDDF LVDUE LVDUF IRQ0 interrupt generated IRQ0 interrupt generated Figure 19.6 Operational Timing of LVDI Circuit (When Compared Voltage is Input through ExtU and ExtD Pins) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 391 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 19 Band-Gap Circuit, Power-On Reset, and Low-Voltage Detection Circuits 19.3.3 Deciding Reset Source The source of a reset can be decided by reading the reset source decision register (LVDRF) in the reset exception handler (see table 19.2). After that, writing 0 to the bit can clear the flag and can be ready to decide the next reset source. Figure 19.7 shows a timing of setting the bits in the register. Table 19.2 Deciding Reset Source LVDRF PRST 1 0 0 WRST 0 0 1 Reset Source Power-on reset or LVDR occurred Reset signal input on external reset pin WDT reset occurred Power supply voltage Internal reset signal Set by power-on reset Read and cleared (0 is written) Set by temporary drop of power supply voltage Read and cleared (0 is written) PRST bit Set by WDT reset Read and cleared (0 is written) WRST bit Figure 19.7 Timing of Setting Bits in Reset Source Decision Register Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 392 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 20 Power Supply Circuit Section 20 Power Supply Circuit This LSI incorporates an internal power supply step-down circuit. Use of this circuit enables the internal power supply to be fixed at a constant level of approximately 3.0 V, independently of the voltage of the power supply connected to the external V pin. As a result, the current consumed when an external power supply is used at 3.0 V or above can be held down to virtually the same low level as when used at approximately 3.0 V. CC 20.1 Power Supply Connection of 5.0-V-Specification Microcontrollers CC Connect the external power supply to the V pin, and connect a capacitor of approximately 0.1 F between V and V , as shown in figure 20.1. The internal step-down circuit is made effective simply by adding this external circuit. In the external circuit interface, the external power supply voltage connected to V and the GND potential connected to V are the reference levels. For example, for port input/output levels, the V level is the reference for the high level, and the V level is that for the low level. The A/D converter analog power supply is not affected by the internal step-down circuit. CL SS CC SS CC SS VCC VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V Step-down circuit VCL Internal logic Internal power supply VSS Stabilization capacitor (approx. 0.1 F) Figure 20.1 Power Supply Connection of 5.0-V-Specification Microcontrollers PSCKT00A_000020020200 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 393 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 20 Power Supply Circuit 20.2 Power Supply Connection of 3.3-V-Specification Microcontrollers CL SS Connect the external power supply to the V and V pins as shown in figure 20.2. The power supply voltage must be within a range of 3.0 to 3.6 V. Otherwise, correct operation is not guaranteed. VCC VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V Step-down circuit VCL Internal logic Internal power supply VSS Figure 20.2 Power Supply Connection of 3.3-V-Specification Microcontrollers Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 394 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Section 21 List of Registers The register list gives information on the on-chip I/O register addresses, how the register bits are configured, and the register states in each operating mode. The information is given as shown below. 1. Register addresses (address order) * The register addresses listed in the table are the address values (16 bits) in the 64-Kbyte address space. The value of the sixteen higher-order bits of address values (24 bits) in the 16Mbyte address space is H'FF. * Registers are listed from the lower allocation addresses. * The symbol in the register-name column represents a reserved address or range of reserved addresses. Do not attempt to access reserved addresses. * When the register address is 16-bit wide, the address of the upper byte is given in the list. * Registers are classified by functional modules. * The data bus width is indicated. * The number of access states is indicated. 2. Register bits * Bit configurations of the registers are described in the same order as the register addresses. * Reserved bits are indicated by in the bit name column. * When registers consist of 16 bits, bits are described from the MSB side. 3. Register states in each operating mode * Register states are described in the same order as the register addresses. * The register states described here are for the basic operating modes. If there is a specific reset for an on-chip peripheral module, refer to the section on that on-chip peripheral module. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 395 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers 21.1 Register Addresses (Address Order) The data-bus width column indicates the number of bits. The access-state column shows the number of states of the selected basic clock that is required for access to the register. Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses should not take place. Correct operation of the access itself or later operations is not guaranteed when such a register is accessed. Abbreviation Module Address Name H'F000 to H'F6FF H'F700 H'F701 H'F702 H'F703 H'F704 H'F705 H'F706 H'F708 H'F70A H'F70C H'F70E H'F710 H'F711 H'F712 H'F713 H'F714 H'F715 H'F716 H'F718 H'F71A Data Bus Width Access State Register Bit No Timer control register_0 Timer I/O control register A_0 Timer I/O control register C_0 Timer status register_0 Timer interrupt enable register_0 PWM mode output level control register_0 Timer counter_0 General register A_0 General register B_0 General register C_0 General register D_0 Timer control register_1 Timer I/O control register A_1 Timer I/O control register C_1 Timer status register_1 Timer interrupt enable register_1 PWM mode output level control register_1 Timer counter_1 General register A_1 General register B_1 TCR_0 8 Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 TIORA_0 8 TIORC_0 8 TSR_0 TIER_0 8 8 POCR_0 8 TCNT_0 16 GRA_0 GRB_0 GRC_0 GRD_0 TCR_1 16 16 16 16 8 TIORA_1 8 TIORC_1 8 TSR_1 TIER_1 8 8 POCR_1 8 TCNT_1 16 GRA_1 GRB_1 16 16 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 396 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register General register C_1 General register D_1 Timer start register Timer mode register Timer PWM mode register Timer Z, for common use Timer output master enable register Timer output control register Abbreviation GRC_1 GRD_1 TSTR TMDR TPMR TFCR TOER TOCR Bit No 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Address H'F71C H'F71E H'F720 H'F721 H'F722 H'F723 H'F724 H'F725 H'F726, H'F727 H'F728 H'F729 H'F72A H'F72B H'F72C H'F72D H'F72E H'F72F H'F730 H'F731 H'F732 H'F733 H'F734 H'F735 H'F736 Module Name Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z Timer Z RTC RTC RTC RTC RTC RTC RTC RTC LVDC* LVDC* LVDC* CPG On-chip oscillator On-chip oscillator 1 Data Bus Width 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Access State 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Second data register/free running RSECDR counter data register Minute data register Hour data register Day-of-week data register RTC control register 1 RTC control register 2 Clock source select register Low-voltage-detection control register Low-voltage-detection status register Reset source decision register Clock control/status register RC control register RMINDR RHRDR RWKDR RTCCR1 RTCCR2 RTCCSR LVDCR LVDSR LVDRF CKCSR RCCR 1 1 RC trimming data protect register RCTRMDPR 8 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 397 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register RC trimming data register Serial mode register_2 Bit rate register_2 Serial control register 3_2 Transmit data register_2 Serial status register_2 Receive data register_2 I2C bus control register 1 I2C bus control register 2 I2C bus mode register I2C bus interrupt enable register I2C status register Slave address register I2C bus transmit data register I2C bus receive data register Timer mode register B1 Timer counter B1 Timer load register B1 Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Flash memory power control register Abbreviation RCTRMDR SMR_2 BRR_2 SCR3_2 TDR_2 SSR_2 RDR_2 ICCR1 ICCR2 ICMR ICIER ICSR SAR ICDRT ICDRR TMB1 TCB1 TLB1 FLMCR1 FLMCR2 FLPWCR Bit No 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Address H'F737 Module Name On-chip oscillator Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Access State 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 H'F738 to H'F73F H'F740 H'F741 H'F742 H'F743 H'F744 H'F745 H'F746, H'F747 H'F748 H'F749 H'F74A H'F74B H'F74C H'F74D H'F74E H'F74F SCI3_2 SCI3_2 SCI3_2 SCI3_2 SCI3_2 SCI3_2 SCI3_2 IIC2 IIC2 IIC2 IIC2 IIC2 IIC2 IIC2 IIC2 H'F750 to H'F75F H'F760 H'F761 H'F761 Timer B1 Timer B1 Timer B1 H'F762 to H'FF8F H'FF90 H'FF91 H'FF92 ROM ROM ROM Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 398 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Erase block register 1 Flash memory enable register Timer control register V0 Timer control/status register V Time constant register A Time constant register B Timer counter V Timer control register V1 Serial mode register Bit rate register Serial control register 3 Transmit data register Serial status register Receive data register A/D data register A/D data register A/D data register A/D data register A/D control/status register Abbreviation EBR1 FENR TCRV0 TCSRV TCORA TCORB TCNTV TCRV1 SMR BRR SCR3 TDR SSR RDR ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD ADCSR Bit No 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 8 Address H'FF93 Module Name ROM Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Access State 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 H'FF94 to ROM H'FF9A H'FF9B ROM H'FF9C to ROM H'FF9F H'FFA0 H'FFA1 H'FFA2 H'FFA3 H'FFA4 H'FFA5 H'FFA6, H'FFA7 H'FFA8 H'FFA9 H'FFAA H'FFAB H'FFAC H'FFAD H'FFAE, H'FFAF H'FFB0 H'FFB2 H'FFB4 H'FFB6 H'FFB8 Timer V Timer V Timer V Timer V Timer V Timer V SCI3 SCI3 SCI3 SCI3 SCI3 SCI3 SCI3 A/D converter A/D converter A/D converter A/D converter A/D converter Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 399 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register A/D control register PWM data register L PWM data register U PWM control register Timer control/status register WD Timer counter WD Timer mode register WD Abbreviation ADCR PWDRL PWDRU PWCR Bit No 8 8 8 8 Module Address Name H'FFB9 A/D converter Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Access State 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 H'FFBA, H'FFBB H'FFBC H'FFBD H'FFBE H'FFBF H'FFC0 H'FFC1 H'FFC2 H'FFC3 H'FFC4 to H'FFC7 H'FFC8 H'FFC9 H'FFCA H'FFCB H'FFCC H'FFCD H'FFCE H'FFCF H'FFD0 H'FFD1 14-bit PWM 14-bit PWM 14-bit PWM 14-bit PWM WDT* WDT* WDT* WDT* 1 1 1 1 TCSRWD 8 TCWD TMWD 8 8 Address break control register Address break status register Break address register H Break address register L Break data register H Break data register L Break address register E* 2 ABRKCR 8 ABRKSR 8 BARH BARL BDRH BDRL BARE PUCR1 PUCR5 PDR1 PDR2 PDR3 PDR5 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Address break 8 Address break 8 Address break 8 Address break 8 Address break 8 Address break 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Address break 8 Port pull-up control register 1 Port pull-up control register 5 Port data register 1 Port data register 2 Port data register 3 Port data register 5 I/O port I/O port 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FFD2, I/O port H'FFD3 H'FFD4 H'FFD5 H'FFD6 H'FFD7 H'FFD8 I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 400 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Port data register 6 Port data register 7 Port data register 8 Port data register B Port data register C Port mode register 1 Port mode register 5 Port mode register 3 Port control register 1 Port control register 2 Port control register 3 Port control register 5 Port control register 6 Port control register 7 Port control register 8 Port control register C System control register 1 System control register 2 Interrupt edge select register 1 Interrupt edge select register 2 Interrupt enable register 1 Interrupt enable register 2 Interrupt flag register 1 Abbreviation PDR6 PDR7 PDR8 PDRB PDRC PMR1 PMR5 PMR3 PCR1 PCR2 PCR3 PCR5 PCR6 PCR7 PCR8 PCRC Bit No 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Module Address Name H'FFD9 H'FFDA H'FFDB H'FFDC H'FFDD H'FFDE H'FFDF H'FFE0 H'FFE1 H'FFE2 H'FFD3 H'FFE4 H'FFE5 H'FFE6 H'FFE7 H'FFE8 H'FFE9 H'FFEA H'FFEB I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Access State 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 H'FFEC, I/O port H'FFED H'FFEE H'FFEF H'FFF0 H'FFF1 H'FFF2 H'FFF3 H'FFF4 H'FFF5 H'FFF6 I/O port I/O port Low power Low power Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt SYSCR1 8 SYSCR2 8 IEGR1 IEGR2 IENR1 IENR2 IRR1 8 8 8 8 8 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 401 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Interrupt flag register 2 Wakeup interrupt flag register Module standby control register 1 Module standby control register 2 Abbreviation IRR2 IWPR Bit No 8 8 Module Address Name H'FFF7 H'FFF8 H'FFF9 H'FFFA H'FFEB H'FFFC to H'FFFF Interrupt Interrupt Low power Low power Low power Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 Access State 2 2 2 2 MSTCR1 8 MSTCR2 8 Notes: 1. WDT: Watchdog timer 2. Only provided for microcontrollers that supports advanced mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 402 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers 21.2 Register Bits The addresses and bit names of the registers in the on-chip peripheral modules are listed below. The 16-bit register is indicated in two rows, 8 bits for each row. Register Name TCR_0 TIORA_0 TIORC_0 TSR_0 TIER_0 POCR_0 TCNT_0 Bit 7 CCLR2 Bit 6 CCLR1 IOB2 IOD2 Bit 5 CCLR0 IOB1 IOD1 Bit 4 CKEG1 IOB0 IOD0 OVF OVIE Bit 3 CKEG0 IMFD IMIED Bit 2 TPSC2 IOA2 IOC2 IMFC IMIEC POLD Bit 1 TPSC1 IOA1 IOC1 IMFB IMIEB POLC Bit 0 TPSC0 IOA0 IOC0 IMFA IMIEA POLB Module Name Timer Z TCNT0H7 TCNT0H6 TCNT0H5 TCNT0H4 TCNT0H3 TCNT0H2 TCNT0H1 TCNT0H0 TCNT0L7 TCNT0L6 GRA0H6 GRA0L6 GRB0H6 GRB0L6 GRC0H6 GRC0L6 GRD0H6 GRD0L6 CCLR1 IOB2 IOD2 TCNT0L5 GRA0H5 GRA0L5 GRB0H5 GRB0L5 GRC0H5 GRC0L5 GRD0H5 GRD0L5 CCLR0 IOB1 IOD1 UDF TCNT0L4 GRA0H4 GRA0L4 GRB0H4 GRB0L4 GRC0H4 GRC0L4 GRD0H4 GRD0L4 CKEG1 IOB0 IOD0 OVF OVIE TCNT0L3 GRA0H3 GRA0L3 GRB0H3 GRB0L3 GRC0H3 GRC0L3 GRD0H3 GRD0L3 CKEG0 IMFD IMIED TCNT0L2 GRA0H2 GRA0L2 GRB0H2 GRB0L2 GRC0H2 GRC0L2 GRD0H2 GRD0L2 TPSC2 IOA2 IOC2 IMFC IMIEC POLD TCNT0L1 GRA0H1 GRA0L1 GRB0H1 GRB0L1 GRC0H1 GRC0L1 GRD0H1 GRD0L1 TPSC1 IOA1 IOC1 IMFB IMIEB POLC TCNT0L0 GRA0H0 GRA0L0 GRB0H0 GRB0L0 GRC0H0 GRC0L0 GRD0H0 GRD0L0 TPSC0 IOA0 IOC0 IMFA IMIEA POLB GRA_0 GRA0H7 GRA0L7 GRB_0 GRB0H7 GRB0L7 GRC_0 GRC0H7 GRC0L7 GRD_0 GRD0H7 GRD0L7 TCR_1 TIORA_1 TIORC_1 TSR_1 TIER_1 POCR_1 TCNT_1 CCLR2 TCNT1H7 TCNT1H6 TCNT1H5 TCNT1H4 TCNT1H3 TCNT1H2 TCNT1H1 TCNT1H0 TCNT1L7 TCNT1L6 GRA1H6 GRA1L6 TCNT1L5 GRA1H5 GRA1L5 TCNT1L4 GRA1H4 GRA1L4 TCNT1L3 GRA1H3 GRA1L3 TCNT1L2 GRA1H2 GRA1L2 TCNT1L1 GRA1H1 GRA1L1 TCNT1L0 GRA1H0 GRA1L0 GRA_1 GRA1H7 GRA1L7 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 403 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Name GRB_1 Bit 7 GRB1H7 GRB1L7 Bit 6 GRB1H6 GRB1L6 GRC1H6 GRC1L6 GRD1H6 GRD1L6 BFC1 PWMD1 STCLK EC1 TOC1 SC12 MN12 12/24 RCS6 PMRC0 FSEL PRWE TRMD6 CHR BRR6 RIE Bit 5 GRB1H5 GRB1L5 GRC1H5 GRC1L5 GRD1H5 GRD1L5 BFD0 PWMC1 ADEG EB1 TOB1 SC11 MN11 HR11 PM FOIE RCS5 VDDII Bit 4 GRB1H4 GRB1L4 GRC1H4 GRC1L4 GRD1H4 GRD1L4 BFC0 PWMB1 ADTRG EA1 TOA1 SC10 MN10 HR10 RST WKIE Bit 3 GRB1H3 GRB1L3 GRC1H3 GRC1L3 GRD1H3 GRD1L3 OLS1 ED0 TOD0 SC03 MN03 HR03 INT DYIE RCS3 LVDSEL* CKSWIE 1 Bit 2 GRB1H2 GRB1L2 GRC1H2 GRC1L2 GRD1H2 GRD1L2 PWMD0 OLS0 EC0 TOC0 SC02 MN02 HR02 WK2 HRIE RCS2 CKSWIF TRMD2 MP BRR2 TEIE Bit 1 GRB1H1 GRB1L1 GRC1H1 GRC1L1 GRD1H1 GRD1L1 STR1 PWMC0 CMD1 EB0 TOB0 SC01 MN01 HR01 WK1 MNIE RCS1 LVDDE LVDDF PRST OSCHLT RCPSC1 TRMD1 CKS1 BRR1 CKE1 Bit 0 GRB1H0 GRB1L0 GRC1H0 GRC1L0 GRD1H0 GRD1L0 STR0 SYNC PWMB0 CMD0 EA0 TOA0 SC00 MN00 HR00 WK0 SEIE RCS0 LVDUE LVDUF WRST CKSTA RCPSC0 TRMD0 CKS0 BRR0 CKE0 Module Name Timer Z GRC_1 GRC1H7 GRC1L7 GRD_1 GRD1H7 GRD1L7 TSTR TMDR TPMR TFCR TOER TOCR RSECDR RMINDR RHRDR RWKDR RTCCR1 RTCCR2 RTCCSR LVDCR LVDSR LVDRF CKCSR RCCR RCTRMDPR RCTRMDR SMR_2 BRR_2 SCR3_2 BFD1 ED1 TOD1 BSY BSY BSY BSY RUN PMRC1 RCSTP WRI TRMD7 COM BRR7 TIE RTC LVDC CPG On-chip oscillator OSCBAKE OSCSEL VCLSEL LOCKDW TRMD5 PE BRR5 TE TRMDRWE TRMD4 PM BRR4 RE TRMD3 STOP BRR3 MPIE SCI3_2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 404 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Name TDR_2 SSR_2 RDR_2 ICCR1 ICCR2 ICMR ICIER ICSR SAR ICDRT ICDRR TMB1 TCB1 TLB1 FLMCR1 FLMCR2 FLPWCR EBR1* FENR TCRV0 TCSRV TCORA TCORB TCNTV TCRV1 SMR BRR SCR3 1 Bit 7 TDR7 TDRE RDR7 ICE BBSY MLS TIE TDRE SVA6 ICDRT7 ICDRR7 TMB17 TCB17 TLB17 FLER PDWND EB7 FLSHE CMIEB CMFB TCORA7 TCORB7 TCNTV7 COM BRR7 TIE Bit 6 TDR6 RDRF RDR6 RCVD SCP WAIT TEIE TEND SVA5 ICDRT6 ICDRR6 TCB16 TLB16 SWE EB6 CMIEA CMFA TCORA6 TCORB6 TCNTV6 CHR BRR6 RIE Bit 5 TDR5 OER RDR5 MST SDAO RIE RDRF SVA4 ICDRT5 ICDRR5 TCB15 TLB15 ESU EB5 OVIE OVF TCORA5 TCORB5 TCNTV5 PE BRR5 TE Bit 4 TDR4 FER RDR4 TRS SDAOP NAKIE NACKF SVA3 ICDRT4 ICDRR4 TCB14 TLB14 PSU EB4 CCLR1 TCORA4 TCORB4 TCNTV4 TVEG1 PM BRR4 RE Bit 3 TDR3 PER RDR3 CKS3 SCLO BCWP STIE STOP SVA2 ICDRT3 ICDRR3 TCB13 TLB13 EV EB3 CCLR0 OS3 TCORA3 TCORB3 TCNTV3 TVEG0 STOP BRR3 MPIE Bit 2 TDR2 TEND RDR2 CKS2 BC2 ACKE AL/OVE SVA1 ICDRT2 ICDRR2 TMB12 TCB12 TLB12 PV EB2 CKS2 OS2 TCORA2 TCORB2 TCNTV2 TRGE MP BRR2 TEIE Bit 1 TDR1 MPBR RDR1 CKS1 IICRST BC1 ACKBR AAS SVA0 ICDRT1 ICDRR1 TMB11 TCB11 TLB11 E EB1 CKS1 OS1 TCORA1 TCORB1 TCNTV1 CKS1 BRR1 CKE1 Bit 0 TDR0 MPBT RDR0 CKS0 BC0 ACKBT ADZ FS ICDRT0 ICDRR0 TMB10 TCB10 TLB10 P EB0 CKS0 OS0 TCORA0 TCORB0 TCNTV0 ICKS0 CKS0 BRR0 CKE0 Module Name SCI3_2 IIC2 Timer B1 ROM Timer V SCI3 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 405 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Name TDR SSR RDR ADDRA Bit 7 TDR7 TDRE RDR7 AD9 AD1 Bit 6 TDR6 RDRF RDR6 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 ADIE PWDRL6 TCWE TCWD6 CSEL1 ABIE BARH6 BARL6 BDRH6 BDRL6 BDRE6 PUCR16 P16 Bit 5 TDR5 OER RDR5 AD7 AD7 AD7 AD7 ADST PWDRL5 PWDRU5 B4WI TCWD5 CSEL0 BARH5 BARL5 BDRH5 BDRL5 BDRE5 PUCR15 PUCR55 P15 Bit 4 TDR4 FER RDR4 AD6 AD6 AD6 AD6 SCAN PWDRL4 PWDRU4 TCSRWE TCWD4 ACMP2 BARH4 BARL4 BDRH4 BDRL4 BDRE4 PUCR14 PUCR54 P14 Bit 3 TDR3 PER RDR3 AD5 AD5 AD5 AD5 CKS PWDRL3 PWDRU3 B2WI TCWD3 CKS3 ACMP1 BARH3 BARL3 BDRH3 BDRL3 BDRE3 PUCR53 Bit 2 TDR2 TEND RDR2 AD4 AD4 AD4 AD4 CH2 PWDRL2 PWDRU2 WDON TCWD2 CKS2 ACMP0 BARH2 BARL2 BDRH2 BDRL2 BDRE2 PUCR12 PUCR52 P12 Bit 1 TDR1 MPBR RDR1 AD3 AD3 AD3 AD3 CH1 PWDRL1 PWDRU1 B0WI TCWD1 CKS1 DCMP1 BARH1 BARL1 BDRH1 BDRL1 BDRE1 PUCR11 PUCR51 P11 Bit 0 TDR0 MPBT RDR0 AD2 AD2 AD2 AD2 CH0 PWDRL0 PWDRU0 PWCR0 WRST TCWD0 CKS0 DCMP0 BARH0 BARL0 BDRH0 BDRL0 BDRE0 PUCR10 PUCR50 P10 Module Name SCI3 A/D converter ADDRB AD9 AD1 ADDRC AD9 AD1 ADDRD AD9 AD1 ADCSR ADCR PWDRL PWDRU PWCR TCSRWD TCWD TMWD ABRKCR ABRKSR BARH BARL BDRH BDRL BARE* 3 ADF TRGE PWDRL7 B6WI TCWD7 RTINTE ABIF BARH7 BARL7 BDRH7 BDRL7 BDRE7 PUCR17 P17 14-bit PWM WDT*2 Address break PUCR1 PUCR5 PDR1 I/O port Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 406 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Name PDR2 PDR3 PDR5 PDR6 PDR7 PDR8 PDRB PDRC PMR1 PMR5 PMR3 PCR1 PCR2 PCR3 PCR5 PCR6 PCR7 PCR8 PCRC SYSCR1 SYSCR2 IEGR1 IEGR2 IENR1 IENR2 IRR1 IRR2 IWPR Bit 7 P37 P57 P67 P87 PB7 IRQ3 POF57 PCR17 PCR37 PCR57 PCR67 PCR87 SSBY SMSEL NMIEG IENDT IRRDT Bit 6 P36 P56 P66 P76 P86 PB6 IRQ2 POF56 PCR16 PCR36 PCR56 PCR66 PCR76 PCR86 STS2 LSON IENTA IRRTA Bit 5 P35 P55 P65 P75 P85 PB5 IRQ1 WKP5 PCR15 PCR35 PCR55 PCR65 PCR75 PCR85 STS1 DTON WPEG5 IENWP IENTB1 IRRTB1 IWPF5 Bit 4 P24 P34 P54 P64 P74 PB4 IRQ0 WKP4 POF24 PCR14 PCR24 PCR34 PCR54 PCR64 PCR74 STS0 MA2 WPEG4 IWPF4 Bit 3 P23 P33 P53 P63 PB3 TXD2 WKP3 POF23 PCR23 PCR33 PCR53 PCR63 NESEL MA1 IEG3 WPEG3 IEN3 IRRI3 IWPF3 Bit 2 P22 P32 P52 P62 P72 PB2 PWM WKP2 PCR12 PCR22 PCR32 PCR52 PCR62 PCR72 MA0 IEG2 WPEG2 IEN2 IRRI2 IWPF2 Bit 1 P21 P31 P51 P61 P71 PB1 PC1 TXD WKP1 PCR11 PCR21 PCR31 PCR51 PCR61 PCR71 PCRC1 SA1 IEG1 WPEG1 IEN1 IRRI1 IWPF1 Bit 0 P20 P30 P50 P60 P70 PB0 PC0 TMOW WKP0 PCR10 PCR20 PCR30 PCR50 PCR60 PCR70 PCRC0 SA0 IEG0 WPEG0 IEN0 IRRI0 IWPF0 Module Name I/O port Low power Interrupt Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 407 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Name MSTCR1 MSTCR2 Bit 7 MSTS3_2 Bit 6 MSTIIC Bit 5 MSTS3 Bit 4 MSTAD MSTTB1 Bit 3 MSTWD Bit 2 Bit 1 MSTTV MSTTZ Bit 0 MSTTA MSTPWM Module Name Low power Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. The LVDSEL bit is only provided for the 5.0-V specification products. WDT: Watchdog timer The BARE register is only provided for microcontrollers that support advanced mode. The bit configuration of EBR1 differs according to products. For the bit configuration of each product, see the list below. * H8/36079G, H8/36079L Register Name EBR1 Bit 7 EB7 Bit 6 EB6 Bit 5 EB5 Bit 4 EB4 Bit 3 EB3 Bit 2 EB2 Bit 1 EB1 Bit 0 EB0 Module Name ROM * H8/36078G, H8/36078L, H8/36077G, H8/36077L Register Name EBR1 Bit 7 Bit 6 EB6 Bit 5 EB5 Bit 4 EB4 Bit 3 EB3 Bit 2 EB2 Bit 1 EB1 Bit 0 EB0 Module Name ROM * H8/36074G, H8/36074L Register Name EBR1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 EB4 Bit 3 EB3 Bit 2 EB2 Bit 1 EB1 Bit 0 EB0 Module Name ROM Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 408 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers 21.3 Register Name TCR_0 TIORA_0 TIORC_0 TSR_0 TIER_0 POCR_0 TCNT_0 GRA_0 GRB_0 GRC_0 GRD_0 TCR_1 TIORA_1 TIORC_1 TSR_1 TIER_1 POCR_1 TCNT_1 GRA_1 GRB_1 GRC_1 GRD_1 TSTR TMDR TPMR TFCR TOER TOCR Registers States in Each Operating Mode Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Active Sleep Subactive Subsleep Standby Module Timer Z Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 409 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Name RSECDR RMINDR RHRDR RWKDR RTCCR1 RTCCR2 RTCCSR LVDCR LVDSR LVDRF CKCSR RCCR RCTRMDPR RCTRMDR SMR_2 BRR_2 SCR3_2 TDR_2 SSR_2 RDR_2 ICCR1 ICCR2 ICMR ICIER ICSR SAR ICDRT ICDRR TMB1 TCB1 TLB1 Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Active Sleep Subactive Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Subsleep Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Module RTC LVDC* 1 CPG On-chip oscillator SCI3_2 IIC2 Timer B1 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 410 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Name FLMCR1 FLMCR2 FLPWCR EBR1 FENR TCRV0 TCSRV TCORA TCORB TCNTV TCRV1 SMR BRR SCR3 TDR SSR RDR ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD ADCSR ADCR PWDRL PWDRU PWCR TCSRWD TCWD TMWD ABRKCR ABRKSR Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Active Sleep Subactive Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Subsleep Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Module ROM Timer V SCI3 A/D converter 14bit PWM WDT*1 Address break Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 411 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Name BARH BARL BDRH BDRL BARE* 2 Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Active Sleep Subactive Subsleep Standby Module Address break PUCR1 PUCR5 PDR1 PDR2 PDR3 PDR5 PDR6 PDR7 PDR8 PDRB PDRC PMR1 PMR5 PMR3 PCR1 PCR2 PCR3 PCR5 PCR6 PCR7 PCR8 PCRC SYSCR1 SYSCR2 I/O port Low power Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 412 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Register Name IEGR1 IEGR2 IENR1 IENR2 IRR1 IRR2 IWPR MSTCR1 MSTCR2 Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Active Sleep Subactive Subsleep Standby Module Interrupt Low power Notes: is not initialized 1. WDT: Watchdog timer 2. The BARE register is only provided for microcontrollers that support advanced mode. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 413 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 21 List of Registers Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 414 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Item Power supply voltage Analog power supply voltage Input voltage Symbol VCC AVCC Value -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to 4.3 Topr Regular specifications: -20 to +75 Unit V V V V V C Note * Ports other than ports VIN B and X1 Port B X1 Operating temperature Wide-range specifications: C -40 to +85 Storage temperature Notes: * Tstg -55 to +125 C Permanent damage may result if maximum ratings are exceeded. Normal operation should be under the conditions specified in Electrical Characteristics. Exceeding these values can result in incorrect operation and reduced reliability. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 415 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.2 22.2.1 (1) Electrical Characteristics (F-ZTATTM 5.0-V Version) Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range OSC (MHz) 20.0 32.768 W (kHz) 4.0 4.5 * AVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V * Active mode * Sleep mode 5.5 VCC (V) 4.5 * AVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V * All operating modes 5.5 VCC (V) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 416 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (2) Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (MHz) 20.0 SUB (kHz) 16.384 8.192 4.0 4.5 5.5 VCC (V) 4.096 4.5 * AVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V * Subactive mode * Subsleep mode 5.5 VCC (V) * AVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V * Active mode * Sleep mode (When MA2 in SYSCR2 = 0 ) (kHz) 2500 78.125 4.5 5.5 VCC (V) * AVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V * Active mode * Sleep mode (When MA2 in SYSCR2 = 1 ) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 417 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (3) Analog Power Supply Voltage and A/D Converter Accuracy Guaranteed Range (MHz) 20.0 4.0 4.5 * VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V * Active mode * Sleep mode 5.5 AVCC (V) (4) Range of Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency when Low-Voltage Detection Circuit is Used osc (MHz) 20.0 16.0 4.0 Vcc (V) 3.0 4.5 5.5 Operation guaranteed range Operation guaranteed range except A/D conversion accuracy Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 418 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.2.2 DC Characteristics Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (1) VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Values Item Symbol Applicable Pins RES, NMI, WKP0 to WKP5, IRQ0 to IRQ3, ADTRG, TMIB1, TMRIV, TMCIV, FTIOA0 to FTIOD0, FTIOA1 to FTIOD1, SCK3, SCK3_2, TRGV RXD, RXD_2, SCL, SDA, P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P20 to P24, P30 to P37, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P72 P74 to P76, P85 to P87, PC0, PC1 PB0 to PB7 OSC1 Input low voltage VIL RES, NMI, WKP0 to WKP5, IRQ0 to IRQ3, ADTRG, TMIB1, TMRIV, TMCIV, FTIOA0 to FTIOD0, FTIOA1 to FTIOD1, SCK3, SCK3_2, TRGV Test Condition Min. VCC x 0.8 Typ. Max. -- VCC + 0.3 Unit V Notes Input high VIH voltage VCC x 0.7 -- VCC + 0.3 V AVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V AVCC x 0.7 -- VCC - 0.5 -0.3 -- -- AVCC + 0.3 V VCC + 0.3 VCC x 0.2 V V Note: Connect the TEST pin to Vss. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 419 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Item Input low voltage Symbol VIL Applicable Pins RXD, RXD_2, SCL, SDA, P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P20 to P24, P30 to P37, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P72, P74 to P76, P85 to P87, PC0, PC1 PB0 to PB7 OSC1 Output high voltage VOH P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P20 to P24, P30 to P37, P50 to P55, P60 to P67, P70 to P72, P74 to P76, P85 to P87, PC0, PC1 P56, P57 Output low voltage VOL P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P20 to P24, P30 to P37, P50 to P57, P70 to P72, P74 to P76, P85 to P87 PC0, PC1 P60 to P67 -IOH = 1.5 mA Test Condition Min. -0.3 Typ. -- Max. VCC x 0.3 Unit V Notes AVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V -0.3 -0.3 VCC - 1.0 -- -- -- AVCC x 0.3 V 0.5 -- V V -IOH = 0.1 mA VCC - 0.5 -- -- -IOH = 0.1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA VCC - 2.5 -- -- -- -- 0.6 V V IOL = 0.4 mA -- -- 0.4 IOL = 20.0 mA IOL = 10.0 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 0.4 mA -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1.5 1.0 0.4 0.4 0.6 0.4 V SCL, SDA IOL = 6.0 mA IOL = 3.0 mA Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 420 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Item Input/ output leakage current Symbol | IIL | Applicable Pins OSC1, TMIB1, RES, NMI, WKP0 to WKP5, IRQ0 to IRQ3, ADTRG, TRGV, TMRIV, TMCIV, FTIOA0 to FTIOD0, FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 RXD, SCK3, RXD_2, SCK3_2, SCL, SDA P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P20 to P24, P30 to P37, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P72, P74 to P76, P85 to P87, PC0, PC1 PB0 to PB7 Pull-up MOS current Input capacitance Active mode supply current -Ip P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P50 to P55 All input pins except power supply pins VCC Test Condition VIN = 0.5 V to (VCC - 0.5 V) Min -- Typ -- Max 1.0 Unit A Notes VIN = 0.5 V to (VCC - 0.5 V) -- -- 1.0 A VIN = 0.5 V to (AVCC - 0.5 V) VCC = 5.0 V, VIN = 0.0 V f = 4 MHz, VIN = 0.0 V, Ta = 25C Active mode 1 VCC = 5.0 V, fOSC = 20 MHz Active mode 1 VCC = 5.0 V, fOSC = 10 MHz -- 50.0 -- -- 1.0 300.0 A A Cin -- -- 15.0 pF IOPE1 -- 19.0 28.0 mA * -- 11.0 -- * Reference value mA * IOPE2 VCC Active mode 2 VCC = 5.0 V, fOSC = 20 MHz Active mode 2 VCC = 5.0 V, fOSC = 10 MHz -- 3.0 5.5 -- 2.5 -- * Reference value Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 421 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Item Sleep mode supply current Symbol ISLEEP1 Applicable Pins VCC Test Condition Sleep mode 1 VCC = 5.0 V, fOSC = 20 MHz Sleep mode 1 VCC = 5.0 V, fOSC = 10 MHz ISLEEP2 VCC Sleep mode 2 VCC = 5.0 V, fOSC = 20 MHz Sleep mode 2 VCC = 5.0 V, fOSC = 10 MHz Subactive ISUB mode supply current VCC VCC = 5.0 V 32-kHz crystal resonator (SUB = W/2) VCC = 5.0 V 32-kHz crystal resonator (SUB = W/8) Subsleep mode supply current Standby mode supply current ISUBSP VCC VCC = 5.0 V 32-kHz crystal resonator (SUB = W/2) 32-kHz crystal resonator not used Min. -- Typ. 12.0 Max. 20.0 Unit mA Notes * -- 6.5 -- * Reference value mA * -- 2.5 4.0 -- 2.2 -- * Reference value A * -- 95.0 145.0 -- 85.0 -- * Reference value A * -- 85.0 140.0 ISTBY VCC -- -- 135.0 A * RAM data VRAM retention voltage VCC 2.0 -- -- V Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 422 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Note: * Pin states during supply current measurement are given below (excluding current in the pull-up MOS transistors and output buffers). RES Pin VCC Internal State Operates Other Pins Oscillator Pins VCC Main clock: ceramic or crystal resonator, and on-chip oscillator Subclock: Pin X1 = VSS VCC Mode Active mode 1 Active mode 2 Sleep mode 1 Sleep mode 2 Subactive mode VCC VCC Operates (OSC/64) Only timers operate Only timers operate (OSC/64) Operates VCC Main clock: ceramic or crystal resonator, and on-chip oscillator Subclock: crystal resonator Main clock: ceramic or crystal resonator, and on-chip oscillator Subclock: Pin X1 = VSS Subsleep mode Standby mode VCC VCC Only timers operate CPU and timers both stop VCC VCC Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 423 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (2) VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Applicable Pins Output pins except port 6, SCL, and SDA Port 6 Permissible output low current (total) IOL Output pins except port 6, SCL, and SDA Port 6, SCL, and SDA Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) -IOH -IOH All output pins All output pins Values Test Condition Min. -- Typ. -- Max. 2.0 Unit mA Item Permissible output low current (per pin) Symbol IOL -- -- -- -- 20.0 40.0 mA -- -- -- -- -- -- 80.0 5.0 50.0 mA mA Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 424 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.2.3 AC Characteristics Table 22.3 AC Characteristics VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Applicable Symbol Pins fOSC OSC1, OSC2 Values Test Condition Min. 4.0 Typ. -- Max. 20.0 Unit MHz Reference Figure *1 Item System clock oscillation frequency System clock () cycle time Subclock oscillation frequency Watch clock (W) cycle time Subclock (SUB) cycle time Instruction cycle time Oscillation stabilization time (crystal resonator) tcyc fW X1, X2 1 -- -- -- -- 64 12.8 tOSC s kHz *2 32.768 -- tW tsubcyc X1, X2 -- 2 2 30.5 -- -- -- -- 8 -- 10.0 s tW tcyc tsubcyc ms *2 trc OSC1, OSC2 OSC1, OSC2 -- Oscillation trc stabilization time (ceramic resonator) Oscillation trc stabilization time (on-chip oscillator) Oscillation stabilization time trcx -- -- 5.0 ms -- -- 500 s X1, X2 OSC1 OSC1 OSC1 -- 20.0 20.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2.0 -- -- 10.0 15.0 10.0 15.0 s ns ns ns Figure 22.1 External clock high tCPH width External clock low width External clock rise time External clock fall time tCPL tCPr tCPf OSC1 -- -- ns Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 425 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Test Condition Min. Typ. -- Max. -- Unit ms Item RES pin low width Applicable Symbol Pins tREL RES Reference Figure Figure 22.2 At power-on and in trc modes other than those below In active mode and 2500 sleep mode -- -- -- -- ns tcyc tsubcyc Figure 22.3 Input pin high width tIH NMI, TMIB1, IRQ0 to IRQ3, WKP0 to WKP5, TMCIV, TMRIV, TRGV, ADTRG, FTIOA0 to FTIOD0, FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 NMI, TMIB1, IRQ0 to IRQ3, WKP0 to WKP5, TMCIV, TMRIV, TRGV, ADTRG, FTIOA0 to FTIOD0, FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 2 Input pin low width tIL 2 -- -- tcyc tsubcyc Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 426 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Test Condition Vcc = 5.0 V, Ta = 25C, FSEL = 1, VCLSEL = 0 Min. 19.70 Typ. 20.0 Max. 20.30 Unit MHz Item On-chip oscillator oscillation frequency Applicable Symbol Pins fRC Reference Figure FSEL = 1, 19.40 Ta = -20 to +75C, VCLSEL = 0 FSEL = 1, 19.20 Ta = -40 to +85C, VCLSEL = 0 Vcc = 5.0 V, Ta = 25C, FSEL = 0, VCLSEL = 0 15.76 20.0 20.60 20.00 20.80 16.0 16.24 FSEL = 0, 15.52 Ta = -20 to +75C, VCLSEL = 0 FSEL = 0, 15.36 Ta = -40 to +85C, VCLSEL = 0 16.0 16.48 16.0 16.64 Notes: 1. When an external clock is input, the minimum frequency of the external clock oscillator is 4.0 MHz. 2. Determined by MA2 to MA0, SA1, and SA0 in system control register 2 (SYSCR2). Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 427 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Table 22.4 I C Bus Interface Timing VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Test Condition Values Min. 3tcyc + 300 5tcyc + 300 -- -- Typ. -- -- -- -- Max. -- -- -- 300 1tcyc Unit ns ns ns ns ns Reference Figure Figure 22.4 2 Item SCL input cycle time SCL input high width SCL input low width SCL and SDA input fall time SCL and SDA input spike pulse removal time SDA input bus-free time Start condition input hold time Repeated start condition input setup time Setup time for stop condition input Data-input hold time Capacitive load of SCL and SDA SCL and SDA output fall time Symbol tSCL tSCLH tSCLL tSf tSP 12tcyc + 600 -- tBUF tSTAH tSTAS 5tcyc 3tcyc 3tcyc -- -- -- -- -- -- ns ns ns tSTOS 3tcyc 1tcyc+20 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 400 250 ns ns ns pF ns Data-input setup time tSDAS tSDAH cb tSf Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 428 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Table 22.5 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Timing VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Applicable Pins SCK3 Values Test Condition Min. 4 6 Typ. Max. Unit -- -- -- -- tcyc Reference Figure Figure 22.5 Item Input clock cycle Asynchronous Clock synchronous Symbol tScyc Input clock pulse width Transmit data delay time (clock synchronous) Receive data setup time (clock synchronous) Receive data hold time (clock synchronous) tSCKW tTXD SCK3 TXD 0.4 -- -- -- 0.6 1 tScyc tcyc Figure 22.6 tRXS RXD 50.0 -- -- ns tRXH RXD 50.0 -- -- ns Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 429 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.2.4 A/D Converter Characteristics Table 22.6 A/D Converter Characteristics VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Applicable Pins AVCC AN0 to AN7 AVCC Test Condition Values Min. 4.5 VSS - 0.3 AVCC = 5.0 V -- fOSC = 20 MHz -- Typ. Max. VCC -- -- 5.5 Unit V Reference Figure *1 Item Symbol Analog power supply AVCC voltage Analog input voltage AVIN Analog power supply AIOPE current AISTOP1 AVCC + 0.3 V 2.0 mA AVCC 50 -- A *2 Reference value *3 AISTOP2 Analog input capacitance Permissible signal source impedance Resolution (data length) Conversion time (single mode) Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy CAIN RAIN AVCC AN0 to AN7 AN0 to AN7 -- -- -- 10 AVCC = 4.5 to 70 5.5 V -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- 5.0 30.0 5.0 10 -- 7.5 7.5 7.5 0.5 8.0 A pF k bit tcyc LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 430 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Min. Typ. Max. -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3.5 3.5 3.5 0.5 4.0 Unit tcyc LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Item Conversion time (single mode) Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition Reference Figure AVCC = 4.5 to 134 5.5 V -- -- -- -- -- Notes: 1. Set AVCC = VCC when the A/D converter is not used. 2. AISTOP1 is the current in active and sleep modes while the A/D converter is idle. 3. AISTOP2 is the current at reset and in standby, subactive, and subsleep modes while the A/D converter is idle. 22.2.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics Table 22.7 Watchdog Timer Characteristics VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Applicable Pins Test Condition Values Min. 0.2 Typ. 0.4 Max. -- Unit s Reference Figure * Item On-chip oscillator overflow time Note: * Symbol tOVF Time until an internal reset is generated after the counter counts from 0 to 255 when the on-chip oscillator is selected Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 431 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics Table 22.8 Flash Memory Characteristics VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Test Condition Values Min. -- -- 1000 1 50 1n6 7 n 1000 Additionalprogramming 28 198 8 5 5 4 2 2 100 -- Typ. 7.0 10.0 10000 -- -- 30 200 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max. 200.0 20.0 -- -- -- 32 202 12 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1000 Unit ms ms Times s s s s s s s s s s s Times Item Programming time (per 128 bytes)* * * Erase time (per block) * * * Reprogramming count Programming Wait time after setting SWE bit*1 Wait time after setting PSU bit*1 Wait time after setting P bit ** 1 4 1 3 6 1 2 4 Symbol tP tE NWEC x y z1 z2 z3 Wait time after clearing P bit*1 Wait time after clearing PSU bit*1 Wait time after setting PV bit*1 Wait time after dummy write*1 Wait time after clearing PV bit*1 Wait time after clearing SWE bit*1 Maximum programming count *1*4*5 N Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 432 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Min. 1 100 10 10 10 20 2 4 100 -- Typ. -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max. -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 120 Unit s s ms s s s s s s Times Item Erasing Wait time after setting SWE bit*1 Wait time after setting ESU bit*1 Wait time after setting E bit*1*6 Wait time after clearing E bit*1 Symbol x y z Test Condition Wait time after clearing ESU bit*1 Wait time after setting EV bit*1 Wait time after dummy write*1 Wait time after clearing EV bit*1 Wait time after clearing SWE bit*1 Maximum erase count *1*6*7 N Notes: 1. Make the time settings in accordance with the program/erase algorithms. 2. The programming time for 128 bytes. (Indicates the total time for which the P bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) is set. The program-verify time is not included.) 3. The time required to erase one block. (Indicates the time for which the E bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) is set. The erase-verify time is not included.) 4. Programming time maximum value (tP(max.)) = wait time after P bit setting (z) x maximum programming count (N) 5. Set the maximum programming count (N) according to the actual set values of z1, z2, and z3 so that it does not exceed the programming time maximum value (tP(max.)). The wait time after setting P bit (z1, z2) should be changed as follows according to the value of the programming count (n). Programming count (n) 1n6 z1 = 30 s 7 n 1000 z2 = 200 s 6. Erase time maximum value (tE(max.)) = wait time after E bit setting (z) x maximum erase count (N) 7. Set the maximum erase count (N) according to the actual set value of (z) so that it does not exceed the erase time maximum value (tE(max.)). Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 433 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.2.7 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics Table 22.9 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Test Condition LVDSEL = 0 LVDSEL = 0 LVDSEL = 0 LVDSEL = 1 Values Min. 3.4 -- -- 3.3 1.0 Typ. 3.7 4.0 2.3 3.6 -- Max. -- 4.4 2.6 3.9 -- Unit V V V V V Item Symbol Vint (D) Vint (U) Vreset1 Vreset2 VLVDRmin Power-supply falling detection voltage Power-supply rising detection voltage Reset detection voltage 1* Reset detection voltage 2* 1 2 Lower-limit voltage of LVDR operation Notes: 1. This voltage should be used when the falling and rising voltage detection function is used. 2. Select the low-voltage reset 2 when only the low-voltage detection reset is used. 22.2.8 LVDI External Input Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics Table 22.10 LVDI External Input Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics Vcc = 4.5 to 5.5 V, AVcc = 4.5 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C Test Condition Values Min. 1.0 Typ. 1.15 Max. 1.30 Unit V Item Symbol Vexd ExtD/ExtU input detection voltage ExtD/ExtU input voltage range VextD/VextU VextD > VextU -0.3 Lower V voltage of AVcc + 0.3 or Vcc + 0.3 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 434 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.2.9 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics Table 22.11 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Test Condition Values Min. 100 -- Typ. 150 -- Max -- 100 Unit k mV Item Symbol RRES Vpor Pull-up resistance of RES pin Power-on reset start voltage* Note: * The power-supply voltage (Vcc) must fall below Vpor = 100 mV and then rise after charge of the RES pin is removed completely. In order to remove charge of the RES pin, it is recommended that the diode be placed in the Vcc side. If the power-supply voltage (Vcc) rises from the point over 100 mV, a power-on reset may not occur. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 435 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.3 22.3.1 (1) Electrical Characteristics (F-ZTATTM 3.3-V Version) Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range osc (MHz) 16.0 32.768 w (kHz) 4.0 3.0 * AVCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V * Active mode * Sleep mode 3.6 VCC (V) 3.0 3.6 VCC (V) * AVCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V * All operating modes Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 436 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics (2) Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (MHz) 16.0 16.384 SUB (kHz) 8.192 4.0 3.0 3.6 4.096 VCC (V) 3.0 * AVCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V * Subactive mode * Subsleep mode 3.6 VCC (V) (kHz) 2500 * AVCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V * Active mode * Sleep mode (When MA2 in SYSCR2 = 0) 78.125 3.0 3.6 VCC (V) * AVCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V * Active mode * Sleep mode (When MA2 in SYSCR2 = 1) (3) Analog Power Supply Voltage and A/D Converter Accuracy Guaranteed Range (MHz) 16.0 4.0 3.0 * VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V * Active mode * Sleep mode 3.6 AVCC (V) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 437 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.3.2 DC Characteristics Table 22.12 DC Characteristics (1) VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Values Item Symbol Applicable Pins RES, NMI, WKP0 to WKP5, IRQ0 to IRQ3, ADTRG, TMIB1, TMRIV, TMCIV, FTIOA0 to FTIOD0, FTIOA1 to FTIOD1, SCK3, SCK3_2, TRGV RXD, RXD_2, SCL, SDA, P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P20 to P24, P30 to P37, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P72 P74 to P76, P85 to P87, PC0, PC1 PB0 to PB7 OSC1 Input low voltage VIL RES, NMI, WKP0 to WKP5, IRQ0 to IRQ3, ADTRG, TMIB1, TMRIV, TMCIV, FTIOA0 to FTIOD0, FTIOA1 to FTIOD1, SCK3, SCK3_2, TRGV Test Condition Min. VCC x 0.9 Typ. Max. -- VCC + 0.3 Unit V Notes Input high VIH voltage VCC x 0.8 -- VCC + 0.3 V AVCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V AVCC x 0.8 -- VCC - 0.3 -0.3 -- -- AVCC + 0.3 V VCC + 0.3 VCC x 0.1 V V Note: Connect the TEST pin to Vss. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 438 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Item Input low voltage Symbol VIL Applicable Pins RXD, RXD_2, SCL, SDA, P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P20 to P24, P30 to P37, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P72, P74 to P76, P85 to P87, PC0, PC1 PB0 to PB7 OSC1 Output high voltage VOH P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P20 to P24, P30 to P37, P50 to P55, P60 to P67, P70 to P72, P74 to P76, P85 to P87, PC0, PC1 P56, P57 Output low voltage VOL P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P20 to P24, P30 to P37, P50 to P57, P70 to P72, P74 to P76, P85 to P87 PC0, PC1 P60 to P67 -IOH = 1.5 mA Test Condition Min. -0.3 Typ. -- Max. VCC x 0.2 Unit V Notes AVCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V -0.3 -0.3 VCC - 1.0 -- -- -- AVCC x 0.2 V 0.3 -- V V -IOH = 0.1 mA VCC - 0.5 -- -- -IOH = 0.1 mA IOL = 1.6 mA VCC - 2.0 -- -- -- -- 0.6 V V IOL = 0.4 mA -- -- 0.4 IOL = 20.0 mA IOL = 10.0 mA IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 0.4 mA -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1.5 1.0 0.4 0.4 0.6 0.4 V SCL, SDA IOL = 6.0 mA IOL = 3.0 mA Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 439 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Item Input/ output leakage current Symbol | IIL | Applicable Pins OSC1, TMIB1, RES, NMI, WKP0 to WKP5, IRQ0 to IRQ3, ADTRG, TRGV, TMRIV, TMCIV, FTIOA0 to FTIOD0, FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 RXD, SCK3, RXD_2, SCK3_2, SCL, SDA P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P20 to P24, P30 to P37, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P72, P74 to P76, P85 to P87, PC0, PC1 PB0 to PB7 Pull-up MOS current Input capacitance -Ip P10 to P12, P14 to P17, P50 to P55 All input pins except power supply pins VCC Test Condition VIN = 0.5 V to (VCC - 0.5 V) Min -- Typ -- Max 1.0 Unit A Notes VIN = 0.5 V to (VCC - 0.5 V) -- -- 1.0 A VIN = 0.5 V to (AVCC - 0.5 V) VCC = 3.3 V, VIN = 0.0 V f = 4 MHz, VIN = 0.0 V, Ta = 25C Active mode 1 VCC = 3.3 V, fOSC = 16 MHz Active mode 1 VCC = 3.3 V, fOSC = 10 MHz -- -- -- 60.0 1.0 -- A A Cin -- -- 15.0 pF IOPE1 Active mode current consumption IOPE2 -- 15.0 22.0 mA * -- 11.0 -- * Reference value mA * VCC Active mode 2 VCC = 3.3 V, fOSC = 16 MHz Active mode 2 VCC = 3.3 V, fOSC = 10 MHz -- 2.8 4.0 -- 2.5 -- * Reference value Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 440 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Item Sleep mode supply current Symbol ISLEEP1 Applicable Pins VCC Test Condition Sleep mode 1 VCC = 3.3 V, fOSC = 16 MHz Sleep mode 1 VCC = 3.3 V, fOSC = 10 MHz ISLEEP2 VCC Sleep mode 2 VCC = 3.3 V, fOSC = 16 MHz Sleep mode 2 VCC = 3.3 V, fOSC = 10 MHz Subactive ISUB mode supply current VCC VCC = 3.3 V 32-kHz crystal resonator (SUB = W/2) VCC = 3.3 V 32-kHz crystal resonator (SUB = W/8) Subsleep mode supply current Standby mode supply current ISUBSP VCC VCC = 3.3 V 32-kHz crystal resonator (SUB = W/2) 32-kHz crystal resonator not used Min. -- Typ. 9.0 Max. 14.0 Unit mA Notes * -- 6.5 -- * Reference value mA * -- 2.2 3.5 -- 2.0 -- * Reference value A * -- 95.0 145.0 -- 85.0 -- * Reference value A * -- 85.0 140.0 ISTBY VCC -- -- 135.0 A * RAM data VRAM retention voltage VCC 2.0 -- -- V Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 441 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Note: * Pin states during supply current measurement are given below (excluding current in the pull-up MOS transistors and output buffers). RES Pin VCC Internal State Operates Other Pins Oscillator Pins VCC Main clock: ceramic or crystal resonator, and on-chip oscillator Subclock: Pin X1 = VSS VCC Mode Active mode 1 Active mode 2 Sleep mode 1 Sleep mode 2 Subactive mode VCC VCC Operates (OSC/64) Only timers operate Only timers operate (OSC/64) Operates VCC Main clock: ceramic or crystal resonator, and on-chip oscillator Subclock: crystal resonator Main clock: ceramic or crystal resonator, and on-chip oscillator Subclock: Pin X1 = VSS Subsleep mode Standby mode VCC VCC Only timers operate CPU and timers both stop VCC VCC Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 442 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Table 22.12 DC Characteristics (2) VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Applicable Pins Output pins except port 6, SCL, and SDA Port 6 Permissible output low current (total) IOL Output pins except port 6, SCL, and SDA Port 6, SCL, and SDA Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) -IOH -IOH All output pins All output pins Values Test Condition Min. -- Typ. -- Max. 2.0 Unit mA Item Permissible output low current (per pin) Symbol IOL -- -- -- -- 20.0 40.0 mA -- -- -- -- -- -- 80.0 5.0 50.0 mA mA Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 443 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.3.3 AC Characteristics Table 22.13 AC Characteristics VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Applicable Pins OSC1, OSC2 Values Test Condition Min. 4.0 Typ. -- Max. 16.0 Unit MHz Reference Figure *1 Item System clock oscillation frequency System clock () cycle time Subclock oscillation frequency Watch clock (W) cycle time Subclock (SUB) cycle time Instruction cycle time Oscillation stabilization time (crystal resonator) Symbol fOSC tcyc fW X1, X2 1 -- -- -- -- 64 12.8 tOSC s kHz *2 32.768 -- tW tsubcyc X1, X2 -- 2 2 30.5 -- -- -- -- 8 -- 10.0 s tW tcyc tsubcyc ms *2 trc OSC1, OSC2 OSC1, OSC2 -- Oscillation trc stabilization time (ceramic resonator) Oscillation trc stabilization time (on-chip oscillator) Oscillation stabilization time trcx -- -- 5.0 ms -- -- 500 s X1, X2 OSC1 OSC1 OSC1 OSC1 -- 23.8 23.8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2.0 -- -- 15.0 15.0 s ns ns ns ns Figure 22.1 External clock high tCPH width External clock low width External clock rise time External clock fall time tCPL tCPr tCPf Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 444 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Test Condition Min. Typ. -- Max. -- Unit ms Item RES pin low width Symbol tREL Applicable Pins RES Reference Figure Figure 22.2 At power-on and in trc modes other than those below In active mode and 2500 sleep mode -- -- -- -- ns tcyc tsubcyc Figure 22.3 Input pin high width tIH NMI, TMIB1, IRQ0 to IRQ3, WKP0 to WKP5, TMCIV, TMRIV, TRGV, ADTRG, FTIOA0 to FTIOD0, FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 NMI, TMIB1, IRQ0 to IRQ3, WKP0 to WKP5, TMCIV, TMRIV, TRGV, ADTRG, FTIOA0 to FTIOD0, FTIOA1 to FTIOD1 2 Input pin low width tIL 2 -- -- tcyc tsubcyc Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 445 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Test Condition Vcc = 3.3 V Ta = 25C FSEL= 1 VCLSEL= 0 Min. 19.70 Typ. 20.00 Max. 20.30 Unit MHz Item On-chip oscillator oscillation frequency Symbol fRC Applicable Pins Reference Figure FSEL = 1, 19.40 Ta = -20 to +75C, VCLSEL = 0 FSEL = 1, Ta = -40 to 85C, VCLSEL = 0 Vcc = 3.3 V, Ta = 25C, FSEL = 0, VCLSEL = 0 FSEL = 0, Ta = -20 to +75C VCLSEL = 0 19.2 20.00 20.60 20.0 20.8 15.76 16.00 16.24 15.52 16.0 16.48 FSEL = 0, 15.36 Ta = -40 to +85C, VCLSEL = 0 16.0 16.64 Notes: 1. When an external clock is input, the minimum frequency of the external clock oscillator is 4.0 MHz. 2. Determined by MA2 to MA0, SA1, and SA0 in system control register 2 (SYSCR2). Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 446 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Table 22.14 I C Bus Interface Timing VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Test Condition Values Min. 3tcyc + 300 5tcyc + 300 -- -- Typ. -- -- -- -- Max. -- -- -- 300 1tcyc Unit ns ns ns ns ns Reference Figure Figure 22.4 2 Item SCL input cycle time SCL input high width SCL input low width SCL and SDA input fall time SCL and SDA input spike pulse removal time SDA input bus-free time Start condition input hold time Repeated start condition input setup time Setup time for stop condition input Data-input hold time Capacitive load of SCL and SDA SCL and SDA output fall time Symbol tSCL tSCLH tSCLL tSf tSP 12tcyc + 600 -- tBUF tSTAH tSTAS 5tcyc 3tcyc 3tcyc -- -- -- -- -- -- ns ns ns tSTOS 3tcyc 1tcyc+20 0 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 400 250 ns ns ns pF ns Data-input setup time tSDAS tSDAH cb tSf Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 447 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Table 22.15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Timing VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Applicable Pins SCK3 Values Test Condition Min. 4 6 Typ. Max. Unit -- -- -- -- tcyc Reference Figure Figure 22.5 Item Input clock cycle Asynchronous Clock synchronous Symbol tScyc Input clock pulse width Transmit data delay time (clock synchronous) Receive data setup time (clock synchronous) Receive data hold time (clock synchronous) tSCKW tTXD SCK3 TXD 0.4 -- -- -- 0.6 1 tScyc tcyc Figure 22.6 tRXS RXD 50.0 -- -- ns tRXH RXD 50.0 -- -- ns Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 448 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.3.4 A/D Converter Characteristics Table 22.16 A/D Converter Characteristics VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Applicable Pins AVCC AN0 to AN7 AVCC Test Condition Values Min. 3.0 VSS - 0.3 AVCC = 3.6 V -- fOSC = 16 MHz -- Typ. Max. VCC -- -- 3.6 Unit V Reference Figure *1 Item Symbol Analog power supply AVCC voltage Analog input voltage AVIN Analog power supply AIOPE current AISTOP1 AVCC + 0.3 V 2.0 mA AVCC 50 -- A *2 Reference value *3 AISTOP2 Analog input capacitance Permissible signal source impedance Resolution (data length) Conversion time (single mode) Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy CAIN RAIN AVCC AN0 to AN7 AN0 to AN7 -- -- -- 10 AVCC = 3.0 to 134 3.6 V -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- 5.0 30.0 5.0 10 -- 7.5 7.5 7.5 0.5 8.0 A pF k bit tcyc LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Notes: 1. Set AVCC = VCC when the A/D converter is not used. 2. AISTOP1 is the current in active and sleep modes while the A/D converter is idle. 3. AISTOP2 is the current at reset and in standby, subactive, and subsleep modes while the A/D converter is idle. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 449 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.3.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics Table 22.17 Watchdog Timer Characteristics VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Applicable Pins Test Condition Values Min. 0.2 Typ. 0.4 Max. -- Unit s Reference Figure * Item On-chip oscillator overflow time Note: * Symbol tOVF Time until an internal reset is generated after the counter counts from 0 to 255 when the on-chip oscillator is selected Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 450 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.3.6 Flash Memory Characteristics Table 22.18 Flash Memory Characteristics VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Test Condition Values Min. -- -- 1000 1 50 1n6 7 n 1000 Additionalprogramming 28 198 8 5 5 4 2 2 100 -- Typ. 7.0 10.0 10000 -- -- 30 200 10 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max. 200.0 20.0 -- -- -- 32 202 12 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1000 Unit ms ms Times s s s s s s s s s s s Times Item Programming time (per 128 bytes)* * * Erase time (per block) * * * Reprogramming count Programming Wait time after setting SWE bit*1 Wait time after setting PSU bit*1 Wait time after setting P bit ** 1 4 1 3 6 1 2 4 Symbol tP tE NWEC x y z1 z2 z3 Wait time after clearing P bit*1 Wait time after clearing PSU bit*1 Wait time after setting PV bit*1 Wait time after dummy write*1 Wait time after clearing PV bit*1 Wait time after clearing SWE bit*1 Maximum programming count *1*4*5 N Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 451 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Values Min. 1 100 10 10 10 20 2 4 100 -- Typ. -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max. -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 120 Unit s s ms s s s s s s Times Item Erasing Wait time after setting SWE bit*1 Wait time after setting ESU bit*1 Wait time after setting E bit*1*6 Wait time after clearing E bit*1 Symbol x y z Test Condition Wait time after clearing ESU bit*1 Wait time after setting EV bit*1 Wait time after dummy write*1 Wait time after clearing EV bit*1 Wait time after clearing SWE bit*1 Maximum erase count *1*6*7 N Notes: 1. Make the time settings in accordance with the program/erase algorithms. 2. The programming time for 128 bytes. (Indicates the total time for which the P bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) is set. The program-verify time is not included.) 3. The time required to erase one block. (Indicates the time for which the E bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) is set. The erase-verify time is not included.) 4. Programming time maximum value (tP(max.)) = wait time after P bit setting (z) x maximum programming count (N) 5. Set the maximum programming count (N) according to the actual set values of z1, z2, and z3 so that it does not exceed the programming time maximum value (tP(max.)). The wait time after setting P bit (z1, z2) should be changed as follows according to the value of the programming count (n). Programming count (n) 1n6 z1 = 30 s 7 n 1000 z2 = 200 s 6. Erase time maximum value (tE(max.)) = wait time after E bit setting (z) x maximum erase count (N) 7. Set the maximum erase count (N) according to the actual set value of (z) so that it does not exceed the erase time maximum value (tE(max.)). Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 452 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.3.7 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics Table 22.19 Power-Supply-Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Values Item Symbol Min. Typ. Max. Unit Power-supply falling detection voltage Power-supply rising detection voltage Reset detection voltage 1* Lower-limit voltage of LVDR operation Note: * Vint (D) Vint (U) Vreset1 VLVDRmin 2.8 2.9 -- 1.0 2.9 3.0 2.3 -- 3.05 3.15 2.6 -- V V V V This voltage should be used when the falling and rising voltage detection function is used. 22.3.8 LVDI External Input Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics Table 22.20 LVDI External Input Voltage Detection Circuit Characteristics Vcc = 3.0 to 3.6 V, AVcc = 3.0 to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C Test Condition Values Min. 0.95 Typ. 1.15 Max. 1.35 Unit V Item Symbol Vexd ExtD/ExtU input detection voltage ExtD/ExtU input voltage range VextD/VextU VextD > VextU -0.3 Lower V voltage of AVcc + 0.3 or Vcc + 0.3 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 453 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.3.9 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics Table 22.21 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C/-40 to +85C, unless otherwise indicated. Test Condition Values Min. 100 -- Typ. 150 -- Max -- 100 Unit k mV Item Symbol RRES Vpor Pull-up resistance of RES pin Power-on reset start voltage* Note: * The power-supply voltage (Vcc) must fall below Vpor = 100 mV and then rise after charge of the RES pin is removed completely. In order to remove charge of the RES pin, it is recommended that the diode be placed in the Vcc side. If the power-supply voltage (Vcc) rises from the point over 100 mV, a power-on reset may not occur. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 454 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.4 Operation Timing t OSC VIH OSC1 VIL t CPH t CPr t CPL t CPf Figure 22.1 System Clock Input Timing VCC VCC x 0.7 OSC1 tREL RES VIL VIL tREL Figure 22.2 RES Low Width Timing NMI IRQ0 to IRQ3 WKP0 to WKP5 ADTRG FTIOA0 to FTIOD0, FTIOA1 to FTIOD1, TMCIV, TMRIV TRGV VIH VIL t IL t IH Figure 22.3 Input Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 455 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics SDA tBUF VIH VIL tSTAH tSCLH tSTAS tSP tSTOS SCL P* S* tSf tSCLL tSCL Sr* tSr tSDAH tSDAS P* Note: * S, P, and Sr represent the following: S: Start condition P: Stop condition Sr: Retransmission start condition Figure 22.4 I C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing t SCKW 2 SCK3 t Scyc Figure 22.5 SCK3 Input Clock Timing Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 456 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics t Scyc SCK3 VIH or VOH * VIL or VOL * t TXD TXD (transmit data) VOH VOL * * t RXS t RXH RXD (receive data) Note: * Output timing reference levels Output high: Output low: V OH= 2.0 V V OL= 0.8 V Load conditions are shown in figure 22.7. Figure 22.6 SCI Input/Output Timing in Clock Synchronous Mode Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 457 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.5 Output Load Condition VCC 2.4 k LSI output pin 30 pF 12 k Figure 22.7 Output Load Circuit Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 458 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Appendix A Instruction Set A.1 Instruction List Condition Code Symbol Rd Rs Rn ERd ERs ERn (EAd) (EAs) PC SP CCR N Z V C disp + - x / ( ), < > Description General destination register General source register General register General destination register (address register or 32-bit register) General source register (address register or 32-bit register) General register (32-bit register) Destination operand Source operand Program counter Stack pointer Condition-code register N (negative) flag in CCR Z (zero) flag in CCR V (overflow) flag in CCR C (carry) flag in CCR Displacement Transfer from the operand on the left to the operand on the right, or transition from the state on the left to the state on the right Addition of the operands on both sides Subtraction of the operand on the right from the operand on the left Multiplication of the operands on both sides Division of the operand on the left by the operand on the right Logical AND of the operands on both sides Logical OR of the operands on both sides Logical exclusive OR of the operands on both sides NOT (logical complement) Contents of operand Note: General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L) and 16-bit registers (R0 to R7 and E0 to E7). Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 459 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Condition Code Notation (cont) Symbol Description Changed according to execution result Undetermined (no guaranteed value) Cleared to 0 Set to 1 Not affected by execution of the instruction Varies depending on conditions, described in notes * 0 1 -- Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 460 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Table A.1 Instruction Set 1. Data Transfer Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C MOV MOV.B #xx:8, Rd B B B B B B 2 2 2 4 8 2 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- #xx:8 Rd8 Rs8 Rd8 @ERs Rd8 @(d:16, ERs) Rd8 @(d:24, ERs) Rd8 @ERs Rd8 ERs32+1 ERs32 2 4 6 2 4 8 2 @aa:8 Rd8 @aa:16 Rd8 @aa:24 Rd8 Rs8 @ERd Rs8 @(d:16, ERd) Rs8 @(d:24, ERd) ERd32-1 ERd32 Rs8 @ERd 2 4 6 Rs8 @aa:8 Rs8 @aa:16 Rs8 @aa:24 #xx:16 Rd16 2 2 4 8 2 Rs16 Rd16 @ERs Rd16 @(d:16, ERs) Rd16 @(d:24, ERs) Rd16 @ERs Rd16 ERs32+2 @ERd32 4 6 2 4 8 @aa:16 Rd16 @aa:24 Rd16 Rs16 @ERd Rs16 @(d:16, ERd) Rs16 @(d:24, ERd) 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 2 2 4 6 10 6 MOV.B Rs, Rd MOV.B @ERs, Rd MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd MOV.B @ERs+, Rd MOV.B @aa:8, Rd MOV.B @aa:16, Rd MOV.B @aa:24, Rd MOV.B Rs, @ERd MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @-ERd B B B B B B B ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 4 6 8 4 6 10 6 MOV.B Rs, @aa:8 MOV.B Rs, @aa:16 MOV.B Rs, @aa:24 MOV.W #xx:16, Rd MOV.W Rs, Rd MOV.W @ERs, Rd B B B W4 W W ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 4 6 8 4 2 4 6 10 6 MOV.W @(d:16, ERs), Rd W MOV.W @(d:24, ERs), Rd W MOV.W @ERs+, Rd W MOV.W @aa:16, Rd MOV.W @aa:24, Rd MOV.W Rs, @ERd W W W ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 6 8 4 6 10 MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, ERd) W MOV.W Rs, @(d:24, ERd) W Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 461 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C MOV MOV.W Rs, @-ERd MOV.W Rs, @aa:16 MOV.W Rs, @aa:24 MOV.L #xx:32, Rd MOV.L ERs, ERd MOV.L @ERs, ERd MOV.L @(d:16, ERs), ERd MOV.L @(d:24, ERs), ERd MOV.L @ERs+, ERd W 2 ERd32-2 ERd32 Rs16 @ERd 4 6 Rs16 @aa:16 Rs16 @aa:24 #xx:32 Rd32 ERs32 ERd32 ---- 0-- 6 W W L L L L L L 6 2 4 6 10 4 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 6 8 6 2 8 10 14 10 @ERs ERd32 @(d:16, ERs) ERd32 @(d:24, ERs) ERd32 @ERs ERd32 ERs32+4 ERs32 6 8 @aa:16 ERd32 @aa:24 ERd32 ERs32 @ERd 6 10 4 ERs32 @(d:16, ERd) ERs32 @(d:24, ERd) ERd32-4 ERd32 ERs32 @ERd 6 8 ERs32 @aa:16 ERs32 @aa:24 2 @SP Rn16 SP+2 SP 4 @SP ERn32 SP+4 SP 2 SP-2 SP Rn16 @SP 4 SP-4 SP ERn32 @SP 4 Cannot be used in this LSI Cannot be used in this LSI MOV.L @aa:16, ERd MOV.L @aa:24, ERd MOV.L ERs, @ERd MOV.L ERs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.L ERs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.L ERs, @-ERd L L L L L L 4 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 10 12 8 10 14 10 MOV.L ERs, @aa:16 MOV.L ERs, @aa:24 POP POP.W Rn POP.L ERn L L W ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 10 12 6 L ---- 0-- 10 PUSH PUSH.W Rn PUSH.L ERn W ---- 0-- 6 L ---- 0-- 10 MOVFPE MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd B Cannot be used in this LSI Cannot be used in this LSI MOVTPE MOVTPE Rs, @aa:16 B 4 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 462 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix 2. Arithmetic Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) No. of States*1 Condition Code @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C ADD ADD.B #xx:8, Rd ADD.B Rs, Rd ADD.W #xx:16, Rd ADD.W Rs, Rd ADD.L #xx:32, ERd B B 2 2 -- -- Rd8+#xx:8 Rd8 Rd8+Rs8 Rd8 Rd16+#xx:16 Rd16 2 Rd16+Rs16 Rd16 ERd32+#xx:32 ERd32 2 ERd32+ERs32 ERd32 Rd8+#xx:8 +C Rd8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rd8+Rs8 +C Rd8 ERd32+1 ERd32 ERd32+2 ERd32 ERd32+4 ERd32 Rd8+1 Rd8 Rd16+1 Rd16 Rd16+2 Rd16 ERd32+1 ERd32 ERd32+2 ERd32 Rd8 decimal adjust Rd8 Rd8-Rs8 Rd8 Rd16-#xx:16 Rd16 2 Rd16-Rs16 Rd16 2 2 4 2 6 W4 W L 6 -- (1) -- (1) -- (2) ADD.L ERs, ERd L -- (2) 2 ADDX ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd ADDX.B Rs, Rd ADDS ADDS.L #1, ERd ADDS.L #2, ERd ADDS.L #4, ERd INC INC.B Rd INC.W #1, Rd INC.W #2, Rd INC.L #1, ERd INC.L #2, ERd DAA SUB DAA Rd B B L L L B W W L L B 2 -- -- (3) (3) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ------------ ------------ ------------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- --* -- -- -- -- -- * SUB.B Rs, Rd SUB.W #xx:16, Rd SUB.W Rs, Rd SUB.L #xx:32, ERd SUB.L ERs, ERd B W4 W L L B B L L L B W W 2 6 2 -- 2 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 -- (1) -- (1) ERd32-#xx:32 ERd32 -- (2) 2 ERd32-ERs32 ERd32 -- (2) SUBX SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd SUBX.B Rs, Rd SUBS SUBS.L #1, ERd SUBS.L #2, ERd SUBS.L #4, ERd DEC DEC.B Rd DEC.W #1, Rd DEC.W #2, Rd Rd8-#xx:8-C Rd8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rd8-Rs8-C Rd8 ERd32-1 ERd32 ERd32-2 ERd32 ERd32-4 ERd32 Rd8-1 Rd8 Rd16-1 Rd16 Rd16-2 Rd16 -- -- (3) (3) ------------ ------------ ------------ ---- ---- ---- -- -- -- Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 463 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C DEC DEC.L #1, ERd DEC.L #2, ERd DAS DAS.Rd L L B 2 2 2 ---- ---- --* ERd32-1 ERd32 ERd32-2 ERd32 Rd8 decimal adjust Rd8 Rd8 x Rs8 Rd16 (unsigned multiplication) Rd16 x Rs16 ERd32 (unsigned multiplication) Rd8 x Rs8 Rd16 (signed multiplication) Rd16 x Rs16 ERd32 (signed multiplication) Rd16 / Rs8 Rd16 (RdH: remainder, RdL: quotient) (unsigned division) ERd32 / Rs16 ERd32 (Ed: remainder, Rd: quotient) (unsigned division) Rd16 / Rs8 Rd16 (RdH: remainder, RdL: quotient) (signed division) ERd32 / Rs16 ERd32 (Ed: remainder, Rd: quotient) (signed division) Rd8-#xx:8 -- -- 2 2 2 *-- MULXU MULXU. B Rs, Rd B 2 ------------ 14 MULXU. W Rs, ERd W 2 ------------ 22 MULXS MULXS. B Rs, Rd B 4 ---- ---- 16 MULXS. W Rs, ERd W 4 ---- ---- 24 DIVXU DIVXU. B Rs, Rd B 2 -- -- (6) (7) -- -- 14 DIVXU. W Rs, ERd W 2 -- -- (6) (7) -- -- 22 DIVXS DIVXS. B Rs, Rd B 4 -- -- (8) (7) -- -- 16 DIVXS. W Rs, ERd W 4 -- -- (8) (7) -- -- 24 CMP CMP.B #xx:8, Rd CMP.B Rs, Rd CMP.W #xx:16, Rd CMP.W Rs, Rd CMP.L #xx:32, ERd CMP.L ERs, ERd B B 2 2 -- -- 2 2 4 2 4 2 Rd8-Rs8 Rd16-#xx:16 W4 W L L 6 2 2 -- (1) -- (1) -- (2) -- (2) Rd16-Rs16 ERd32-#xx:32 ERd32-ERs32 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 464 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) No. of States*1 Condition Code @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C NEG NEG.B Rd NEG.W Rd NEG.L ERd EXTU EXTU.W Rd EXTU.L ERd B W L W 2 2 2 2 -- -- -- 0-Rd8 Rd8 0-Rd16 Rd16 0-ERd32 ERd32 0 ( 2 2 2 2 ---- 0 0-- L 2 ---- 0 0-- 2 EXTS EXTS.W Rd EXTS.L ERd W 2 ---- 0-- 2 L 2 ---- 0-- 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 465 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix 3. Logic Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) No. of States*1 Condition Code @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C AND AND.B #xx:8, Rd AND.B Rs, Rd AND.W #xx:16, Rd AND.W Rs, Rd AND.L #xx:32, ERd AND.L ERs, ERd B B 2 2 ---- ---- ---- ---- Rd8#xx:8 Rd8 Rd8Rs8 Rd8 Rd16#xx:16 Rd16 2 Rd16Rs16 Rd16 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 2 W4 W L L B B W4 W L L B B W4 W L L B W L 6 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 4 2 2 2 6 4 ERd32#xx:32 ERd32 -- -- ERd32ERs32 ERd32 -- -- Rd8#xx:8 Rd8 Rd8Rs8 Rd8 Rd16#xx:16 Rd16 Rd16Rs16 Rd16 ERd32#xx:32 ERd32 ERd32ERs32 ERd32 Rd8#xx:8 Rd8 Rd8Rs8 Rd8 Rd16#xx:16 Rd16 Rd16Rs16 Rd16 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- OR OR.B #xx:8, Rd OR.B Rs, Rd OR.W #xx:16, Rd OR.W Rs, Rd OR.L #xx:32, ERd OR.L ERs, ERd XOR XOR.B #xx:8, Rd XOR.B Rs, Rd XOR.W #xx:16, Rd XOR.W Rs, Rd XOR.L #xx:32, ERd XOR.L ERs, ERd ERd32#xx:32 ERd32 -- -- ERd32ERs32 ERd32 -- -- Rd8 Rd8 Rd16 Rd16 Rd32 Rd32 ---- ---- ---- NOT NOT.B Rd NOT.W Rd NOT.L ERd Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 466 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix 4. Shift Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C SHAL SHAL.B Rd SHAL.W Rd SHAL.L ERd SHAR SHAR.B Rd SHAR.W Rd SHAR.L ERd SHLL SHLL.B Rd SHLL.W Rd SHLL.L ERd SHLR SHLR.B Rd SHLR.W Rd SHLR.L ERd ROTXL ROTXL.B Rd B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L B W L 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 C MSB LSB C MSB C MSB 0 MSB C MSB LSB C MSB C MSB LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB 0 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ---- ---- ---- C ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ROTXL.W Rd ROTXL.L ERd ROTXR ROTXR.B Rd ROTXR.W Rd ROTXR.L ERd ROTL ROTL.B Rd ROTL.W Rd ROTL.L ERd ROTR ROTR.B Rd ROTR.W Rd ROTR.L ERd C MSB LSB ---- ---- Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 467 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix 5. Bit-Manipulation Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C BSET BSET #xx:3, Rd BSET #xx:3, @ERd BSET #xx:3, @aa:8 BSET Rn, Rd BSET Rn, @ERd BSET Rn, @aa:8 BCLR BCLR #xx:3, Rd BCLR #xx:3, @ERd BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8 BCLR Rn, Rd BCLR Rn, @ERd BCLR Rn, @aa:8 BNOT BNOT #xx:3, Rd B B B B B B B B B B B B B 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 (#xx:3 of Rd8) 1 (#xx:3 of @ERd) 1 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 1 (Rn8 of Rd8) 1 (Rn8 of @ERd) 1 (Rn8 of @aa:8) 1 (#xx:3 of Rd8) 0 (#xx:3 of @ERd) 0 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 0 (Rn8 of Rd8) 0 (Rn8 of @ERd) 0 (Rn8 of @aa:8) 0 (#xx:3 of Rd8) (#xx:3 of Rd8) 4 (#xx:3 of @ERd) (#xx:3 of @ERd) 4 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) (#xx:3 of @aa:8) (Rn8 of Rd8) (Rn8 of Rd8) 4 (Rn8 of @ERd) (Rn8 of @ERd) 4 (Rn8 of @aa:8) (Rn8 of @aa:8) (#xx:3 of Rd8) Z 4 4 (#xx:3 of @ERd) Z (#xx:3 of @aa:8) Z (Rn8 of @Rd8) Z 4 4 (Rn8 of @ERd) Z (Rn8 of @aa:8) Z (#xx:3 of Rd8) C ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 BNOT #xx:3, @ERd B ------------ 8 BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8 B ------------ 8 BNOT Rn, Rd B 2 ------------ 2 BNOT Rn, @ERd B ------------ 8 BNOT Rn, @aa:8 B ------------ 8 BTST BTST #xx:3, Rd BTST #xx:3, @ERd BTST #xx:3, @aa:8 BTST Rn, Rd BTST Rn, @ERd BTST Rn, @aa:8 BLD BLD #xx:3, Rd B B B B B B B 2 ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 2 2 ---------- Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 468 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C BLD BLD #xx:3, @ERd BLD #xx:3, @aa:8 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- (#xx:3 of @ERd) C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C (#xx:3 of @ERd) C 4 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) 4 C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) 4 C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C 4 C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) C 4 C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C 4 C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) C 4 C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C C(#xx:3 of @ERd24) C 4 C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C C (#xx:3 of Rd8) C 6 6 2 6 6 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 BILD BILD #xx:3, Rd BILD #xx:3, @ERd BILD #xx:3, @aa:8 BST BST #xx:3, Rd BST #xx:3, @ERd BST #xx:3, @aa:8 BIST BIST #xx:3, Rd BIST #xx:3, @ERd BIST #xx:3, @aa:8 BAND BAND #xx:3, Rd BAND #xx:3, @ERd BAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BIAND BIAND #xx:3, Rd BIAND #xx:3, @ERd BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BOR BOR #xx:3, Rd BOR #xx:3, @ERd BOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BIOR BIOR #xx:3, Rd BIOR #xx:3, @ERd BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BXOR BXOR #xx:3, Rd BXOR #xx:3, @ERd BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BIXOR BIXOR #xx:3, Rd BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 4 ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) C -- -- -- -- -- C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) C ---------- Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 469 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix 6. Branching Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) Branch Condition If condition Always is true then PC PC+d Never else next; C Z = 0 I H N Z V C Bcc BRA d:8 (BT d:8) BRA d:16 (BT d:16) BRN d:8 (BF d:8) BRN d:16 (BF d:16) BHI d:8 BHI d:16 BLS d:8 BLS d:16 BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) BCC d:16 (BHS d:16) BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) BCS d:16 (BLO d:16) BNE d:8 BNE d:16 BEQ d:8 BEQ d:16 BVC d:8 BVC d:16 BVS d:8 BVS d:16 BPL d:8 BPL d:16 BMI d:8 BMI d:16 BGE d:8 BGE d:16 BLT d:8 BLT d:16 BGT d:8 BGT d:16 BLE d:8 BLE d:16 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 C Z = 1 ------------ ------------ C=0 ------------ ------------ C=1 ------------ ------------ Z=0 ------------ ------------ Z=1 ------------ ------------ V=0 ------------ ------------ V=1 ------------ ------------ N=0 ------------ ------------ N=1 ------------ ------------ NV = 0 ------------ ------------ NV = 1 ------------ ------------ Z (NV) = 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- ------------ Z (NV) = 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- ------------ Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 470 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) No. of States*1 Condition Code @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C JMP JMP @ERn JMP @aa:24 JMP @@aa:8 -- -- -- -- 2 4 2 2 PC ERn PC aa:24 PC @aa:8 PC @-SP PC PC+d:8 PC @-SP PC PC+d:16 PC @-SP PC ERn 4 PC @-SP PC aa:24 2 PC @-SP PC @aa:8 2 PC @SP+ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ 8 6 4 6 10 8 BSR BSR d:8 BSR d:16 JSR -- 4 ------------ 8 10 JSR @ERn -- 2 ------------ 6 JSR @aa:24 -- ------------ 8 10 JSR @@aa:8 -- ------------ 8 12 RTS RTS -- ------------ 8 10 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 471 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced 8 Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix 7. System Control Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C TRAPA TRAPA #x:2 -- 2 PC @-SP CCR @-SP 1 -- -- -- -- -- 14 16 RTE RTE -- 10 SLEEP SLEEP -- ------------ 2 LDC LDC #xx:8, CCR LDC Rs, CCR LDC @ERs, CCR LDC @(d:16, ERs), CCR LDC @(d:24, ERs), CCR LDC @ERs+, CCR B B W W W W 2 2 6 8 12 8 LDC @aa:16, CCR LDC @aa:24, CCR STC STC CCR, Rd STC CCR, @ERd STC CCR, @(d:16, ERd) STC CCR, @(d:24, ERd) STC CCR, @-ERd W W B W W W W 8 10 2 6 8 12 8 ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ STC CCR, @aa:16 STC CCR, @aa:24 ANDC ANDC #xx:8, CCR ORC NOP W W B B B -- 8 10 2 2 2 2 ORC #xx:8, CCR XORC XORC #xx:8, CCR NOP ------------ Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 472 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- Appendix 8. Block Transfer Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (bytes) No. of States*1 Condition Code @-ERn/@ERn+ Operand Size @(d, ERn) I H N Z V C EEPMOV EEPMOV. B -- 4 if R4L 0 then repeat @R5 @R6 R5+1 R5 R6+1 R6 R4L-1 R4L until R4L=0 else next 4 if R4 0 then repeat @R5 @R6 R5+1 R5 R6+1 R6 R4-1 R4 until R4=0 else next -- -- -- -- -- -- 8+ 4n*2 EEPMOV. W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 8+ 4n*2 Notes: 1. The number of states in cases where the instruction code and its operands are located in on-chip memory is shown here. For other cases see appendix A.3, Number of Execution States. 2. n is the value set in register R4L or R4. (1) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0. (2) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0. (3) Retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. (4) Set to 1 when the adjustment produces a carry; otherwise retains its previous value. (5) The number of states required for execution of an instruction that transfers data in synchronization with the E clock is variable. (6) Set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. (7) Set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. (8) Set to 1 when the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 473 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Advanced Mnemonic Operation @(d, PC) Normal @@aa @ERn @aa #xx Rn -- A.2 Appendix Table A.2 Instruction code: REJ09B0216-0300 1st byte 2nd byte AH AL BH BL Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 0. Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 1. 4 5 XORC ADD SUB Table A.2 Table A.2 (2) (2) CMP AL 2 LDC OR.B XOR.B AND.B Table A.2 (2) AH ORC SUBX ANDC LDC Table A.2 Table A.2 (2) (2) MOV 0 ADDX 1 3 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Table A.2 (2) Table A.2 (2) 0 NOP Table A.2 (2) STC 1 Table A.2 Table A.2 Table A.2 Table A.2 (2) (2) (2) (2) 2 MOV.B Operation Code Map Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 474 of 528 Operation Code Map (1) 3 BLS DIVXU BST OR BTST BOR MOV BIOR ADD ADDX CMP SUBX OR XOR AND MOV 4 RTS XOR BXOR BIXOR BIAND BILD BAND BIST BLD AND BSR RTE TRAPA Table A.2 (2) BRA JMP MOV Table A.2 Table A.2 EEPMOV (2) (2) BRN BHI BCC BCS BNE BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BSR BLT BGT JSR BLE 5 MULXU DIVXU MULXU 6 BSET BNOT BCLR 7 Table A.2 (3) 8 9 A B C D E F Table A.2 Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte AH AL BH BL 2 LDC/STC ADD INC INC ADDS INC INC BH AH AL 3 SLEEP Table A.2 Table A.2 (3) (3) 0 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Table A.2 (3) 01 MOV 0A INC 0B ADDS Operation Code Map (2) 0F SHLL SHAL SHAR ROTL ROTR DAA MOV SHAL SHAR ROTL ROTR NEG NEG EXTS EXTS 10 SHLR ROTXL ROTXR NOT EXTU EXTU SHLL 11 SHLR 12 ROTXL 13 ROTXR 17 NOT 1A DEC DEC DEC SUB SUB DEC DEC 1B SUBS 1F BHI CMP CMP SUB SUB BLS DAS BCC OR OR BCS XOR XOR BNE AND AND BEQ CMP 58 BRA BRN BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BLT BGT BLE 79 MOV ADD 7A MOV ADD Appendix Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 475 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Table A.2 REJ09B0216-0300 Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte AH AL BH BL CH CL DH DL Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 0. Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 1. CL 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F AH ALBH BLCH LDC STC LDC STC LDC 0 1 01406 MULXS DIVXS OR BTST BOR BXOR BIXOR BIST STC LDC STC Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 476 of 528 Operation Code Map (3) 01C05 MULXS 01D05 XOR AND DIVXS 01F06 7Cr06 * 1 BAND BIAND BILD BST BLD 7Cr07 * 1 BTST BIOR 7Dr06 * 1 BCLR BCLR BTST BOR BTST BIOR BCLR BIST BSET BNOT 7Dr07 * 1 BSET BNOT 7Eaa6 * 2 BXOR BIXOR BIAND BAND 7Eaa7 * 2 BLD BILD BST 7Faa6 * 2 BCLR BSET BNOT 7Faa7 * 2 BSET BNOT Notes: 1. r is the register designation field. 2. aa is the absolute address field. Appendix A.3 Number of Execution States The status of execution for each instruction of the H8/300H CPU and the method of calculating the number of states required for instruction execution are shown below. Table A.4 shows the number of cycles of each type occurring in each instruction, such as instruction fetch and data read/write. Table A.3 shows the number of states required for each cycle. The total number of states required for execution of an instruction can be calculated by the following expression: Execution states = I x SI + J x SJ + K x SK + L x SL + M x SM + N x SN Examples: When instruction is fetched from on-chip ROM, and an on-chip RAM is accessed. BSET #0, @FF00 From table A.4: I = L = 2, J = K = M = N= 0 From table A.3: SI = 2, SL = 2 Number of states required for execution = 2 x 2 + 2 x 2 = 8 When instruction is fetched from on-chip ROM, branch address is read from on-chip ROM, and on-chip RAM is used for stack area. JSR @@ 30 From table A.4: I = 2, J = K = 1, From table A.3: SI = SJ = SK = 2 Number of states required for execution = 2 x 2 + 1 x 2+ 1 x 2 = 8 L=M=N=0 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 477 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Table A.3 Number of Cycles in Each Instruction Access Location On-Chip Memory SI SJ SK SL SM SN 2 or 3* 2 or 3* 1 2 On-Chip Peripheral Module -- Execution Status (Instruction Cycle) Instruction fetch Branch address read Stack operation Byte data access Word data access Internal operation Note: * Depends on which on-chip peripheral module is accessed. See section 21.1, Register Addresses (Address Order). Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 478 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Table A.4 Number of Cycles in Each Instruction Instruction Fetch Branch J Stack K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N Addr. Read Operation Instruction Mnemonic ADD ADD.B #xx:8, Rd ADD.B Rs, Rd ADD.W #xx:16, Rd ADD.W Rs, Rd ADD.L #xx:32, ERd ADD.L ERs, ERd ADDS ADDX ADDS #1/2/4, ERd ADDX #xx:8, Rd ADDX Rs, Rd AND AND.B #xx:8, Rd AND.B Rs, Rd AND.W #xx:16, Rd AND.W Rs, Rd AND.L #xx:32, ERd AND.L ERs, ERd ANDC BAND ANDC #xx:8, CCR BAND #xx:3, Rd BAND #xx:3, @ERd BAND #xx:3, @aa:8 I 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 479 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Instruction Fetch Instruction Mnemonic Bcc BRA d:8 (BT d:8) BRN d:8 (BF d:8) BHI d:8 BLS d:8 BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) BNE d:8 BEQ d:8 BVC d:8 BVS d:8 BPL d:8 BMI d:8 BGE d:8 Bcc BLT d:8 BGT d:8 BLE d:8 BRA d:16(BT d:16) BRN d:16(BF d:16) BHI d:16 BLS d:16 BCC d:16(BHS d:16) BCS d:16(BLO d:16) BNE d:16 BEQ d:16 BVC d:16 BVS d:16 BPL d:16 BMI d:16 BGE d:16 BLT d:16 BGT d:16 BLE d:16 I 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Branch J Stack K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N Addr. Read Operation 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 480 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Instruction Fetch Instruction Mnemonic BCLR BCLR #xx:3, Rd BCLR #xx:3, @ERd BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8 BCLR Rn, Rd BCLR Rn, @ERd BCLR Rn, @aa:8 BIAND BIAND #xx:3, Rd BIAND #xx:3, @ERd BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BILD BILD #xx:3, Rd BILD #xx:3, @ERd BILD #xx:3, @aa:8 BIOR BIOR #xx:8, Rd BIOR #xx:8, @ERd BIOR #xx:8, @aa:8 BIST BIST #xx:3, Rd BIST #xx:3, @ERd BIST #xx:3, @aa:8 BIXOR BIXOR #xx:3, Rd BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BLD BLD #xx:3, Rd BLD #xx:3, @ERd BLD #xx:3, @aa:8 BNOT BNOT #xx:3, Rd BNOT #xx:3, @ERd BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8 BNOT Rn, Rd BNOT Rn, @ERd BNOT Rn, @aa:8 I 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 Branch J Stack K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N Addr. Read Operation 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 481 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Instruction Fetch Instruction Mnemonic BOR BOR #xx:3, Rd BOR #xx:3, @ERd BOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BSET BSET #xx:3, Rd BSET #xx:3, @ERd BSET #xx:3, @aa:8 BSET Rn, Rd BSET Rn, @ERd BSET Rn, @aa:8 BSR BSR d:8 BSR d:16 BST BST #xx:3, Rd BST #xx:3, @ERd BST #xx:3, @aa:8 BTST BTST #xx:3, Rd BTST #xx:3, @ERd BTST #xx:3, @aa:8 BTST Rn, Rd BTST Rn, @ERd BTST Rn, @aa:8 BXOR BXOR #xx:3, Rd BXOR #xx:3, @ERd BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 CMP CMP.B #xx:8, Rd CMP.B Rs, Rd CMP.W #xx:16, Rd CMP.W Rs, Rd CMP.L #xx:32, ERd CMP.L ERs, ERd DAA DAS DAA Rd DAS Rd I 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 Branch J Stack K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N Addr. Read Operation 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 482 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Instruction Fetch Instruction Mnemonic DEC DEC.B Rd DEC.W #1/2, Rd DEC.L #1/2, ERd DUVXS DIVXS.B Rs, Rd DIVXS.W Rs, ERd DIVXU DIVXU.B Rs, Rd DIVXU.W Rs, ERd EEPMOV EEPMOV.B EEPMOV.W EXTS EXTS.W Rd EXTS.L ERd EXTU EXTU.W Rd EXTU.L ERd INC INC.B Rd INC.W #1/2, Rd INC.L #1/2, ERd JMP JMP @ERn JMP @aa:24 JMP @@aa:8 JSR JSR @ERn JSR @aa:24 JSR @@aa:8 LDC LDC #xx:8, CCR LDC Rs, CCR LDC@ERs, CCR LDC@(d:16, ERs), CCR LDC@(d:24,ERs), CCR LDC@ERs+, CCR LDC@aa:16, CCR LDC@aa:24, CCR I 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 Branch J Stack K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N Addr. Read Operation 12 20 12 20 2n+2* 2n+2* 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 483 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Instruction Fetch Instruction Mnemonic MOV MOV.B #xx:8, Rd MOV.B Rs, Rd MOV.B @ERs, Rd MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd MOV.B @ERs+, Rd MOV.B @aa:8, Rd MOV.B @aa:16, Rd MOV.B @aa:24, Rd MOV.B Rs, @Erd MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd) MOV.B Rs, @-ERd MOV.B Rs, @aa:8 MOV MOV.B Rs, @aa:16 MOV.B Rs, @aa:24 MOV.W #xx:16, Rd MOV.W Rs, Rd MOV.W @ERs, Rd MOV.W @(d:16,ERs), Rd MOV.W @(d:24,ERs), Rd MOV.W @ERs+, Rd MOV.W @aa:16, Rd MOV.W @aa:24, Rd MOV.W Rs, @ERd MOV.W Rs, @(d:16,ERd) MOV.W Rs, @(d:24,ERd) I 1 1 1 2 4 1 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 3 1 2 4 Branch J Stack K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N Addr. Read Operation 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 484 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Instruction Fetch Instruction Mnemonic MOV MOV.W Rs, @-ERd MOV.W Rs, @aa:16 MOV.W Rs, @aa:24 MOV.L #xx:32, ERd MOV.L ERs, ERd MOV.L @ERs, ERd MOV.L @(d:16,ERs), ERd MOV.L @(d:24,ERs), ERd MOV.L @ERs+, ERd MOV.L @aa:16, ERd MOV.L @aa:24, ERd MOV.L ERs,@ERd MOV.L ERs, @(d:16,ERd) MOV.L ERs, @(d:24,ERd) MOV.L ERs, @-ERd MOV.L ERs, @aa:16 MOV.L ERs, @aa:24 MOVFPE MOVTPE MULXS MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd* MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16* MULXS.B Rs, Rd MULXS.W Rs, ERd MULXU MULXU.B Rs, Rd MULXU.W Rs, ERd NEG NEG.B Rd NEG.W Rd NEG.L ERd NOP NOT NOP NOT.B Rd NOT.W Rd NOT.L ERd 2 2 Branch J Stack K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M 1 1 1 Internal Operation N 2 Addr. Read Operation I 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 4 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 12 20 12 20 2 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 485 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Instruction Fetch Instruction Mnemonic OR OR.B #xx:8, Rd OR.B Rs, Rd OR.W #xx:16, Rd OR.W Rs, Rd OR.L #xx:32, ERd OR.L ERs, ERd ORC POP ORC #xx:8, CCR POP.W Rn POP.L ERn PUSH PUSH.W Rn PUSH.L ERn ROTL ROTL.B Rd ROTL.W Rd ROTL.L ERd ROTR ROTR.B Rd ROTR.W Rd ROTR.L ERd ROTXL ROTXL.B Rd ROTXL.W Rd ROTXL.L ERd ROTXR ROTXR.B Rd ROTXR.W Rd ROTXR.L ERd RTE RTS SHAL RTE RTS SHAL.B Rd SHAL.W Rd SHAL.L ERd SHAR SHAR.B Rd SHAR.W Rd SHAR.L ERd I 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 Branch J Stack K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N Addr. Read Operation 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 486 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Instruction Fetch Instruction Mnemonic SHLL SHLL.B Rd SHLL.W Rd SHLL.L ERd SHLR SHLR.B Rd SHLR.W Rd SHLR.L ERd SLEEP STC SLEEP STC CCR, Rd STC CCR, @ERd STC CCR, @(d:16,ERd) STC CCR, @(d:24,ERd) STC CCR,@-ERd STC CCR, @aa:16 STC CCR, @aa:24 SUB SUB.B Rs, Rd SUB.W #xx:16, Rd SUB.W Rs, Rd SUB.L #xx:32, ERd SUB.L ERs, ERd SUBS SUBX SUBS #1/2/4, ERd SUBX #xx:8, Rd SUBX. Rs, Rd TRAPA XOR TRAPA #xx:2 XOR.B #xx:8, Rd XOR.B Rs, Rd XOR.W #xx:16, Rd XOR.W Rs, Rd XOR.L #xx:32, ERd XOR.L ERs, ERd XORC XORC #xx:8, CCR I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 Branch J Stack K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N Addr. Read Operation 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 4 Notes: 1. n: Specified value in R4L and R4. The source and destination operands are accessed n+1 times respectively. 2. Cannot be used in this LSI. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 487 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix A.4 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes Addressing Mode @ERn+/@ERn @(d:16.ERn) @(d:24.ERn) @(d:16.PC) Table A.5 @@aa:8 Functions Instructions @ERn #xx @(d:8.PC) @aa:16 @aa:24 @aa:8 Rn Data MOV transfer POP, PUSH instructions MOVFPE, MOVTPE Arithmetic ADD, CMP operations SUB ADDX, SUBX ADDS, SUBS INC, DEC DAA, DAS MULXU, MULXS, DIVXU, DIVXS NEG EXTU, EXTS AND, OR, XOR BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- BWL BWL WL BWL B B L -- -- BWL B -- -- BW -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- BWL BWL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- WL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- B -- -- NOT Shift operations Bit manipulations Branching BCC, BSR instructions JMP, JSR RTS System TRAPA control RTE instructions SLEEP LDC STC ANDC, ORC, XORC NOP Block data transfer instructions Logical operations BWL WL BWL BWL BWL B -- -- -- -- -- -- B B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- BW Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 488 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 -- Appendix Appendix B I/O Port Block Diagrams B.1 I/O Port Block Diagrams RES goes low in a reset, and SBY goes low at reset and in standby mode. Internal data bus RES SBY PUCR Pull-up MOS PMR PDR PCR IRQ TRGV [Legend] PUCR: Port pull-up control register PMR: Port mode register PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.1 Port 1 Block Diagram (P17) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 489 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus RES PUCR SBY Pull-up MOS PMR PDR PCR IRQ [Legend] PUCR: Port pull-up control register PMR: Port mode register PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.2 Port 1 Block Diagram (P14, P16) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 490 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus RES SBY PUCR Pull-up MOS PMR PDR PCR IRQ TMIB1 [Legend] PUCR : Port pull-up control register PMR : Port mode register PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.3 Port 1 Block Diagram (P15) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 491 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus RES SBY PUCR Pull-up MOS PDR PCR [Legend] PUCR : Port pull-up control register PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.4 Port 1 Block Diagram (P12) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 492 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus RES SBY PUCR Pull-up MOS PMR PDR PCR 14-bit PWM PWM [Legend] PUCR : Port pull-up control register PMR : Port mode register PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.5 Port 2 Block Diagram (P11) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 493 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus RES SBY PUCR Pull-up MOS PMR PDR PCR RTC TMOW [Legend] PUCR : Port pull-up control register PMR : Port mode register PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.6 Port 1 Block Diagram (P10) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 494 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY PMR PDR PCR [Legend] PMR : Port mode register PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.7 Port 2 Block Diagram (P24, P23) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 495 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY PMR PDR PCR SCI3 TxD [Legend] PMR : Port mode register PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.8 Port 2 Block Diagram (P22) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 496 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY PDR PCR SCI3 RE RxD [Legend] PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.9 Port 2 Block Diagram (P21) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 497 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix SBY SCI3 SCKIE SCKOE Internal data bus PDR PCR SCKO SCKI [Legend] PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.10 Port 2 Block Diagram (P20) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 498 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY PDR PCR [Legend] PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.11 Port 3 Block Diagram (P37 to P30) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 499 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY PMR PDR PCR IIC2 ICE SDAO/SCLO SDAI/SCLI [Legend] PMR : Port mode register PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.12 Port 5 Block Diagram (P57, P56) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 500 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus RES SBY PUCR Pull-up MOS PMR PDR PCR WKP ADTRG [Legend] PUCR: Port pull-up control register PMR: Port mode register PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.13 Port 5 Block Diagram (P55) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 501 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus RES SBY PUCR Pull-up MOS PMR PDR PCR WKP [Legend] PUCR: Port pull-up control register PMR: Port mode register PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.14 Port 5 Block Diagram (P54 to P50) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 502 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY Timer Z Output control signals A to D PDR PCR FTIOA to FTIOD [Legend] PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.15 Port 6 Block Diagram (P67 to P60) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 503 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY Timer V OS3 OS2 OS1 OS0 PDR PCR TMOV [Legend] PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.16 Port 7 Block Diagram (P76) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 504 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY PDR PCR Timer V TMCIV [Legend] PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.17 Port 7 Block Diagram (P75) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 505 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY PDR PCR Timer V TMRIV [Legend] PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.18 Port 7 Block Diagram (P74) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 506 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY PMR PDR PCR SCI3_2 TxD [Legend] PMR : Port mode register PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.19 Port 7 Block Diagram (P72) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 507 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix SBY Internal data bus PDR PCR SCI3_2 RE RxD [Legend] PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.20 Port 7 Block Diagram (P71) SBY SCI3_2 SCKIE SCKOE Internal data bus PDR PCR SCKO SCKI [Legend] PDR : Port data register PCR : Port control register Figure B.21 Port 7 Block Diagram (P70) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 508 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY PDR PCR [Legend] PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.22 Port 8 Block Diagram (P87 to P85) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 509 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus A/D converter CH3 to CH0 SCAN VIN DEC Low voltage detection circuit VDDII ExtD, ExtU Figure B.23 Port B Block Diagram (PB7 and PB6) Internal data bus A/D converter SCAN CH3 to CH0 VIN DEC Figure B.24 Port B Block Diagram (PB5 to PB0) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 510 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY CPG PDR PCR PMRC1 PMRC0 XTALI [Legend] PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.25 Port B Block Diagram (PC1) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 511 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Internal data bus SBY PDR PCR CPG PMRC0 EXTALI [Legend] PDR: Port data register PCR: Port control register Figure B.26 Port B Block Diagram (PC0) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 512 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix B.2 Port Port States in Each Operating State Reset High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance Sleep Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained High impedance Retained Subsleep Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained High impedance Retained Standby Subactive Active Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning High impedance Functioning High Functioning impedance* High impedance High impedance Functioning Functioning P17 to P14, P12 to P10 P24 to P20 P37 to P30 P57 to P50 P67 to P60 P76 to P74, P72 to P70 P87 to P85 PB7 to PB0 High Functioning impedance* High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance Functioning Functioning Functioning High impedance Functioning PC1 and PC0 High impedance Note: * High level output when the pull-up MOS is turned on. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 513 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Appendix C Product Code Lineup Product Classification Voltage Product Group Flash version H8/36079 H8/36079GF Specification* 5.0 V 1 Package Temperature Specification* Regular Wide range Regular Wide range 2 (Package Product Code*3 HD64F36079GH HD64F36079GHW HD64F36079GFZ HD64F36079GFZW HD64F36079LH HD64F36079LHW HD64F36079LFZ HD64F36079LFZW HD64F36078GH HD64F36078GHW HD64F36078GFZ HD64F36078GFZW HD64F36078LH HD64F36078LHW HD64F36078LFZ HD64F36078LFZW Model Marking HD64F36079GH HD64F36079GHW HD64F36079GFZ HD64F36079GFZW HD64F36079LH HD64F36079LHW HD64F36079LFZ HD64F36079LFZW HD64F36078GH HD64F36078GHW HD64F36078GFZ HD64F36078GFZW HD64F36078LH HD64F36078LHW HD64F36078LFZ HD64F36078LFZW Code) QFP-64 (FP-64A) LQFP-64 (FP-64K) QFP-64 (FP-64A) LQFP-64 (FP-64K) QFP-64 (FP-64A) LQFP-64 (FP-64K) QFP-64 (FP-64A) LQFP-64 (FP-64K) memory Group H8/36079LF 3.3 V Regular Wide range Regular Wide range H8/36078GF 5.0 V Regular Wide range Regular Wide range H8/36078LF 3.3 V Regular Wide range Regular Wide range Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 514 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Product Classification Voltage Product Group Flash version H8/36077 H8/36077GF Specification* 5.0 V 1 Package Temperature Specification* Regular Wide range Regular Wide range 2 (Package Product Code* 3 Model Marking HD64F36077GH HD64F36077GHW HD64F36077GFZ Code) QFP-64 (FP-64A) LQFP-64 (FP-64K) QFP-64 (FP-64A) LQFP-64 (FP-64K) QFP-64 (FP-64A) LQFP-64 (FP-64K) QFP-64 (FP-64A) LQFP-64 (FP-64K) HD64F36077GH HD64F36077GHW HD64F36077GFZ memory Group HD64F36077GFZW HD64F36077GFZW HD64F36077LH HD64F36077LHW HD64F36077LFZ HD64F36077LFZW HD64F36074GH HD64F36074GHW HD64F36074GFZ HD64F36077LH HD64F36077LHW HD64F36077LFZ HD64F36077LFZW HD64F36074GH HD64F36074GHW HD64F36074GFZ H8/36077LF 3.3 V Regular Wide range Regular Wide range H8/36074GF 5.0 V Regular Wide range Regular Wide range HD64F36074GFZW HD64F36074GFZW HD64F36074LH HD64F36074LHW HD64F36074LFZ HD64F36074LFZW HD64F36074LH HD64F36074LHW HD64F36074LFZ HD64F36074LFZW H8/36074LF 3.3 V Regular Wide range Regular Wide range Notes: 1. Operating voltage range: 4.5 to 5.5 V (5.0-V models), 3.0 to 3.6 V (3.3-V models) 2. Operating temperature range: Regular specifications: -20 to +75C, wide-range specifications: -40 to +85C 3. The table includes products that are yet to be released. For details, please contact one of our sales representatives. Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 515 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 JEITA Package Code PLQP0064KB-A 64P6Q-A / FP-64K / FP-64KV 0.3g RENESAS Code Previous Code MASS[Typ.] Appendix E HE *2 c1 c ZE A A2 c A1 REJ09B0216-0300 HD D P-LQFP64-10x10-0.50 *1 33 48 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 516 of 528 32 49 bp b1 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS "*1" AND "*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH. 2. DIMENSION "*3" DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. 64 17 Reference Symbol Dimension in Millimeters Min D E 9.9 9.9 A2 HD HE 11.8 11.8 A A1 bp b1 0.05 0.15 0.1 0.20 0.18 c 0.09 0.145 0.20 Nom 10.0 10.0 1.4 12.0 12.0 12.2 12.2 1.7 0.15 0.25 Max 10.1 10.1 Terminal cross section 1 16 Index mark ZD Appendix D Package Dimensions Figure D.1 FP-64K Package Dimensions F y *3 bp L L1 e c1 e 0.125 0 0.5 8 x Detail F x y ZD ZE L L1 0.35 1.25 1.25 0.5 1.0 0.08 0.08 0.65 JEITA Package Code P-QFP64-14x14-0.80 RENESAS Code PRQP0064GB-A Previous Code FP-64A/FP-64AV MASS[Typ.] 1.2g HD *1 D 33 48 NOTE) 1. DIMENSIONS"*1"AND"*2" DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH 2. DIMENSION"*3"DOES NOT INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET. 49 bp b1 32 c1 E *2 HE c Terminal cross section ZE 17 Reference Symbol Dimension in Millimeters Min D E A2 HD 16.9 HE 16.9 Nom 14 14 2.70 17.2 17.2 17.5 17.5 Max 64 1 F 16 A A2 ZD c A A1 0.00 0.10 3.05 0.25 A1 Figure D.2 FP-64A Package Dimensions L L1 bp b1 c 0.29 0.37 0.35 0.12 0.17 0.45 0.22 Detail F *3 c1 0.15 e y bp x M e x y ZD ZE L L1 0 0.8 8 0.15 0.10 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.8 1.6 1.1 Appendix Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 517 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Appendix Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 518 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition Item Section 7 ROM 7.6 Programmer Mode Page 127 Revision (See Manual for Details) Amended In programmer mode, a PROM programmer can be used to perform programming/erasing via a socket adapter, just as a discrete flash memory. Use a PROM programmer that supports the MCU device type with the on-chip 128-kbyte flash memory (FZTAT64V5). 299 Amended Operating Frequency o (MHz) 12.288 Bit Rate (bit/s) n N Error (%) n N 14 Error (%) Section 16 Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) Table 16.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (3) Section 18 A/D Converter Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter 368 Deleted O/4 Control circuit O/8 Section 21 List of Registers 405 Amended Register Name : FLPWCR EBR1*1 Notes: 4. The bit configuration of EBR1 differs according to products. For the bit configuration of each product, see the list below. PDWND EB7 Bit 7 : ... : : : Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 519 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Item Section 21 List of Registers Page 408 Revision (See Manual for Details) Added H8/3609G,H8/36079L Register Name Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Module Name EBR1 EB7 EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 ROM H8/36078G,H8/36078L,H8/36077G,H8/36077L Register Name Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Module Name EBR1 - EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 ROM H8/36074G,H8/36074L Register Name Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Module Name EBR1 - - - EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 ROM Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Table 22.3 AC Characteristics 415 to 458 427 The wide temperature range of Ta = -40 to +85C is added to the conditions. Amended Values Item On-chip oscillator oscillation frequency Test Condition Vcc = 5.0 V Ta = 25C FSEL= 1 VCLSEL= 0 FSEL = 1, Ta = -20 to +75C, VCLSEL = 0 FSEL = 1, Ta = -40 to +85C, VCLSEL = 0 Vcc = 5.0 V, Ta = 25C, FSEL = 0, VCLSEL = 0 FSEL = 0, Ta = -20 to +75C, VCLSEL = 0 FSEL = 0, Ta = -40 to +85C, VCLSEL = 0 15.52 16.0 16.48 19.40 20.0 20.60 Min. 19.70 Typ. 20.0 Min. 20.30 19.20 20.00 20.80 15.76 16.0 16.24 15.36 16.0 16.64 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 520 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Item Table 22.6 A/D Converter Characteristics Page 431 Revision (See Manual for Details) Amended Values Item Conversion time (Single mode) Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy - - - - - -- -- -- -- -- 3.5 3.5 3.5 0.5 4.0 Min 134 Typ -- Max -- Table 22.9 Power-SupplyVoltage Detection Circuit Characteristics 434 Amended Values Item Min Typ Max Reset detection voltage 2* 2 3.3 3.6 3.9 Table 22.12 DC Characteristics (1) 440 Amended Values Item : Pull-up MOS current -IP Symbol : : -- Min : Typ : 60.0 -- Max : Amended Values Item : Active mode current consumption Symbol : : IOPE2 : : -- -- Min : : 2.8 2.5 Typ : : 4.0 -- Max : : Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 521 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Item Table 22.13 AC Characteristics Page 446 Revision (See Manual for Details) Amended Values Item On-chip oscillator oscillation frequency Test Condition Vcc = 3.3 V Ta = 25C FSEL= 1 VCLSEL= 0 FSEL = 1, Ta = -20 to +75C, VCLSEL = 0 FSEL = 1, Ta = -40 to +85C, VCLSEL = 0 Vcc = 3.3 V, Ta = 25C, FSEL = 0, VCLSEL = 0 FSEL = 0, Ta = -20 to +75C, VCLSEL = 0 FSEL = 0, Ta = -40 to +85C, VCLSEL = 0 19.40 20.00 20.60 Min. 19.70 Typ. 20.00 Min. 20.30 19.2 20.0 20.8 15.76 16.00 16.24 15.36 16.0 16.64 15.52 16.0 16.48 Table 22.19 Power-SupplyVoltage Detection Circuit Characteristics 453 Amended Values Item Power-supply falling detection voltage Power-supply rising detection voltage Min. 2.8 Min. 2.9 Min. 3.05 2.9 3.0 3.15 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 522 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Item Appendix C Product Code Lineup Page 515 Revision (See Manual for Details) Amended Product Classification Product Code*3 Model Marking Package (Package Product Group Voltage Specificat ion*1 Temperature Code) Specification *2 H8/36079 Group H8/36079GF 5.0 V Regular HD64F36079GH HD64F36079GH QFP-64 (FP-64A) Wide range HD64F36079GHW HD64F36079GHW Regular HD64F36079GFZ HD64F36079GFZ LQFP-64 (FP-64K) Wide range HD64F36079GFZW HD64F36079GFZW H8/36079LF 3.3 V Regular HD64F36079LH HD64F36079LH QFP-64 (FP-64A) Wide range HD64F36079LHW HD64F36079LHW Regular HD64F36079LFZ HD64F36079LFZ LQFP-64 (FP-64K) Wide range HD64F36079LFZW HD64F36079LFZW H8/36078GF 5.0 V Regular HD64F36078GH HD64F36078GH QFP-64 (FP-64A) Wide range HD64F36078GHW HD64F36078GHW Regular HD64F36078GFZ HD64F36078GFZ LQFP-64 (FP-64K) Wide range HD64F36078GFZW HD64F36078GFZW H8/36078LF 3.3 V Regular HD64F36078LH HD64F36078LH QFP-64 (FP-64A) Wide range HD64F36078LHW HD64F36078LHW Regular HD64F36078LFZ HD64F36078LFZ LQFP-64 (FP-64K) Wide range HD64F36078LFZW HD64F36078LFZW Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 523 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Item Appendix C Product Code Lineup Page 516 Revision (See Manual for Details) Amended Product Classification Product Code*3 Model Marking Package (Package Product Group Voltage Code) Specification *1 H8/36077 Group H8/36077GF 5.0 V Regular HD64F36077GH HD64F36077GH QFP-64 (FP-64A) Wide range HD64F36077GHW HD64F36077GHW Regular HD64F36077GFZ HD64F36077GFZ LQFP-64 (FP-64K) Wide range HD64F36077GFZW HD64F36077GFZW H8/36077LF 3.3 V Regular HD64F36077LH HD64F36077LH QFP-64 (FP-64A) Wide range HD64F36077LHW HD64F36077LHW Regular HD64F36077LFZ HD64F36077LFZ LQFP-64 (FP-64K) Wide range HD64F36077LFZW HD64F36077LFZW H8/36074GF 5.0 V Regular HD64F36074GH HD64F36074GH QFP-64 (FP-64A) Wide range HD64F36074GHW HD64F36074GHW Regular HD64F36074GFZ HD64F36074GFZ LQFP-64 (FP-64K) Wide range HD64F36074GFZW HD64F36074GFZW H8/36074LF 3.3 V Regular HD64F36074LH HD64F36074LH QFP-64 (FP-64A) Wide range HD64F36074LHW HD64F36074LHW Regular HD64F36074LFZ HD64F36074LFZ LQFP-64 (FP-64K) Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 524 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Index Numerics 14-bit PWM ............................................ 281 D Data reading procedure ........................... 177 Data transfer instructions .......................... 20 A A/D converter ......................................... 367 Absolute address....................................... 31 Acknowledge .......................................... 346 Address break ........................................... 63 Addressing modes..................................... 30 Arithmetic operations instructions............ 21 Asynchronous mode ............................... 303 Auto-reload timer operation.................... 183 E Effective address ....................................... 33 Effective address extension....................... 29 Erase/erase-verify ................................... 124 Erasing units ........................................... 107 Error protection....................................... 126 Event counter operation .......................... 183 Exception handling ................................... 45 B Bit manipulation instructions.................... 24 Bit rate .................................................... 296 Bit synchronous circuit ........................... 363 Block data transfer instructions ................ 28 Boot mode............................................... 117 Boot program.......................................... 117 Branch instructions ................................... 26 Break....................................................... 326 Buffer operation...................................... 254 F Flash memory.......................................... 107 Framing error .......................................... 307 G General registers ....................................... 13 H Hardware protection................................ 126 C Clock synchronous mode........................ 311 Clock synchronous serial format ............ 354 Complementary PWM mode .................. 244 Condition field .......................................... 29 Condition-code register (CCR)................. 14 CPU ............................................................ 9 I I/O port block diagrams .......................... 489 I/O ports .................................................. 131 I2C bus format ......................................... 345 I2C bus interface 2 (IIC2)........................ 329 Immediate ................................................. 32 Initial setting procedure .......................... 176 Input capture function ............................. 229 Instruction set............................................ 19 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 525 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Internal interrupts ..................................... 58 Internal power supply step-down circuit .................................... 393 Interrupt mask bit...................................... 15 Interrupt response time ............................. 60 Interval timer operation .......................... 182 IRQ3 to IRQ0 interrupts ........................... 56 P Package ....................................................... 3 Package dimensions ................................ 516 Parity error .............................................. 307 Pin arrangement .......................................... 5 Power-down modes................................... 93 Power-down states .................................. 127 Power-on reset ........................................ 379 Power-on reset circuit ............................. 386 Product code lineup ................................ 514 Program counter (PC) ............................... 14 Program/program-verify ......................... 121 Program-counter relative .......................... 32 Programmer mode................................... 127 Programming units.................................. 107 Programming/erasing in user program mode ................................. 120 PWM mode ............................................. 234 L Large current ports...................................... 3 Logic operations instructions.................... 23 Low-voltage detection circuit ................. 379 LVDI (interrupt by low voltage detect) circuit.............................................. 389, 390 LVDR (reset by low voltage detect) circuit...................................................... 387 M Memory indirect ....................................... 32 Memory map ............................................ 11 Module standby function ........................ 106 Multiprocessor communication function................................................... 318 R Realtime clock (RTC) ............................. 167 Register direct ........................................... 30 Register field............................................. 29 Register indirect ........................................ 31 Register indirect with displacement .......... 31 Register indirect with post-increment ....... 31 Register indirect with pre-decrement ........ 31 Register settings ...................................... 284 Registers ABRKCR ...................... 64, 400, 406, 411 ABRKSR ...................... 67, 400, 406, 411 ADCR ......................... 372, 400, 406, 411 ADCSR ....................... 371, 399, 406, 411 ADDRA ...................... 370, 399, 406, 411 ADDRB ...................... 370, 399, 406, 411 ADDRC ...................... 370, 399, 406, 411 ADDRD ...................... 370, 399, 406, 411 BARE............................ 67, 400, 406, 412 BARH ........................... 67, 400, 406, 412 N NMI interrupt............................................ 56 Noise canceler ........................................ 357 O On-board programming modes............... 117 Operation field.......................................... 29 Overrun error .......................................... 307 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 526 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 BARL............................ 67, 400, 406, 412 BDRH ........................... 67, 400, 406, 412 BDRL............................ 67, 400, 406, 412 BRR ............................ 296, 399, 405, 411 CKCSR ......................... 76, 397, 404, 410 EBR1 .......................... 114, 399, 405, 411 FENR .......................... 116, 399, 405, 411 FLMCR1..................... 112, 398, 405, 411 FLMCR2..................... 113, 398, 405, 411 FLPWCR .................... 116, 398, 405, 411 GRA............................ 213, 396, 403, 409 GRB ............................ 213, 396, 403, 409 GRC ............................ 213, 396, 403, 409 GRD............................ 213, 396, 403, 409 ICCR1......................... 332, 398, 405, 410 ICCR2......................... 335, 398, 405, 410 ICDRR ........................ 344, 398, 405, 410 ICDRS ................................................ 344 ICDRT ........................ 344, 398, 405, 410 ICIER.......................... 338, 398, 405, 410 ICMR .......................... 336, 398, 405, 410 ICSR ........................... 340, 398, 405, 410 IEGR1........................... 48, 401, 407, 413 IEGR2........................... 49, 401, 407, 413 IENR1........................... 50, 401, 407, 413 IENR2........................... 51, 401, 407, 413 IRR1 ............................. 51, 401, 407, 413 IRR2 ............................. 53, 402, 407, 413 IWPR ............................ 53, 402, 407, 413 LVDCR....................... 382, 397, 404, 410 LVDRF ....................... 385, 397, 404, 410 LVDSR ....................... 384, 397, 404, 410 MSTCR1....................... 98, 402, 408, 413 MSTCR2....................... 99, 402, 408, 413 PCR1........................... 133, 401, 407, 412 PCR2........................... 137, 401, 407, 412 PCR3........................... 141, 401, 407, 412 PCR5........................... 147, 401, 407, 412 PCR6........................... 151, 401, 407, 412 PCR7........................... 156, 401, 407, 412 PCR8 ........................... 159, 401, 407, 412 PCRC .......................... 165, 401, 407, 412 PDR1........................... 133, 400, 406, 412 PDR2........................... 138, 400, 407, 412 PDR3........................... 142, 400, 407, 412 PDR5........................... 147, 400, 407, 412 PDR6........................... 152, 401, 407, 412 PDR7........................... 157, 401, 407, 412 PDR8........................... 159, 401, 407, 412 PDRB .......................... 161, 401, 407, 412 PDRC .......................... 166, 401, 407, 412 PMR1 .......................... 132, 401, 407, 412 PMR3 .......................... 138, 401, 407, 412 PMR5 .......................... 146, 401, 407, 412 POCR .......................... 221, 396, 403, 409 PUCR1 ........................ 134, 400, 406, 412 PUCR5 ........................ 148, 400, 406, 412 PWCR ......................... 283, 400, 406, 411 PWDRL ...................... 283, 400, 406, 411 PWDRU ...................... 283, 400, 406, 411 RCCR............................ 73, 397, 404, 410 RCTRMDPR................. 74, 397, 404, 410 RCTRMDR ................... 75, 398, 404, 410 RDR ............................ 289, 399, 406, 411 RHRDR....................... 171, 397, 404, 410 RMINDR..................... 170, 397, 404, 410 RSECDR ..................... 169, 397, 404, 410 RSR..................................................... 289 RTCCR1 ..................... 173, 397, 404, 410 RTCCR2 ..................... 174, 397, 404, 410 RTCCSR ..................... 175, 397, 404, 410 RWKDR...................... 172, 397, 404, 410 SAR............................. 343, 398, 405, 410 SCR3 ........................... 292, 399, 405, 411 SMR ............................ 290, 399, 405, 411 SSR ............................. 294, 399, 406, 411 SYSCR1........................ 94, 401, 407, 412 SYSCR2........................ 97, 401, 407, 412 TCB1........................... 182, 398, 405, 410 TCNT .......................... 213, 396, 403, 409 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 527 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 TCNTV........................187, 399, 405, 411 TCORA........................188, 399, 405, 411 TCORB........................188, 399, 405, 411 TCR .............................214, 396, 403, 409 TCRV0 ........................188, 399, 405, 411 TCRV1 ........................191, 399, 405, 411 TCSRV ........................189, 399, 405, 411 TCSRWD ....................276, 400, 406, 411 TCWD .........................278, 400, 406, 411 TDR .............................290, 399, 406, 411 TFCR ...........................208, 397, 404, 409 TIER ............................220, 396, 403, 409 TIORA.........................215, 396, 403, 409 TIORC .........................216, 396, 403, 409 TLB1............................182, 398, 405, 410 TMB1 ..........................181, 398, 405, 410 TMDR..........................206, 397, 404, 409 TMWD ........................278, 400, 406, 411 TOCR ..........................212, 397, 404, 409 TOER...........................210, 397, 404, 409 TPMR ..........................207, 397, 404, 409 TSR..............................218, 396, 403, 409 TSTR ...........................206, 397, 404, 409 Reset exception handling.......................... 55 Reset synchronous PWM mode.............. 240 Slave address........................................... 346 Sleep mode.............................................. 103 Software protection................................. 126 Stack pointer (SP) ..................................... 14 Stack status ............................................... 59 Standby mode ......................................... 103 Start condition......................................... 346 Stop condition ......................................... 346 Subactive mode....................................... 104 Subsleep mode ........................................ 104 Synchronous operation............................ 233 System clocks ........................................... 71 System control instructions....................... 27 System prescaler S .................................... 91 T Timer B1 ................................................. 179 Timer V................................................... 185 Timer Z ................................................... 199 Transfer rate............................................ 334 Trap instruction......................................... 45 V Vector address........................................... 46 S Sample-and-hold circuit ......................... 374 Scan mode .............................................. 373 Serial communication interface 3 (SCI3) ................................... 285 Shift instructions....................................... 23 Single mode ............................................ 373 W Watchdog timer....................................... 275 Waveform output .................................... 284 Waveform output by compare match...... 227 WKP5 to WKP0 interrupts ....................... 56 Rev. 3.00 Sep. 10, 2007 Page 528 of 528 REJ09B0216-0300 Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer Hardware Manual H8/36079 Group, H8/36077 Group Publication Date: Rev.1.00, Sep. 16, 2005 Rev.3.00, Sep. 10, 2007 Published by: Sales Strategic Planning Div. Renesas Technology Corp. Edited by: Customer Support Department Global Strategic Communication Div. Renesas Solutions Corp. 2007. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. Sales Strategic Planning Div. Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan RENESAS SALES OFFICES Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information. Renesas Technology America, Inc. 450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K. Tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585-900 Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Unit 204, 205, AZIACenter, No.1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd, Pudong District, Shanghai, China 200120 Tel: <86> (21) 5877-1818, Fax: <86> (21) 6887-7898 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd. 7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, 1 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2730-6071 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd. 10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 2713-2999 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd. 1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001 Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd. Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea Tel: <82> (2) 796-3115, Fax: <82> (2) 796-2145 http://www.renesas.com Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jalan Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Tel: <603> 7955-9390, Fax: <603> 7955-9510 Colophon 6.0 H8/36079 Group, H8/36077 Group Hardware Manual |
Price & Availability of H836074LF
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |